Alignment Audit · district report
Fairview School District
PA · 246 policy sections read from the public manual · scored 2026-11-03
How far the written policy follows the district's own goals and the best evidence on what moves student outcomes. Board kit and press releaseModel Policy Manual
Watch the walkthrough
A narrated tour of what the audit found, the evidence behind the standards, and the questions the board has to answer.
Take it with you
57 domains: 0 meets · 28 partial · 5 conflicts · 24 silent
What to fix first
Ordered by what rides on it: a conflict in a high-stakes, well-evidenced domain comes first.
| # | Domain | Verdict | Where | Evidence |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Chronic absence response | ✕ Conflicts 0/6 | 204 Attendance | Tier A · stakes 5/5 |
| 2 | Early literacy instruction and K-3 reading screening | ○ Silent | no governing section | Tier A · stakes 5/5 |
| 3 | Suspension and expulsion | ✕ Conflicts 1/6 | 233 Suspension and Expulsion | Tier A · stakes 5/5 |
| 4 | Dual enrollment and early college | ○ Silent | no governing section | Tier A · stakes 4/5 |
| 5 | High-dosage tutoring | ○ Silent | no governing section | Tier A · stakes 4/5 |
| 6 | Tiered positive behavior supports and restorative practices | ○ Silent | no governing section | Tier A · stakes 4/5 |
| 7 | School-based mental health, counseling and suicide prevention | ◐ Partial 0/6 | 820 Suicide Awareness, Prevention, & Response | Tier A · stakes 4/5 |
| 8 | High-quality instructional materials and adoption | ◐ Partial 0/6 | 108 Adoption of Textbooks | Tier B · stakes 4/5 |
| 9 | Multi-tiered systems of support (MTSS / RtI) | ○ Silent | no governing section | Tier B · stakes 4/5 |
| 10 | Class size in the early grades | ◐ Partial 0/6 | 126 Class Size | Tier A · stakes 3/5 |
All 57 domains at a glance
Academics and access
Time and schedule
Discipline and climate
Safety
Health and wellbeing
Family and community
Staffing and instruction
Technology and data
Domain by domain
Each domain: what the research says, what this manual says in its own words, the verdict, and the clause we recommend.
Academics and access
✕ Conflicts 0/6Chronic absence response204 Attendance
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 5/5
Research. Missing 10 percent or more of school days lowers achievement and engagement from kindergarten on, and the share of students chronically absent nearly doubled after the pandemic. Controlled studies show that early, supportive, family-facing responses (mailed and texted attendance information, caseworkers who remove material barriers, structured adult mentoring) cut chronic absence by roughly 8 to 23 percent at modest cost, while no rigorous US study shows that fines, prosecution or court referral improve attendance. (Family mailings and texts: chronic absence -10% to -15% (2 to 7 points); school-based material-needs caseworkers: -8%; Check & Connect mentoring: -4.2 days (-23%) in grades 5-7, nothing in grades 1-4; pooled attendance interventions small (g = 0.09 to 0.25))
Mixed evidence. Average effects are small and uneven. Eklund et al. (2022) pooled g = 0.25 across 22 controlled studies and the family-school partnership category's confidence interval included zero; Li et al. (2026) pooled g = 0.09 across 13 post-2020 studies, with weaker effects in majority students-of-color samples. Check & Connect had no detectable effect in grades 1 to 4 and none on test scores or GPA; texting cut chronic absence but not achievement (Heppen et al. 2020). On punishment: Maynard et al. (2012) found court-based truancy programs did not differ from school- or community-based ones on short-term attendance, and an Australian RCT of a police-school partnership raised attendance, so 'punitive responses never work' overstates the record. What the evidence does support is narrower: no rigorous US study shows fines or prosecution improve attendance; Texas truancy filings fell about 90 percent after 2015 decriminalization with no drop in statewide attendance (descriptive only); and in a 131,312-student RCT the standard legalistic, punitively worded truancy notice was outperformed by a plain, supportive one.
Standard. Policy requires monthly identification of every student at or trending toward 10 percent absence, a documented supportive family contact and barrier assessment before any penalty, a written plan at Tier 2 and case management at Tier 3, and quarterly public reporting by building and subgroup; court or truancy referral is permitted only after the supportive steps are documented.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires a documented supportive family contact and barrier assessment before any penalty for absence. core
- ✕The policy requires monthly identification of every student at or trending toward 10 percent absence.
- ✕The policy requires a written plan for students at Tier 2.
- ✕The policy requires case management for students at Tier 3.
- ✕The policy requires quarterly public reporting of attendance by building and subgroup.
- ✕The policy permits court or truancy referral only after the supportive steps are documented.
What the manual says. 204 Attendance, revised March 9, 2020:
Recommended. Amend 204 Attendance
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent directs the student information system administrator to build a monthly report flagging every student at or above 10 percent of enrolled days missed, or with three or more absences in any 20-day period, broken out by school, grade and subgroup.
- The Superintendent adds fields to the student information system so each school can document the two-way family contact, the attendance plan, the barrier assessment and the case manager assignment for each identified student.
- Each principal names a staff member responsible for monthly attendance review and weekly follow-up on open attendance plans, and the Superintendent trains those staff on the supportive, non-threatening contact script and on contact in the family's preferred language.
- The Superintendent suspends any existing truancy referral, citation, fine, suspension or credit-denial practice for absence until the contact, plan and barrier-assessment documentation is in place at every school.
- The Superintendent pulls the prior year's chronic absence rate from the state report card file, by school, grade and subgroup, as the baseline for the first quarterly report.
Year one
- Each principal runs the identification report monthly and makes the documented two-way family contact within 10 school days of identification, then opens a written plan within 20 school days for any student still at or above 10 percent.
- The Superintendent assigns a case manager to every student at 20 percent or above, or whose attendance does not improve under a plan, and the case manager documents the transportation, health, housing, food, safety and school-climate assessment and the referrals made.
- The Superintendent delivers the quarterly report to the Board with the chronic absence rate, the share of identified students contacted within 10 school days, the number of plans opened and the number of truancy referrals filed, by school, grade and subgroup, and publishes it on the district website within 30 days.
- The Superintendent audits a sample of every truancy referral filed in year one to confirm the contact, plan and barrier assessment were documented before the referral.
Ongoing
- Each principal continues the monthly review, and the Superintendent continues quarterly reporting to the Board and website publication within 30 days of each report.
- The Board reviews the quarterly report each quarter and asks the Superintendent to explain any school where fewer identified students received a documented contact within 10 school days than in the prior quarter.
- The Superintendent reviews the policy and the referral audit annually and reports to the Board whether any truancy referral was filed without the required documented supportive steps.
| Measure | Percent of enrolled students missing 10 percent or more of enrolled days (the state chronic absence measure in the EDFacts or state report card file), by school, grade and subgroup; the share of identified students who received a documented two-way family contact within 10 school days; and the number of truancy referrals filed, each tracked monthly and reported quarterly. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The prior school year's chronic absence rate from the state report card file, by school, grade and subgroup, plus the number of truancy referrals filed in that year; the contact-within-10-school-days share starts at zero because it was not previously tracked. |
| Target | Within 1 year every school reports the share of identified students contacted within 10 school days rising each quarter, with zero truancy referrals filed without a documented contact, plan and barrier assessment; within 1 to 3 years the chronic absence rate falls below the baseline in every school and subgroup, with a reduction in the range of 8 to 15 percent of the baseline rate consistent with the family-contact and caseworker studies. |
| Benchmark | Controlled studies cited in the entry: family mailings and texts cut chronic absence 10 to 15 percent (2 to 7 points); school-based material-needs caseworkers cut it 8 percent; Check & Connect mentoring cut absences 4.2 days (23 percent) in grades 5 to 7 and had no effect in grades 1 to 4; pooled attendance interventions show small effects (g = 0.09 to 0.25). The entry gives no benchmark for the contact-within-10-days share or for referral counts, so those targets are directional. |
| Reported | The Superintendent reports to the Board each quarter and publishes the figures on the district website within 30 days of each report; the Board reviews the annual chronic absence rate against the baseline at the end of each school year. |
Sources. Eklund K, Burns MK, Oyen K, DeMarchena S, McCollom EM (2022). Addressing chronic absenteeism in schools: a meta-analysis of evidence-based interventions. School Psychology Review 51(1):95-111. doi · Li D, Singh S, Jeldi N, Chang S, Zhu M, Dailey K, Karabukayeva A, Cai C (2026). What works to keep students in school? A meta-analysis of interventions to reduce school absenteeism. Behavioral Sciences 16(5):697. doi · Rogers T, Feller A (2018). Reducing student absences at scale by targeting parents' misbeliefs. Nature Human Behaviour 2(5):335-342. doi · Robinson CD, Lee MG, Dearing E, Rogers T (2018). Reducing student absenteeism in the early grades by targeting parental beliefs. American Educational Research Journal 55(6):1163-1192. doi · Lasky-Fink J, Robinson CD, Chang HN, Rogers T (2021). Using behavioral insights to improve school administrative communications: the case of truancy notifications. Educational Researcher 50(7):442-450. doi · Guryan J, Christenson S, Cureton A, Lai I, Ludwig J, Schwarz C, Shirey E, Turner MC (2021). The effect of mentoring on school attendance and academic outcomes: a randomized evaluation of the Check & Connect program. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 40(3):841-882. doi · Sokol R, Degli Esposti M, Victor BG, Kernsmith P, Medina Del Toro V, Heinze J, Portugal J, Grinnell R, Gernaat E (2025). A school-based material needs intervention for chronic absenteeism: a state-wide staggered interrupted time series analysis. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health 80(3):174-181. doi · Maynard BR, McCrea KT, Pigott TD, Kelly MS (2012). Indicated truancy interventions: effects on school attendance among chronic truant students. Campbell Systematic Reviews 8(1). doi · Mazerolle L, Antrobus E, Bennett S, Eggins E (2017). Reducing truancy and fostering a willingness to attend school: results from a randomized trial of a police-school partnership program. Prevention Science 18(4):469-480. doi · Gottfried MA (2014). Chronic absenteeism and its effects on students' academic and socioemotional outcomes. Journal of Education for Students Placed at Risk 19(2):53-75. doi · Dee TS (2024). Higher chronic absenteeism threatens academic recovery from the COVID-19 pandemic. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 121(3):e2312249121. doi · Gubbels J, van der Put CE, Assink M (2019). Risk factors for school absenteeism and dropout: a meta-analytic review. Journal of Youth and Adolescence 48(9):1637-1667. doi · Cook PJ, Dodge KA, Gifford EJ, Schulting AB (2017). A new program to prevent primary school absenteeism: results of a pilot study in five schools. Children and Youth Services Review 82:262-270. doi · Heppen JB, Kurki A, Brown S (2020). Can texting parents improve attendance in elementary school? A test of an adaptive messaging strategy. NCEE 2020-006. Institute of Education Sciences, US Department of Education. link · Balfanz R, Byrnes V (2012). The importance of being in school: a report on absenteeism in the nation's public schools. Everyone Graduates Center, Johns Hopkins University. link · Attendance Works (2024). 3 tiers of intervention: a multi-tiered system of support for attendance. link
○ SilentEarly literacy instruction and K-3 reading screeningno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 5/5
Research. Systematic, explicit phonics instruction in K-1 raises word reading, spelling and comprehension by a moderate amount (about 0.4 SD) and is the only reading-disability treatment whose efficacy is confirmed in randomized trials; curriculum-based screening in K-2 predicts later reading well enough to find at-risk readers early. State 'science of reading' laws raise high-stakes elementary reading scores by a small amount so far, mainly where the policy is comprehensive, and the gains on low-stakes NAEP are not yet statistically clear. (Phonics d = 0.41 overall, 0.55 when begun in K-1; intensive K-3 interventions about 0.3 to 0.4 SD; state literacy laws +0.025 to +0.10 SD on state tests, NAEP effect not significant)
Mixed evidence. Suggate (2016) found phonics-only gains fade more at follow-up than phonemic awareness and comprehension gains, so phonics is necessary but not sufficient. Bowers (2020) reviewed 12 meta-analyses and argues the advantage of systematic phonics over alternative methods is smaller and less consistent than usually claimed; Torgerson et al. (2018) rate the effect moderate and the evidence base thinner than policy rhetoric implies. Westall and Cummings (2023) find that state early literacy laws move high-stakes scores by only 0.025 to 0.05 SD on average, that effects fade by middle school unless the policy is comprehensive, and that NAEP gains are not statistically significant; Mississippi's rise from 49th to the national average on fourth-grade NAEP reading (2013 to 2019) coincided with a package of screening, LETRS teacher training, coaching and third-grade retention, so no single component can claim the credit. Screening accuracy varies by tool and by how it is administered.
Standard. The policy shall require that core K-3 reading instruction be explicit and systematic in phonemic awareness, phonics, fluency, vocabulary and comprehension, shall prohibit three-cueing as the primary word-reading strategy, and shall require a valid universal screener three times a year in K-3 with intervention for every student flagged at risk.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (academics and access)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Curriculum inventories every K-3 core and intervention reading program against the state's approved list and flags any material that teaches three-cueing as the primary word-reading strategy.
- The Superintendent selects a universal screener with published classification accuracy from the state's approved screener list and adopts a 30-school-day fall screening window for every K-3 student.
- The Director of Curriculum builds a tracking sheet that records, for each flagged student, the screening date, the intervention start date, and the date of the written parent notice, so the 15-school-day deadlines can be checked.
- Each elementary principal counts the K-3 reading teachers and principals who have not completed a structured-literacy training and reports the number to the Director of Curriculum.
- The Superintendent sets the two-year training deadline for each K-3 reading teacher and principal from their hire date and informs them in writing.
Year one
- The Director of Curriculum completes the first fall, winter and spring screening windows for every K-3 student and delivers the November and June reports to the Board with participation, at-risk share by school and subgroup, and 15-day intervention rate.
- The Superintendent replaces any core or intervention material that relies on three-cueing with explicit, systematic materials covering phonemic awareness, phonics, fluency, vocabulary and comprehension, and brings the adoption to the Board.
- Each elementary principal enrolls every untrained K-3 reading teacher in the Board-approved structured-literacy training and confirms that interventions for flagged students are documented and evidence-based.
- The Director of Curriculum reviews the first year's screening and intervention data with each principal and corrects any school where flagged students waited more than 15 school days.
Ongoing
- The Director of Curriculum reports to the Board each November and June the screening participation rate, the at-risk share by school and subgroup, the 15-day intervention rate, the training completion percentage, and third-grade state ELA results.
- The Superintendent confirms each year that the screener remains on the state's approved list and that no newly adopted material uses three-cueing.
- Each elementary principal audits a sample of intervention records each semester for documentation and timely parent notice.
| Measure | Share of K-3 students screened within the first 30 school days; share of flagged students beginning a documented intervention within 15 school days; percent of K-3 reading teachers and principals with completed structured-literacy training; third-grade state ELA proficiency rate and subgroup gaps. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First fall screening window after adoption: participation rate, at-risk share by school and subgroup, and 15-day intervention rate as reported to the Board in November of year one; prior-year third-grade state ELA proficiency and subgroup gaps. |
| Target | Within 1 year, every K-3 student is screened within the first 30 school days and every flagged student begins a documented intervention with written parent notice within 15 school days; within 2 years of hire, every K-3 reading teacher and elementary principal completes the structured-literacy training; third-grade state ELA proficiency rises and subgroup gaps narrow over 1 to 3 years. |
| Benchmark | Explicit systematic phonics shows d = 0.41 overall and 0.55 when begun in K-1; intensive K-3 interventions show about 0.3 to 0.4 SD; state literacy laws show +0.025 to +0.10 SD on state tests with no significant NAEP effect yet, so a district should expect small gains on state ELA scores in the first years rather than a step change. The entry gives no numeric proficiency or gap target. |
| Reported | Director of Curriculum reports to the Board each November and each June, by school and subgroup, with the third-grade state ELA results included in the June report. |
Sources. Ehri LC, Nunes SR, Stahl SA, Willows DM (2001). Systematic phonics instruction helps students learn to read: Evidence from the National Reading Panel's meta-analysis. Review of Educational Research 71(3):393-447. doi · National Institute of Child Health and Human Development (2000). Report of the National Reading Panel: Teaching Children to Read. NIH Publication 00-4769. link · Galuschka K, Ise E, Krick K, Schulte-Korne G (2014). Effectiveness of treatment approaches for children and adolescents with reading disabilities: A meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. PLoS ONE 9(2):e89900. doi · Suggate SP (2016). A meta-analysis of the long-term effects of phonemic awareness, phonics, fluency, and reading comprehension interventions. Journal of Learning Disabilities 49(1):77-96. doi · Wanzek J, Stevens EA, Williams KJ, Scammacca N, Vaughn S, Sargent K (2018). Current evidence on the effects of intensive early reading interventions. Journal of Learning Disabilities 51(6):612-624. doi · January SA, Klingbeil DA (2020). Universal screening in grades K-2: A systematic review and meta-analysis of early reading curriculum-based measures. Journal of School Psychology 82:103-122. doi · Westall J, Cummings A (2023). The effects of early literacy policies on student achievement. EdWorkingPaper 23-788, Annenberg Institute at Brown University. doi · Novicoff S, Dee TS (2025). The achievement effects of scaling early literacy reforms. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 48(2):589-612. doi · Torgerson C, Brooks G, Gascoine L, Higgins S (2018). Phonics: reading policy and the evidence of effectiveness from a systematic 'tertiary' review. Research Papers in Education 34(2):208-238. doi · Bowers JS (2020). Reconsidering the evidence that systematic phonics is more effective than alternative methods of reading instruction. Educational Psychology Review 32(3):681-705. doi
○ SilentDual enrollment and early collegeno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 4/5
Research. Two independent lottery-based randomized studies of early college high schools (North Carolina, followed 17 years, and the AIR national study, followed six years past graduation) find higher high school graduation, college enrollment, and degree completion, with very large effects on associate degrees and bachelor's gains for low-income and first-generation students. A Tennessee RCT of a dual-credit math course shifted students from remedial to precalculus and AP math and from two-year to four-year colleges, though it did not raise overall college enrollment. The What Works Clearinghouse rates dual enrollment as having positive effects on degree attainment, credit accumulation, and completing school. (Early college: college enrollment +7 percentage points (84 vs 77 percent at year 10 in NC), bachelor's +5 points (30 vs 25 percent), associate degree effects very large; AIR study: enrollment and degree completion up within six years. Dual-credit math RCT: no change in overall enrollment, shift toward four-year colleges for mid-achievers. Observational dual enrollment: degree attainment gains largest for low-income students.)
Mixed evidence. Early college effects come from a whole-school model with college-going culture, supports, and a community college partner on site; a la carte dual enrollment courses are not the same intervention. The Tennessee RCT of a single dual-credit course found no effect on overall college enrollment and only limited evidence of better college math performance. Dual enrollment and AP participation gaps by race exist in most districts, and gaps widen where seats expand without equity supports (Xu, Solanki and Fink 2021). Credits earned may not transfer to the student's eventual college, and some AIR early college impacts were stronger for students with higher prior achievement. Early college GPA at completion and double-majoring did not differ from controls.
Standard. Every high school shall offer dual enrollment with a public college partner at no cost to students, with automatic eligibility for students meeting an objective threshold, transportation and textbooks provided, and participation and credit outcomes reported annually by student group; districts of sufficient size shall operate or partner with an early college pathway.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (academics and access)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of College and Career Readiness inventories every high school's current dual-credit offerings, partner agreements, student charges, and eligibility rules within 30 days.
- The Superintendent opens negotiations with at least one accredited public college on a written agreement covering courses, tuition and fee payment, textbooks, transportation, and transferability within 60 days.
- The Chief Financial Officer identifies Title I, Title IV-A, Perkins V, and state dual enrollment funds that can pay tuition, textbooks, and transportation and presents a cost estimate to the Board within 90 days.
- The Director of Research and Assessment builds the disaggregated dual-credit participation, pass, credit, and transfer report template and confirms National Student Clearinghouse access within 90 days.
Year one
- The Superintendent brings the signed college partnership agreement to the Board for approval so that every high school offers transferable general education dual-credit courses, on campus or online, in the next school year.
- Each principal identifies every student who meets the partner college's placement standard or the state assessment standard and mails written eligibility notices to those students and their parents or guardians by March 1.
- The Director of College and Career Readiness designs an early college pathway leading to an associate degree or 60 transferable credits by the end of grade 12 or 13, with a lottery admission process for oversubscription, and presents it for Board approval before the first application window opens.
- The Director of College and Career Readiness delivers the first annual report to the Board by November 1 covering participation, courses passed, credits earned and transferred, early college enrollment, and prior-class postsecondary enrollment, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status.
Ongoing
- The Director of College and Career Readiness reports to the Board by November 1 each year with the full disaggregated dual-credit, early college, and postsecondary enrollment data.
- Principals send written eligibility notices by March 1 each year and the Director audits each school to confirm that no student was charged for tuition, fees, textbooks, or transportation.
- The Superintendent reviews the college partnership agreement at least every 3 years and renegotiates course offerings and transferability guarantees as state transfer rules change.
| Measure | Share of graduates who earned at least one transferable college credit in high school and share who earned 12 or more, disaggregated by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, plus dual-credit pass rates, share of credits that transferred, early college enrollment and completion, and postsecondary enrollment of participants versus non-participants from the National Student Clearinghouse. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first November 1 report sets the baseline for each measure and each student group, using the most recent graduating class and the inventory of current student charges and offerings. |
| Target | Within 1 year every high school offers no-cost dual-credit courses and all eligible students receive written notice by March 1; within 3 years the share of graduates earning at least one transferable credit and the share earning 12 or more rise each year in every student group, gaps for low-income, first-generation, English learner, and disability-status students narrow, and postsecondary enrollment of dual enrollment participants exceeds that of non-participants. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric participation benchmark; the research reference points are the North Carolina early college results of college enrollment at 84 versus 77 percent at year 10 and bachelor's completion at 30 versus 25 percent, and the What Works Clearinghouse positive rating for dual enrollment on degree attainment, credit accumulation, and completing school. |
| Reported | Director of College and Career Readiness to the Board by November 1 each year, posted publicly with the state report card and National Student Clearinghouse data, with the Board reviewing progress against the baseline at that meeting. |
Sources. Edmunds JA, Unlu F, Phillips V, Glennie E, Mulhern C (2024). The Impact of Early Colleges on Postsecondary Performance and Completion. AERA Open 10. doi · Edmunds JA, Unlu F, Furey J, Glennie E, Arshavsky N (2020). What Happens When You Combine High School and College? The Impact of the Early College Model on Postsecondary Performance and Completion. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 42(2):257-278. doi · Edmunds JA, Unlu F, Glennie E, Bernstein L, Fesler L, Furey J, Arshavsky N (2017). Smoothing the Transition to Postsecondary Education: The Impact of the Early College Model. Journal of Research on Educational Effectiveness 10(2):297-325. doi · Song M, Zeiser K, Atchison D, Brodziak de los Reyes I (2021). Early College, Continued Success: Longer-Term Impact of Early College High Schools. Journal of Research on Educational Effectiveness 14(1):116-142. doi · Hemelt SW, Schwartz NL, Dynarski SM (2020). Dual-Credit Courses and the Road to College: Experimental Evidence from Tennessee. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 39(3):686-719. doi · An BP (2013). The Impact of Dual Enrollment on College Degree Attainment: Do Low-SES Students Benefit? Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 35(1):57-75. doi · Rosen R, Alterman E, Dixon M (2026). The P-TECH Model: Secondary and Postsecondary Findings From an Evaluation in New York City. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis. doi · Xu D, Solanki S, Fink J (2021). College Acceleration for All? Mapping Racial Gaps in Advanced Placement and Dual Enrollment Participation. American Educational Research Journal 58(5):954-992. doi · What Works Clearinghouse (2017). Dual Enrollment Programs: Intervention Report. U.S. Department of Education, Institute of Education Sciences. link
○ SilentHigh-dosage tutoringno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 4/5
Research. Across 96 randomized trials, tutoring raises achievement by about 0.29 SD, with the largest effects when teachers or paraprofessionals tutor, sessions run at least three days a week, and tutoring happens during the school day. Post-pandemic programs run at district scale have produced much smaller gains (0.04 to 0.09 SD in reading and no math effect in Nashville), and a 263-trial reanalysis puts the realistic effect of large, test-targeted programs at 0.16 to 0.22 SD. (+0.29 SD pooled in RCTs; +0.18 to +0.40 SD math in Chicago Saga RCTs; +0.16 to +0.22 SD expected at scale; Nashville district program +0.04 to +0.09 SD reading, 0 in math)
Mixed evidence. Effects shrink sharply with program scale: Kraft, Schueler and Falken (2026) find pooled effects fall from 0.40 SD in the full sample to 0.16 to 0.22 SD in studies that resemble large, standardized-test-targeted programs. Metro Nashville's district-run program, delivered partly before and after school by a mix of teachers and volunteers, produced only small reading gains and no math or grade effects (Kraft, Edwards and Cannata 2024). Opt-in and on-demand online tutoring is rarely used (under 1 percent of eligible students in New Mexico) and reaches higher-performing students. Pre-pandemic RCT effects came from programs costing several thousand dollars per student; thinner programs should expect thinner results.
Standard. Every student below benchmark on the district assessment shall be scheduled for tutoring in groups of four or fewer, at least three sessions a week of 30 minutes or more, during the school day, with a consistent trained tutor, and the district shall track delivered dosage and report it by school and student group.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain (1 sections touch related words but do not govern it). Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (academics and access)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Chief Academic Officer identifies every student below benchmark on the most recent fall or winter interim assessment in reading or mathematics and sends each principal a roster within 30 days.
- Each principal builds a master schedule that places tutoring during the regular school day in groups of four or fewer at least three sessions a week of 30 minutes or more, and submits it to the Superintendent within 60 days.
- The Chief Academic Officer selects district-approved tutoring materials aligned to the core curriculum and delivers tutor training to teachers and paraprofessionals assigned as tutors before the first session.
- The Chief Financial Officer identifies local, Title I, and state funds to replace expired ESSER money and presents a funded staffing plan to the Board within 90 days.
- The data office builds a tracking system that records sessions scheduled, sessions delivered, and assigned tutor for each tutored student by the end of the first 90 days.
Year one
- Each principal records sessions scheduled and sessions delivered for every tutored student each week and reviews dosage with the Chief Academic Officer monthly.
- The Chief Academic Officer matches tutored students to similar non-tutored students and computes interim assessment growth for both groups after the winter and spring administrations.
- The Superintendent delivers the first reports to the Board by December 15 and June 15 showing share of eligible students tutored, average sessions per week, tutor consistency, and growth, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status.
- The Superintendent directs any school where delivered dosage falls short of three sessions a week to submit a corrective schedule within 30 days.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by December 15 and June 15 every year on eligibility, dosage, tutor consistency, and comparative growth.
- The Chief Academic Officer re-runs eligibility after each fall and winter interim assessment and enrolls newly eligible students within 30 days.
- The Board reviews the June report each year and renews or adjusts the program funding and staffing for the following year.
| Measure | Share of students below benchmark on the interim assessment who received tutoring at least three sessions a week for at least ten weeks during the school day, by school and student group; sessions delivered versus scheduled; share of sessions with the student's assigned tutor; interim assessment growth of tutored students compared with matched non-tutored students. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Share of below-benchmark students currently receiving tutoring that meets the dosage standard, sessions delivered versus scheduled, and tutor consistency as recorded in the first report after adoption; most districts will have no prior dosage record, so the first December 15 report sets the baseline. |
| Target | Within one year, every student identified below benchmark is enrolled and the share receiving at least three sessions a week for at least ten weeks during the school day rises each reporting period, with no student group lagging the district rate; within 1 to 3 years, tutored students show growth on the interim assessment greater than matched non-tutored students in both reading and mathematics. |
| Benchmark | Randomized trials show about 0.29 SD pooled, 0.18 to 0.40 SD in math in the Chicago Saga trials, and a realistic 0.16 to 0.22 SD for large test-targeted programs at scale; the Nashville district program produced only 0.04 to 0.09 SD in reading and no math effect, which marks the floor the district should aim to exceed. |
| Reported | Superintendent reports to the Board by December 15 and June 15 each year, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, with any school below the dosage standard named and its corrective schedule attached. |
Sources. Nickow A, Oreopoulos P, Quan V (2024). The Promise of Tutoring for PreK-12 Learning: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of the Experimental Evidence. American Educational Research Journal 61(1):74-107. doi · Nickow A, Oreopoulos P, Quan V (2020). The Impressive Effects of Tutoring on PreK-12 Learning: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of the Experimental Evidence. NBER Working Paper 27476. doi · Kraft MA, Schueler BE, Falken G (2026). What Impacts Should We Expect From Tutoring at Scale? Exploring Meta-Analytic Generalizability. Review of Educational Research. doi · Guryan J, Ludwig J, Bhatt MP, Cook PJ, Davis JMV, Dodge K, et al. (2023). Not Too Late: Improving Academic Outcomes among Adolescents. American Economic Review 113(3):738-765. doi · Kraft MA, Falken GT (2021). A Blueprint for Scaling Tutoring and Mentoring Across Public Schools. AERA Open 7. doi · Kraft MA, Edwards DS, Cannata M (2024). The Scaling Dynamics and Causal Effects of a District-Operated Tutoring Program. EdWorkingPaper 24-1030, Annenberg Institute at Brown University. doi · Dietrichson J, Bog M, Filges T, Klint Jorgensen AM (2017). Academic Interventions for Elementary and Middle School Students With Low Socioeconomic Status: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. Review of Educational Research 87(2):243-282. doi
◐ Partial 0/6High-quality instructional materials and adoption108 Adoption of Textbooks
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 4/5
Research. Which textbook a district adopts can move achievement as much as many costlier reforms: in California the best-performing elementary math series outscored its rivals by 0.05 to 0.08 SD at near-zero marginal cost, a randomized IES trial found differences of 4 to 7 percentile points between first and second grade math curricula, and a field experiment giving teachers high-quality off-the-shelf lessons raised math achievement by 0.06 SD at about 6 dollars per student. Effects depend on the specific materials and their use with aligned professional development; districts' formal adoption processes rarely examine evidence of effectiveness. (Textbook choice: 0.05 to 0.08 SD (California), roughly 0.1 to 0.17 SD between best and worst in the IES RCT. Online lessons plus supports: +0.06 SD math (RCT). Curriculum plus curriculum-based PD: positive effects on science achievement (RCT). Six-state Common Core era study: no detectable differences among textbooks.)
Mixed evidence. Blazar et al. (2020) examined elementary math textbooks across six states after the Common Core transition and found no meaningful differences in achievement among the most widely used books, a null that contrasts with the earlier California and Indiana findings; one explanation is that textbook use had become fragmented and teachers supplemented heavily. Effects in the IES trial and in California varied by grade and did not always persist. Standards alignment on the cover is unreliable: Polikoff (2015) found textbooks labeled Common Core aligned were poorly aligned. Materials without aligned professional development and without time to implement show weak effects, and Jackson and Makarin's gains were concentrated among teachers who actually used the lessons. Evidence for English language arts and secondary materials is thinner than for elementary math.
Standard. The district shall adopt core instructional materials for each subject and grade through a published process that requires an independent quality review, consideration of effectiveness evidence, a classroom pilot, and a curriculum-specific professional development plan, and shall maintain a public inventory of materials in use with achievement tracked after each adoption.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires the district to adopt core instructional materials for each subject and grade through a published adoption process. core
- ✕The policy requires an independent quality review of candidate materials before adoption.
- ✕The policy requires consideration of evidence of effectiveness before materials are adopted.
- ✕The policy requires a classroom pilot of candidate materials before adoption.
- ✕The policy requires a curriculum-specific professional development plan as part of each adoption.
- ✕The policy requires a public inventory of materials in use with achievement tracked after each adoption.
What the manual says. 108 Adoption of Textbooks, revised February 25, 2008:
Also governs: 107 Adoption of Courses of Study
Recommended. Amend 108 Adoption of Textbooks
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Assistant Superintendent for Curriculum compiles the inventory of core instructional materials in use in every subject and grade, with the adoption year and the EdReports or state review rating of each program, and the Superintendent posts it on the district website.
- The Assistant Superintendent for Curriculum drafts the published adoption process covering the independent quality review, the written effectiveness-evidence summary for each finalist, the one-semester pilot in at least two schools, and the 20-hour curriculum-specific professional development plan, and the Superintendent brings it to the Board for approval.
- The curriculum office flags every core program on the inventory that lacks an independent quality rating or is more than six years past adoption and schedules each for review.
- The Assistant Superintendent for Curriculum confirms with district counsel whether the state runs an adoption list the district must choose from or justify departing from, and adds that step to the process.
- The curriculum office adds items to the annual teacher survey asking which program teachers use as the primary resource and whether supplemental materials exceed 20 percent of instructional time in any course.
Year one
- The Assistant Superintendent for Curriculum runs the first adoption under the new process for the subject and grade band with the oldest or lowest-rated core program, including the pilot in at least two schools with teacher and student feedback.
- Principals and the curriculum office deliver at least 20 hours of curriculum-specific professional development to every teacher using newly adopted materials in the first year and log hours per teacher.
- Principals conduct classroom walkthroughs and the curriculum office administers the teacher survey to measure the share of classrooms using the adopted core program as the primary resource.
- The Assistant Superintendent for Curriculum delivers the first annual report to the Board by August 31 with the inventory, primary-use share, professional development hours, and baseline achievement in each subject.
Ongoing
- The Assistant Superintendent for Curriculum reports to the Board by August 31 each year and tracks achievement and growth for three years after every adoption.
- The curriculum office reviews every core program at least every six years through the published adoption process.
- Principals collect reports from teachers whose supplemental materials exceed 20 percent of instructional time in a course and share a summary with the curriculum office.
| Measure | Share of core programs on the public inventory that have an independent quality rating and were adopted through the published process, share of classrooms using the adopted core program as primary, curriculum-specific professional development hours per teacher in adoption year, and achievement and growth in each subject for three years after each adoption. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Current inventory of core materials by subject and grade with adoption year and quality rating, current share of classrooms using the adopted program as primary from the first teacher survey and walkthroughs, and achievement in each subject in the year before the first adoption under the new process. |
| Target | Within 1 year, the full inventory is posted and every new adoption follows the published process with a semester pilot in at least two schools and at least 20 hours of professional development per teacher in the first year; within 3 years of each adoption, the share of classrooms using the core program as primary rises from baseline and achievement and growth in that subject improve relative to the pre-adoption year. |
| Benchmark | Research gives effect sizes, not district targets: 0.05 to 0.08 SD between elementary math series in California, 0.1 to 0.17 SD between best and worst in the IES RCT, and +0.06 SD from high-quality off-the-shelf lessons; a six-state study found no detectable differences, so the entry supports a directional target, not a numeric district benchmark. |
| Reported | Assistant Superintendent for Curriculum reports to the Board by August 31 each year, with the inventory posted on the district website. |
Sources. Koedel, C., Li, D., Polikoff, M. S., Hardaway, T., & Wrabel, S. L. (2017). Mathematics Curriculum Effects on Student Achievement in California. AERA Open 3(1). doi · Koedel, C., & Polikoff, M. (2017). Big bang for just a few bucks: The impact of math textbooks in California. Evidence Speaks Reports 2(5). Washington, DC: Brookings Institution. link · Jackson, C. K., & Makarin, A. (2018). Can Online Off-the-Shelf Lessons Improve Student Outcomes? Evidence from a Field Experiment. American Economic Journal: Economic Policy 10(3):226-254. doi · Agodini, R., Harris, B., Thomas, M., Murphy, R., & Gallagher, L. (2010). Achievement Effects of Four Early Elementary School Math Curricula: Findings for First and Second Graders. NCEE 2011-4001. Washington, DC: Institute of Education Sciences. link · Bhatt, R., & Koedel, C. (2012). Large-Scale Evaluations of Curricular Effectiveness: The Case of Elementary Mathematics in Indiana. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 34(4):391-412. doi · Blazar, D., Heller, B., Kane, T. J., Polikoff, M., Staiger, D. O., Carrell, S., Goldhaber, D., Harris, D. N., Hitch, R., Holden, K. L., & Kurlaender, M. (2020). Curriculum Reform in the Common Core Era: Evaluating Elementary Math Textbooks Across Six U.S. States. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 39(4):966-1019. doi · Taylor, J. A., Getty, S. R., Kowalski, S. M., Wilson, C. D., Carlson, J., & Van Scotter, P. (2015). An Efficacy Trial of Research-Based Curriculum Materials With Curriculum-Based Professional Development. American Educational Research Journal 52(5):984-1017. doi · Polikoff, M. S., Campbell, S. E., Rabovsky, S., Koedel, C., Le, Q. T., Hardaway, T., & Gasparian, H. (2020). The formalized processes districts use to evaluate mathematics textbooks. Journal of Curriculum Studies 52(4):451-477. doi · Kaufman, J. H., Doan, S., & Fernandez, M. P. (2021). The Rise of Standards-Aligned Instructional Materials for U.S. K-12 Mathematics and English Language Arts Instruction. Santa Monica, CA: RAND Corporation. doi · Steiner, D. (2017). Curriculum Research: What We Know and Where We Need to Go. Washington, DC: StandardsWork, for the Knowledge Matters Campaign. link
○ SilentMulti-tiered systems of support (MTSS / RtI)no governing section
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 4/5
Research. The components of a tiered system work when they are done well: K-3 supplemental reading interventions average about 0.4 SD across dozens of rigorous studies, early K-2 screeners predict later reading, and a randomized trial shows that starting intervention immediately after screening beats waiting a semester (d = 0.36). The one large evaluation of RtI as schools actually ran it (Balu et al. 2015, 146 schools in 13 states) found that first graders just below the cutoff who were pulled into Tier 2 or 3 scored lower in spring than peers just above it, with no effect in grades 2 and 3. (Tier 2 and intensive K-3 reading interventions ES about 0.3 to 0.5; immediate versus delayed intervention d = 0.36; national RtI evaluation: grade 1 negative (about -0.1 SD), grades 2-3 null)
Mixed evidence. Balu et al. (2015) is the only large-scale evaluation of RtI practice and its result was null to negative; Gersten, Jayanthi and Dimino (2017) and Fuchs and Fuchs (2017) argue the design captured students near the cutoff who were often pulled from core instruction into undifferentiated groups, so it tests weak implementation rather than the model, but the finding stands as a warning that labels and tiers do not help by themselves. Burns et al. (2005) reported very large effects for RtI models, but from a small set of mostly non-experimental field studies. Most district MTSS policies describe structures (teams, tiers, forms) and not instructional content, intensity or dosage, which is where the measurable effects live. Universal screening generates false positives at the K-1 level and its accuracy depends on the measure and administration quality.
Standard. The policy shall name the screener, the screening windows, the timeline from flag to intervention, the minimum dosage of Tier 2 and Tier 3 instruction delivered in addition to core instruction, the progress-monitoring interval and the decision rule for moving students between tiers.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (academics and access)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent selects and names the universal screener for reading, mathematics and behavior with published classification accuracy and publishes the fall, winter and spring screening windows before the school year opens.
- The Director of Student Services issues a written procedure to every principal setting the 15 school day flag-to-intervention timeline, the Tier 2 minimum of three 30-minute sessions per week, the Tier 3 minimum of five 30-minute sessions per week in groups of three or fewer, and the rule that both tiers add to rather than replace core instruction.
- Each principal completes screening of every student in kindergarten through grade 8 within the first 30 school days and submits the participation count and the share identified at risk to the Director of Student Services.
- The Director of Student Services configures the student information system to log the intervention start date for each at-risk student so the 15 school day interval can be computed, and the special education director confirms in writing that no school requires tiered intervention before a parent-requested evaluation proceeds, consistent with OSEP memo 11-07.
- Each principal forms a student support team, names its chair, and schedules data review meetings at least every six weeks for the full year.
Year one
- The Director of Student Services delivers the first December report to the Board covering fall screening participation, share identified at risk, share of at-risk students with intervention logged within 15 school days, and progress-monitoring frequency per Tier 2 and Tier 3 student.
- Each student support team applies the written decision rule at every six-week review, records exit, continue or intensify for each Tier 2 and Tier 3 student, and refers any student not responding after two cycles for special education evaluation.
- The Director of Student Services delivers the June report to the Board adding share of Tier 2 students exiting to Tier 1 within a semester and special education referral and identification rates by school and race, and flags any school where first graders placed in Tier 2 or Tier 3 are not outpacing comparable students who stayed in Tier 1.
- The Superintendent verifies that the district's screening windows and parent notification timelines meet the state statute where the state specifies them.
Ongoing
- The Director of Student Services reports to the Board each December and June on all indicators in the clause, broken out by school and race.
- The Superintendent audits a sample of Tier 2 and Tier 3 schedules each year to confirm dosage and that intervention time is added to, not substituted for, core instruction.
- The student support team at each school reviews its decision records each semester and corrects any school where progress monitoring lapses below every two weeks.
| Measure | Share of at-risk students with Tier 2 or Tier 3 intervention logged within 15 school days of screening, share of Tier 2 students exiting to Tier 1 within a semester, screening participation each window, progress-monitoring frequency, and special education referral and identification rates by school and race. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Fall of the first year of operation: screening participation, share identified at risk, share with intervention logged within 15 school days, and current special education referral and identification rates by school and race, as submitted by each principal and compiled by the Director of Student Services. |
| Target | By the June report of year one, every school screens all K-8 students within the first 30 school days of each window, every at-risk student has intervention logged within 15 school days, every Tier 2 and Tier 3 student is progress-monitored at least every two weeks, and the share of Tier 2 students exiting to Tier 1 within a semester rises each year over the first 3 years with no school showing referral or identification rates by race that diverge from its share of enrollment without a documented review. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives effect sizes for well-run components (Tier 2 and intensive K-3 reading interventions about 0.3 to 0.5 SD; immediate versus delayed intervention d = 0.36) and a cautionary national result (grade 1 about -0.1 SD, grades 2-3 null in Balu et al. 2015), but no numeric benchmark for the exit rate, the timeliness rate or the referral rates, so the target is directional on those indicators and absolute on the clause's own timelines and dosage. |
| Reported | Director of Student Services reports to the Board each December and June, by school and race, with the June report comparing spring outcomes of students placed in Tier 2 or Tier 3 against students just above the cutoff to check for the negative grade 1 pattern found in the national evaluation. |
Sources. Balu R, Zhu P, Doolittle F, Schiller E, Jenkins J, Gersten R (2015). Evaluation of Response to Intervention Practices for Elementary School Reading. NCEE 2016-4000. National Center for Education Evaluation and Regional Assistance, Institute of Education Sciences, US Department of Education. link · Gersten R, Jayanthi M, Dimino J (2017). Too much, too soon? Unanswered questions from national Response to Intervention evaluation. Exceptional Children 83(3):244-254. doi · Fuchs D, Fuchs LS (2017). Critique of the national evaluation of Response to Intervention: A case for simpler frameworks. Exceptional Children 83(3):255-268. doi · Gersten R, Haymond K, Newman-Gonchar R, Dimino J, Jayanthi M (2020). Meta-analysis of the impact of reading interventions for students in the primary grades. Journal of Research on Educational Effectiveness 13(2):401-427. doi · Wanzek J, Vaughn S, Scammacca N, Gatlin B, Walker MA, Capin P (2016). Meta-analyses of the effects of Tier 2 type reading interventions in grades K-3. Educational Psychology Review 28(3):551-576. doi · Wanzek J, Stevens EA, Williams KJ, Scammacca N, Vaughn S, Sargent K (2018). Current evidence on the effects of intensive early reading interventions. Journal of Learning Disabilities 51(6):612-624. doi · Al Otaiba S, Connor CM, Folsom JS, Wanzek J, Greulich L, Schatschneider C, Wagner RK (2014). To wait in Tier 1 or intervene immediately: A randomized experiment examining first-grade response to intervention in reading. Exceptional Children 81(1):11-27. doi · January SA, Klingbeil DA (2020). Universal screening in grades K-2: A systematic review and meta-analysis of early reading curriculum-based measures. Journal of School Psychology 82:103-122. doi · Jenkins JR, Hudson RF, Johnson ES (2007). Screening for at-risk readers in a Response to Intervention framework. School Psychology Review 36(4):582-600. doi · Gersten R, Compton D, Connor CM, Dimino J, Santoro L, Linan-Thompson S, Tilly WD (2009). Assisting Students Struggling with Reading: Response to Intervention and Multi-Tier Intervention in the Primary Grades. IES Practice Guide NCEE 2009-4045. What Works Clearinghouse. link · Burns MK, Appleton JJ, Stehouwer JD (2005). Meta-analytic review of responsiveness-to-intervention research: Examining field-based and research-implemented models. Journal of Psychoeducational Assessment 23(4):381-394. doi
◐ Partial 0/5Career and technical education pathways115 Vocational Technical Education
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Structured CTE pathways, meaning multi-year sequences with employer partners, work-based learning, and a credential, raise graduation and earnings in causal studies: the MDRC career academies RCT found earnings 11 percent higher eight years after high school (17 percent for young men), Massachusetts and Connecticut regression-discontinuity studies find 7 to 10 point gains in on-time graduation and, in Connecticut, 32 percent higher quarterly earnings for men, and New York City's lottery-based P-TECH evaluation found associate degree completion up 5 percentage points with dual enrollment more than doubled. Effects come from depth in one field, not scattered introductory courses, and are concentrated among young men. (Career academies: earnings +11 percent per year over 8 years (+17 percent men), attainment unchanged. Massachusetts regional vocational schools: on-time graduation +7 to +10 points. Connecticut technical high schools: graduation +10 points and quarterly earnings +32 percent for men, no effect for women. P-TECH: associate degree +5 points, internships +38 points. Upper-level CTE courses: about +2 percent wages per additional year; introductory courses 0.)
Mixed evidence. Gains are uneven. Career academies did not raise educational attainment, and the Connecticut technical schools had no measurable effect on women. P-TECH's degree effects were concentrated among young men, and its interim credits were mostly in CTE and non-academic subjects. Earnings returns vary widely by field, with health care and IT far above others and some fields near zero (Ecton and Dougherty 2023), and returns accrue only to upper-level coursework in a single field (Kreisman and Stange 2020). The strongest effects come from whole-school or regional CTE models with oversubscribed admissions; a single elective or a program without employer partners should not expect these results. Kemple warned that partial implementation of the academy model may not reproduce the impacts.
Standard. Every high school shall offer at least one multi-year CTE pathway aligned to a regional high-wage field with an employer partner, work-based learning, dual credit, and an industry credential; admission to oversubscribed pathways shall be by lottery or objective criteria, and completion and post-graduation outcomes shall be reported by student group.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires every high school to offer at least one multi-year CTE pathway aligned to a regional high-wage field. core
- ✕The policy requires each pathway to include an employer partner and work-based learning.
- ✕The policy requires each pathway to include dual credit and an industry credential.
- ✕The policy requires admission to oversubscribed pathways to be by lottery or objective criteria.
- ✕The policy requires completion and post-graduation outcomes to be reported by student group.
What the manual says. 115 Vocational Technical Education, revised December 18, 2006:
Recommended. Amend 115 Vocational Technical Education
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Career and Technical Education inventories every high school's current CTE course sequences against the model clause and the most recent regional labor market analysis and reports to the Superintendent which schools have fewer than two qualifying programs of study.
- The Director pulls the district's current Perkins V accountability data on concentrators, completers, credentials, dual credits, and work-based learning placements, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, disability status, and sex, and files it as the baseline.
- The Superintendent names the employer or industry partner for each existing or planned program of study and the Director opens dual-credit agreement talks with the nearest public college.
- The Director publishes the lottery or objective admission criteria for any oversubscribed program within 90 days and the Superintendent ends admission by staff recommendation at the same time.
- The Director confirms with each principal that no student is enrolled in a CTE program of study in place of the college-preparatory course sequence and corrects any such schedule.
Year one
- The Director brings to the Board, for a vote, a plan under which each high school offers at least two programs of study with three or more sequenced courses, a named partner, a dual-credit agreement, a paid or credit-bearing placement for every grade 12 concentrator, and credential preparation.
- The Chief Financial Officer budgets payment of industry credential exam fees for every concentrator and the Director reports the fees paid in the December 1 report.
- The Director signs the dual-credit agreements and work-based learning placement agreements for each program and reports how many grade 12 concentrators have a placement by school and student group.
- The Director delivers the first December 1 report to the Board using Perkins V data, including the prior cohort's employment or postsecondary enrollment from state wage and Clearinghouse matches.
Ongoing
- The Director delivers the December 1 report each year and recommends closing or redesigning any program whose completers show no employment or enrollment advantage for two consecutive years, and the Board votes on each recommendation.
- The Director completes the Perkins V comprehensive local needs assessment every two years and realigns programs of study to the regional labor market analysis.
- The Board reviews the disaggregated concentrator data each year for gaps by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, disability status, and sex and directs the Superintendent to address any program whose completers are drawn disproportionately from one group.
| Measure | Share of graduates who completed a CTE program of study (two or more courses in one pathway) and earned an industry-recognized credential or 12 or more aligned college credits; share of concentrators with a paid work-based learning placement; concentrator graduation rate; and employment or postsecondary enrollment of the prior cohort, each by school and student group |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The district's current Perkins V accountability data for concentrators, completers, credentials, dual credits, and work-based learning placements, by school and student group, pulled in the first 90 days, plus the current count of high schools with fewer than two qualifying programs of study |
| Target | Within 1 year every high school offers at least two qualifying programs of study and the structural elements (partner, dual-credit agreement, placement, credential preparation, fee payment) are in place; within 3 years the share of graduates who are concentrators with a credential or 12 aligned credits, the share of concentrators with a paid placement, and the concentrator graduation rate rise above baseline in each student group, and completers of every retained program show an employment or enrollment advantage over non-completers in the prior cohort |
| Benchmark | The research supports direction but not a district-level target for the indicator: causal studies find on-time graduation gains of 7 to 10 points, earnings gains of 11 percent per year over 8 years (17 percent for young men) and 32 percent higher quarterly earnings for men, associate degree completion up 5 points, and internships up 38 points, with effects coming from depth in one field rather than introductory courses; no numeric benchmark exists for the share of graduates who are concentrators with a credential, so the target is directional |
| Reported | Annual report to the Board by December 1 from the Director of Career and Technical Education, using Perkins V accountability data and state wage and Clearinghouse matches, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, disability status, and sex, with a close-or-redesign recommendation for any program showing no completer advantage for two consecutive years |
Sources. Kemple JJ, Willner CJ (2008). Career Academies: Long-Term Impacts on Labor Market Outcomes, Educational Attainment, and Transitions to Adulthood. MDRC. link · Dougherty SM (2018). The Effect of Career and Technical Education on Human Capital Accumulation: Causal Evidence from Massachusetts. Education Finance and Policy 13(2):119-148. doi · Brunner EJ, Dougherty SM, Ross SL (2023). The Effects of Career and Technical Education: Evidence from the Connecticut Technical High School System. Review of Economics and Statistics 105(4):867-882. doi · Rosen R, Alterman E, Dixon M (2026). The P-TECH Model: Secondary and Postsecondary Findings From an Evaluation in New York City. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis. doi · Rosen R, Alterman E, Treskon L, Parise L, Dixon M, Wuest C (2023). P-TECH 9-14 Pathways to Success: Implementation, Impact, and Cost Findings from the New York City P-TECH 9-14 Schools Evaluation. MDRC. link · Kreisman D, Stange K (2020). Vocational and Career Tech Education in American High Schools: The Value of Depth Over Breadth. Education Finance and Policy 15(1):11-44. doi · Ecton WG, Dougherty SM (2023). Heterogeneity in High School Career and Technical Education Outcomes. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 45(1):157-181. doi · Hemelt SW, Lenard MA, Paeplow CO (2019). Building bridges to life after high school: Contemporary career academies and student outcomes. Economics of Education Review 68:161-178. doi
✕ Conflicts 0/5Summer learning and extended learning time124 Summer School
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Voluntary summer programs with at least five weeks and three hours of daily academic instruction produce modest gains for students who attend regularly: a meta-analysis of 37 studies finds +0.10 SD in math, a meta-analysis of 41 summer reading interventions finds significant reading gains concentrated among low-income children, and the RAND five-district randomized study found a near-term math benefit after one summer with persistent math and language arts advantages for high attenders after two. Extending the regular school day for literacy in low-performing Florida schools raised reading 0.05 SD in a regression-discontinuity design. (Summer math programs +0.10 SD (meta-analysis); summer reading interventions significant, larger for low-income children; RAND RCT: math gain after one summer that faded by fall, high attenders ahead in math and language arts through spring of the following year; Florida extra literacy hour +0.05 SD reading)
Mixed evidence. Intent-to-treat effects are small and fade: in the RAND study the causal benefit of being offered the program dissipated by the next fall, offering a second summer showed no significant causal effect, and three years later high-attender advantages were no longer statistically significant. Attendance is the binding constraint, and the students who attend 20 or more days differ from those who do not, so the high-attender estimates are correlational. Von Hippel and Hamrock (2019) show that much of the canonical summer-learning-loss literature was distorted by test scaling artifacts, and gaps form mainly before school entry, which weakens the rationale for summer programs as a gap-closing tool. Extended-day and extended-year studies are mostly weak in design (Patall et al. 2010), and added time costs staff pay and transportation.
Standard. The district offers a free summer program of at least five weeks with at least three hours of daily academic instruction by certified teachers, prioritized for students below grade level, and reports attendance and achievement growth for attenders each year.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy provides a free summer program of at least five weeks with at least three hours of daily academic instruction. core
- ✕The policy requires that summer academic instruction be delivered by certified teachers.
- ✕The policy prioritizes summer program enrollment for students performing below grade level.
- ✕The policy requires annual reporting of summer program attendance.
- ✕The policy requires annual reporting of achievement growth for students who attended the summer program.
What the manual says. 124 Summer School, revised June 20, 1994:
Recommended. Amend 124 Summer School
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Assistant Superintendent drafts the summer program plan showing at least five weeks, at least three daily hours of reading and mathematics instruction by certified teachers, and the enrichment, meals and transportation to be provided, and brings it to the Board within 60 days.
- The Director of Federal Programs identifies Title I, Part A and 21st Century Community Learning Centers funds for the program and confirms the budget with the Chief Financial Officer within 90 days.
- The Director of Assessment writes the eligibility rule and builds the priority list from the spring interim assessment, free or reduced-price meal status, English learner status and disability status, and sends each building principal its list within 90 days.
- The Human Resources Director posts certified teacher positions for the summer program and the Director of Student Services sets up the attendance file and the two-consecutive-day absence call procedure within 90 days.
- The General Counsel checks the state code for any third-grade reading law that requires summer intervention and reports to the Superintendent within 30 days.
Year one
- Building principals run enrollment from the priority list, and the Assistant Superintendent confirms before the program opens that each site meets the five-week and three-hour requirements and has certified teachers assigned.
- Site coordinators record daily attendance, call the family of any student absent two consecutive days, and track each student against the twenty-day attendance goal.
- The Director of Assessment matches attenders of twenty or more days to eligible students who did not enroll and computes the spring-to-fall assessment change for both groups.
- The Superintendent delivers the first report to the Board by October 15 with enrollment, the percentage attending twenty or more days by building and subgroup, and the growth comparison, plus the added minutes, content and staff for any extended-day program with its fall-to-spring comparison.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 15 each year and the Assistant Superintendent adjusts recruitment, transportation and family contact in buildings where the twenty-day attendance share lags.
- The Director of Federal Programs reviews funding sources each year and the Director of Assessment keeps the matched comparison method the same so year-to-year results can be compared.
| Measure | Share of enrolled students attending 20 or more days, by building and subgroup, and the spring-to-fall interim assessment change in reading and mathematics for students attending 20 or more days compared with eligible students who did not enroll. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first summer's attendance file and spring-to-fall growth comparison, reported to the Board by October 15 of year one; if the district had no summer program, baseline is zero students served. |
| Target | Within 1 to 3 years, the share of enrolled students attending 20 or more days rises each year in every building and subgroup, and students attending 20 or more days show a higher spring-to-fall assessment change in reading and mathematics than eligible non-enrollees in each annual October 15 report. |
| Benchmark | Research gives effect sizes, not an attendance rate: summer math programs show about +0.10 SD and an extra literacy hour showed +0.05 SD in reading, with gains concentrated among regular attenders and low-income children. The entry sets no numeric attendance benchmark beyond the 20-day goal, so the attendance target is directional. |
| Reported | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by October 15, covering enrollment, the percentage attending 20 or more days by building and subgroup, the spring-to-fall growth comparison for attenders versus eligible non-enrollees, and for any extended-day or extended-year program its added minutes, content, staff and fall-to-spring growth comparison. |
Sources. Lynch K, An L, Mancenido Z (2023). The impact of summer programs on student mathematics achievement: A meta-analysis. Review of Educational Research 93(2):275-315. doi · Kim JS, Quinn DM (2013). The effects of summer reading on low-income children's literacy achievement from kindergarten to grade 8: A meta-analysis of classroom and home interventions. Review of Educational Research 83(3):386-431. doi · Augustine CH, McCombs JS, Pane JF, Schwartz HL, Schweig J, McEachin A, Siler-Evans K (2016). Learning from summer: Effects of voluntary summer learning programs on low-income urban youth. RAND Corporation, RR-1557-WF. doi · McCombs JS, Augustine CH, Pane JF, Schweig J (2020). Every summer counts: A longitudinal analysis of outcomes from the National Summer Learning Project. RAND Corporation, RR-3201-WF. doi · Figlio D, Holden KL, Ozek U (2018). Do students benefit from longer school days? Regression discontinuity evidence from Florida's additional hour of literacy instruction. Economics of Education Review 67:171-183. doi · Patall EA, Cooper H, Allen AB (2010). Extending the school day or school year: A systematic review of research (1985-2009). Review of Educational Research 80(3):401-436. doi · Kidron Y, Lindsay J (2014). The effects of increased learning time on student academic and nonacademic outcomes: Findings from a meta-analytic review. REL 2014-015. Washington, DC: Regional Educational Laboratory Appalachia, Institute of Education Sciences. link · Atteberry A, McEachin A (2021). School's out: The role of summers in understanding achievement disparities. American Educational Research Journal 58(2):239-282. doi · von Hippel PT, Hamrock C (2019). Do test score gaps grow before, during, or between the school years? Measurement artifacts and what we can know in spite of them. Sociological Science 6:43-80. doi · Fitzpatrick MD, Grissmer D, Hastedt S (2011). What a difference a day makes: Estimating daily learning gains during kindergarten and first grade using a natural experiment. Economics of Education Review 30(2):269-279. doi
◐ Partial 0/5Access to extracurricular activities, athletics and the arts122 Extracurricular Activities
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Causal studies find that participation pays: Houston's randomized arts-access initiative (42 schools, more than 10,000 students) reduced disciplinary infractions, raised writing achievement and increased empathy and, for elementary students, school engagement and college aspirations; Title IX's forced expansion of girls' sports raised women's college attendance and employment (Stevenson); German sports-club participation improved grades and health. Longitudinal work (Fredricks and Eccles) links breadth of participation to higher GPA, college enrollment and lower risk behavior. Fees are the main access barrier: average required fees in 2018 to 2019 were $161 for sports, $86 for arts and $46 for clubs, lower-income students are twice as likely not to participate, and only 7% of parents have ever requested a waiver. (arts RCT: discipline referrals down, writing up, empathy up; Title IX sports expansion: +1 pp college attendance per 10 pp participation; lower-income nonparticipation about 2x; waiver uptake 7%)
Mixed evidence. Most of the participation literature is correlational and selection runs strongly (motivated, better-resourced students join), so effect sizes from longitudinal studies overstate causal returns. The Houston RCT found no effect on attendance, math, reading or science scores, and only elementary students showed engagement gains. Zdroik and Veliz found Michigan schools with pay-to-play fees had similar participation rates to schools without fees, but the schools able to charge fees were larger, whiter and lower-poverty, which is the selection problem itself rather than evidence that fees are harmless. Fee elimination has a real budget cost and the research does not show which activities yield the most per dollar. Sports carry injury and concussion costs that the achievement studies do not count.
Standard. The district shall guarantee that no student is excluded from any school-sponsored activity for inability to pay, shall grant automatic fee waivers to students eligible for free or reduced-price meals without a separate application, shall provide weekly arts instruction in every elementary grade, and shall report participation by subgroup to the board annually.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy guarantees that no student is excluded from any school-sponsored activity for inability to pay. core
- ✕The policy grants automatic fee waivers to students eligible for free or reduced-price meals.
- ✕The policy requires no separate application for the fee waiver.
- ✕The policy provides weekly arts instruction in every elementary grade.
- ✕The policy requires participation to be reported by subgroup to the board annually.
What the manual says. 122 Extracurricular Activities, revised September 27, 2021:
Recommended. Amend 123 Interscholastic Athletics
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent directs the Director of Student Activities to publish a complete fee schedule for every school-sponsored athletic, arts, club and other activity, including equipment, uniform and travel costs, within 30 days.
- The Director of Student Activities and the Director of Nutrition Services build an automatic waiver flag in the student information system so every student eligible for free or reduced-price meals, in foster care or experiencing homelessness is waived without an application and without the status being visible to other students.
- The Director of Fine Arts surveys every elementary school and reports to the Superintendent within 60 days which schools provide 60 minutes per week of visual art and 60 minutes per week of music from a certified arts teacher, and which do not.
- Each principal confirms to the Superintendent within 90 days that the school offers at least one no-fee option in each of athletics, arts and academic clubs, and names them.
- General counsel reviews the district's fee practices against state law and the state athletic association's eligibility rules, including any Title IX or McKinney-Vento exposure, and reports conflicts to the board within 90 days.
Year one
- The Director of Fine Arts and the Chief Financial Officer bring the board a staffing and schedule plan so every elementary school meets the 60-minute visual art and 60-minute music requirement by the start of the next school year.
- The Director of Student Activities pulls activity rosters from the student information system and produces the first November 1 report showing participation by free-and-reduced-lunch status, race and grade, waivers granted by number and dollar value against eligible students, the fee schedule, and any activity discontinued with its prior enrollment.
- The Director of Communications sends every family a plain-language notice, in the home languages the district serves, that no student can be excluded for inability to pay and that a parent hardship statement is enough to waive any fee.
- The board holds its first annual fee schedule review in public session and adopts the rule that no fee rises without a public hearing.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent delivers the disaggregated participation, waiver and fee report to the board by November 1 every year.
- The board reviews the fee schedule annually and holds a public hearing before any increase.
- The Director of Student Activities audits a sample of activity rosters each semester to confirm that no eligible student was charged or turned away and that waiver status was not disclosed.
| Measure | Share of students in each school participating in at least one school-sponsored activity, disaggregated by free-and-reduced-lunch status, race and grade, drawn from student information system activity rosters; share of waiver-eligible students who actually received a waiver; share of elementary students receiving weekly arts instruction. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first November 1 report, covering the school year in which the policy is adopted, establishes the baseline participation rate by subgroup, the waiver count against eligible students, and the number of elementary schools meeting the 60-minute art and 60-minute music requirement. |
| Target | Within 1 year, 100% of free-and-reduced-lunch, foster and homeless students carry an active waiver flag and 100% of elementary schools provide 60 minutes per week each of visual art and music; within 3 years, the gap in participation rates between free-and-reduced-lunch and non-free-and-reduced-lunch students narrows each year from the baseline, with no subgroup's rate falling. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric participation benchmark. National reference points: lower-income students are about 2x as likely not to participate, only 7% of parents have ever requested a waiver, and average required fees in 2018 to 2019 were $161 for sports, $86 for arts and $46 for clubs. The 2x nonparticipation gap is the disparity the policy aims to close. |
| Reported | Superintendent reports to the board by November 1 each year, in public session, with the data posted on the district website; the board's annual fee schedule review follows the report. |
Sources. Bowen DH, Kisida B (2023). Investigating the Causal Effects of Arts Education. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 42(3):624-647. doi · Fredricks JA, Eccles JS (2006). Is extracurricular participation associated with beneficial outcomes? Concurrent and longitudinal relations. Developmental Psychology 42(4):698-713. doi · Stevenson B (2010). Beyond the Classroom: Using Title IX to Measure the Return to High School Sports. Review of Economics and Statistics 92(2):284-301. doi · Felfe C, Lechner M, Steinmayr A (2016). Sports and Child Development. PLOS ONE 11(5):e0151729. doi · Zdroik J, Veliz P (2016). The Influence of Pay-To-Play Fees on Participation in Interscholastic Sports: A School-Level Analysis of Michigan's Public Schools. Journal of Physical Activity and Health 13(12):1317-1324. doi · C.S. Mott Children's Hospital National Poll on Children's Health (2019). Pay-to-Participate: Impact on School Activities. March 18, 2019. link · Farb AF, Matjasko JL (2012). Recent advances in research on school-based extracurricular activities and adolescent development. Developmental Review 32(1):1-48. doi
◐ Partial 0/5Gifted and advanced learner identification114 Programs for Gifted Students
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Replacing teacher or parent referral with universal screening of every student, with no change in the eligibility cutoff, raised gifted identification in Broward County from 3.3 to 5.5 percent of second graders, with the largest gains for low-income, Black, Hispanic and English learner students who had been systematically under-referred. Black students with the same test scores are referred less often than White students, especially by non-Black teachers, which is why referral-based systems miss them. (Broward universal screening: identification rate +67 percent overall; Hispanic identification roughly +130 percent, Black +80 percent, with eligibility cutoffs unchanged. Local (school) norms would further raise Black and Latinx representation. Gifted services themselves: achievement effects for marginal students near zero in RD studies, though high-achiever classrooms raised Black and Hispanic scores by 0.5 SD in one district.)
Mixed evidence. Universal screening fixes who is found, not what they get: regression-discontinuity and lottery studies find little or no short-run achievement gain for students at the margin of gifted eligibility (Bui, Craig and Imberman 2014), and nationally representative data show Black and low-income students do not see the small gains their peers get from gifted services (Redding and Grissom 2021). Broward suspended universal screening during budget cuts and identification fell back, showing the policy needs a funded test every year. Screening with a single nonverbal test can still under-identify English learners unless local norms or multiple measures are used.
Standard. Every student shall be screened for advanced learning services with a validated instrument at least once in the primary grades and once in middle school, without a prior referral, using multiple measures and local norms, and identification rates by student group shall be published annually.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires every student to be screened for advanced learning services without a prior teacher or parent referral. core
- ✕The policy requires the screening to use a validated instrument.
- ✕The policy requires screening at least once in the primary grades and once in middle school.
- ✕The policy requires identification to use multiple measures and local norms.
- ✕The policy requires identification rates by student group to be published annually.
What the manual says. 114 Programs for Gifted Students, revised October 18, 2018:
Recommended. Amend 114 Programs for Gifted Students
First 90 days
- The Director of Advanced Academics selects a validated ability or achievement screener with nonverbal forms and native-language accommodations and brings the contract to the Board for approval within 60 days.
- The Director of Advanced Academics and the Director of Assessment set the screening calendar for every grade 2 and grade 6 student and for students new to the district within one semester of enrollment, and publish it to schools by day 90.
- The Superintendent revises the eligibility rules to use multiple measures and school-level or district-level local norms alongside national norms, and removes any teacher, parent, or self nomination requirement from the identification procedure.
- The Director of Advanced Academics pulls the current gifted roster by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status and computes the baseline representation index for each group within 90 days.
- The Director of Communications sends families a plain-language notice in home languages explaining that every child in the screening grades will be screened at no cost and how a parent or guardian may decline services in writing.
Year one
- School principals administer the screener to every grade 2 and grade 6 student during the scheduled window, and the Director of Assessment reconciles rosters so that students absent on screening day are tested within 30 days.
- The Director of Advanced Academics convenes eligibility reviews using multiple measures and local norms and places every student who meets the criteria in services within one semester unless a parent or guardian declines in writing.
- The Director of Advanced Academics reports to the Board by November 1 the percentage of each cohort screened, the number and percentage of students identified and served by school and student group, and the representation index for each group.
- The Superintendent presents a corrective plan to the Board for any group whose representation index is below 0.8, naming the schools and the changes to norms, measures, or accommodations that will be made.
Ongoing
- The Director of Advanced Academics repeats universal screening every year for grade 2, grade 6, and newly enrolled students and files the November 1 report to the Board.
- The Director of Data and Accountability reconciles the district's gifted counts with the state gifted data collection and the federal Civil Rights Data Collection submission each reporting cycle.
- The Board reviews the representation index by group at a public meeting each year and renews or revises the corrective plan for any group still below 0.8.
| Measure | Percentage of each grade 2 and grade 6 cohort screened, and the representation index (share of identified students in a group divided by that group's share of enrollment) for students by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Current year's share of the grade 2 and grade 6 cohort screened under the referral-based system, and the current gifted representation index for each student group computed from the district roster in the first 90 days |
| Target | 100 percent of each grade 2 and grade 6 cohort screened in year one, and the representation index for every student group reaches at least 0.8 within 3 years, with the identification rate for low-income, Black, Hispanic, and English learner students rising each year until that threshold is met |
| Benchmark | Broward County raised overall identification from 3.3 to 5.5 percent of second graders (+67 percent) after universal screening with unchanged cutoffs, with Hispanic identification up roughly 130 percent and Black identification up roughly 80 percent; the clause sets 0.8 as the representation index floor that triggers a corrective plan |
| Reported | Annual report by the Director of Advanced Academics to the Board by November 1, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, with the same counts filed to the state gifted data collection and the federal Civil Rights Data Collection |
Sources. Card D, Giuliano L (2016). Universal screening increases the representation of low-income and minority students in gifted education. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 113(48):13678-13683. doi · Grissom JA, Redding C (2016). Discretion and Disproportionality: Explaining the Underrepresentation of High-Achieving Students of Color in Gifted Programs. AERA Open 2(1). doi · McBee MT, Peters SJ, Miller EM (2016). The Impact of the Nomination Stage on Gifted Program Identification: A Comprehensive Psychometric Analysis. Gifted Child Quarterly 60(4):258-278. doi · Peters SJ, Rambo-Hernandez K, Makel MC, Matthews MS, Plucker JA (2019). Effect of Local Norms on Racial and Ethnic Representation in Gifted Education. AERA Open 5(2). doi · Card D, Giuliano L (2016). Can Tracking Raise the Test Scores of High-Ability Minority Students? American Economic Review 106(10):2783-2816. doi · Bui SA, Craig SG, Imberman SA (2014). Is Gifted Education a Bright Idea? Assessing the Impact of Gifted and Talented Programs on Students. American Economic Journal: Economic Policy 6(3):30-62. doi · Redding C, Grissom JA (2021). Do Students in Gifted Programs Perform Better? Linking Gifted Program Participation to Achievement and Nonachievement Outcomes. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 43(3):520-544. doi
◐ Partial 0/6Grade retention and promotion215 Promotion and Retention
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Regression discontinuity studies of test-based third-grade retention paired with intensive reading intervention (Florida, Indiana, Mississippi) show large short-run reading gains, with Indiana and Mississippi gains persisting into middle school. Long-run evidence is split: Florida retainees reached high school with higher GPAs and less remediation and no graduation penalty, while a 2026 Texas study finds retained third graders were 9 points less likely to graduate and earned 19 percent less at 26, and retention in later grades (Chicago grade 8, Louisiana grade 8) raises dropout and juvenile crime. (Short-run reading gains of roughly 0.2 to 0.6 SD that fade or persist by state; Texas: graduation -9 pp, earnings at 26 -19%; older grades: dropout up; disciplinary incidents up short-run (Florida))
Mixed evidence. Zhong (2026, Texas) is the longest follow-up of a modern test-based policy and finds net harm: higher absenteeism, violent behavior and juvenile crime, lower graduation and earnings despite temporary score gains. Ozek (2015) finds Florida retention raised disciplinary incidents and suspensions in the short run, concentrated among poor and male students. Jacob and Lefgren (2009) find grade 8 retention in Chicago raises dropout. Eren, Depew and Barnes (2017) find grade 8 retention in Louisiana raises juvenile crime. The pre-2000 literature summarized by Jimerson (2001) associated retention with worse achievement and adjustment, though Allen et al. (2009) show the negative estimates shrink toward zero in better-designed studies. The positive results all come from retention bundled with summer reading camps, high-quality teachers and intervention plans; nothing in the evidence supports retention alone. Retention costs taxpayers about one additional year of schooling per retained student, less than previously estimated (Winters 2022) but still substantial.
Standard. The policy shall prohibit retention as a stand-alone response, shall require that any retention in grades K-3 be preceded by documented intervention and followed by a written individual reading plan with a different and more intensive program, shall provide good-cause exemptions, and shall prohibit retention in grades 6 through 8 as a consequence of test scores alone.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy prohibits retention as a stand-alone response to a student's academic performance. core
- ✕The policy requires that any retention in grades K-3 be preceded by documented intervention.
- ✕The policy requires that any retention in grades K-3 be followed by a written individual reading plan.
- ✕The policy requires that the individual reading plan for a retained K-3 student use a different and more intensive program.
- ✕The policy provides good-cause exemptions from retention.
- ✕The policy prohibits retention in grades 6 through 8 as a consequence of test scores alone.
What the manual says. 215 Promotion and Retention, revised June 20, 1994:
Recommended. Amend 215 Promotion and Retention
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent directs legal counsel to compare the model clause against the state's retention statute, exemption list and parent notification rules and to report to the Board which of the two is stricter on each point so the district policy at least matches state law.
- The Director of Student Information Systems adds fields to the student information system that record, for every retention decision, the grade, the intervention record, the date of written parent notice, the good-cause exemption review and the individual reading plan.
- The Director of Curriculum and Instruction writes the template for the written individual reading plan, including the different core program or highly rated teacher assignment, the 90 minutes of daily reading instruction and the two-week progress monitoring schedule.
- Each principal, with the reading specialist, lists every current K-3 student at risk of retention and confirms that each has at least one semester of documented evidence-based intervention beyond core instruction under way.
- The Superintendent sends every principal and middle school counselor written notice that students in grades 6 through 8 may not be retained on the basis of test scores.
Year one
- Each K-3 principal sends written notice of retention risk to parents or guardians at least 90 school days before the end of the year and logs the date in the student information system.
- The Director of Special Education and the EL Coordinator complete and sign a good-cause exemption review for every student with a disability, every English learner with fewer than two years of instruction and every student already retained before any retention decision is final.
- The principal and reading specialist complete a written individual reading plan for every retained student before the first day of the repeated year, and the Director of Curriculum and Instruction audits a sample of plans for the required program change, minutes and monitoring schedule.
- The Superintendent delivers the first September report to the Board with retentions by grade, school, race, disability and English learner status and the share with a completed intervention record.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board each September on prior-year retentions and on the reading proficiency and attendance of students retained two years earlier, compared with barely promoted peers.
- The Director of Curriculum and Instruction reviews the two-week progress monitoring data for all retained students each quarter and reassigns program or teacher where a student is not gaining.
- The Director of Student Information Systems reviews retention counts by race, disability and EL status each spring and flags any school whose retention share for a subgroup exceeds its share of enrollment for Board review.
| Measure | Share of retained K-3 students whose retention record shows a completed intervention plan, written parent notice at least 90 school days before year end, a good-cause exemption review where required and an individual reading plan dated before the first day of the repeated year; number of students retained in grades 6 through 8 on the basis of test scores; reading proficiency and attendance of retained students one and three years after retention compared with barely promoted peers; discipline incidents of retained students. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The Superintendent establishes the baseline from the first September report: the number and share of students retained in the prior year by grade, school, race, disability and EL status, the share with a documented intervention plan before the decision, and the current reading proficiency and attendance of students retained two years earlier. |
| Target | By the end of year one, every retained K-3 student has a complete intervention record, parent notice, exemption review and individual reading plan, zero students in grades 6 through 8 are retained on test scores alone, and no student is retained more than once in K-3; within 1 to 3 years, retained students' reading proficiency rises relative to barely promoted peers and their attendance and discipline do not worsen relative to those peers. |
| Benchmark | The research gives no district-level numeric benchmark for compliance or outcomes. Regression discontinuity studies of test-based third-grade retention with intensive reading intervention report short-run reading gains of roughly 0.2 to 0.6 SD, persisting into middle school in Indiana and Mississippi but fading elsewhere; a 2026 Texas study finds retained third graders 9 points less likely to graduate and earning 19 percent less at 26, and Florida reports higher short-run disciplinary incidents, so the Board should expect reading gains only when the intervention is real and should watch attendance and discipline as warning signs. |
| Reported | The Superintendent presents the retention report to the Board each September, with the compliance measures for the prior year's retentions and the reading proficiency and attendance of students retained two years earlier, disaggregated by grade, school, race, disability and EL status, and the Board reviews any school with incomplete records or a subgroup retention share above its enrollment share at that meeting. |
Sources. Schwerdt G, West MR, Winters MA (2017). The effects of test-based retention on student outcomes over time: Regression discontinuity evidence from Florida. Journal of Public Economics 152:154-169. doi · Hwang NY, Koedel C (2023). Helping or hurting: The effects of retention in the third grade on student outcomes. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 47(1):65-88. doi · Slungaard Mumma K, Winters MA (2023). The Effect of Retention Under Mississippi's Test-Based Promotion Policy. Working paper, Wheelock Educational Policy Center, Boston University. link · Zhong J (2026). Early grade retention harms adult earnings. American Economic Journal: Applied Economics 18(4):276-308. doi · Jacob BA, Lefgren L (2009). The effect of grade retention on high school completion. American Economic Journal: Applied Economics 1(3):33-58. doi · Eren O, Depew B, Barnes S (2017). Test-based promotion policies, dropping out, and juvenile crime. Journal of Public Economics 153:9-31. doi · Ozek U (2015). Hold back to move forward? Early grade retention and student misbehavior. Education Finance and Policy 10(3):350-377. doi · Figlio D, Ozek U (2020). An extra year to learn English? Early grade retention and the human capital development of English learners. Journal of Public Economics 186:104184. doi · Allen CS, Chen Q, Willson VL, Hughes JN (2009). Quality of research design moderates effects of grade retention on achievement: A meta-analytic, multilevel analysis. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 31(4):480-499. doi · Jimerson SR (2001). Meta-analysis of grade retention research: Implications for practice in the 21st century. School Psychology Review 30(3):420-437. doi · Winters MA (2022). The cost of retention under a test-based promotion policy for taxpayers and students. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 45(4):688-695. doi
○ SilentMath acceleration, eighth grade algebra, and trackingno governing section
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. The evidence favors objective, transparent placement into accelerated math with instructional support, and cuts against both extremes. Placing moderately prepared students into Algebra I in eighth grade without extra support lowered their pass rates and later math course completion in North Carolina and reduced tenth grade math scores in California's push for algebra for all; placing students by an objective prior-achievement rule in Wake County removed race and income from placement decisions, and a randomized Dee and Huffaker study found that putting below-grade-level ninth graders into Algebra I with teacher training raised grade 11 math achievement by up to 0.2 SD. Delaying algebra for everyone, as San Francisco did, cut AP math participation 15 percent at first and left ethnoracial gaps unchanged. (Universal early algebra without support: negative on test scores and later course passing. Objective placement rule: equity of placement improved, test scores unchanged, grades lower. Detracking plus teacher training (Algebra I for below-grade-level ninth graders): +0.2 SD grade 11 math, attendance up. SFUSD delay of Algebra I: AP math participation initially down 6 percentage points, gaps unchanged. Double-dose algebra for low scorers: college enrollment up.)
Mixed evidence. Results depend on who is accelerated and what support comes with it. Clotfelter, Ladd and Vigdor (2015) found that Charlotte-Mecklenburg students accelerated into eighth grade algebra scored lower on the Algebra I exam and were less likely to pass geometry and Algebra II later. Domina et al. (2015) found that raising eighth grade algebra enrollment lowered tenth grade math achievement in large California districts. Chicago's curriculum-for-all policy raised algebra credits but also failure rates with no test score gains (Allensworth et al. 2009). Wake County's objective rule improved access but accelerated students did not gain on test scores or college readiness and earned lower grades (Dougherty et al. 2017). On the other side, removing eighth grade algebra for all students in San Francisco did not close gaps and initially reduced AP calculus participation (Huffaker, Novicoff and Dee 2025). High-achiever classrooms raised Black and Hispanic scores by 0.5 SD in one district (Card and Giuliano 2016), so grouping by readiness can help the students it is meant to help when seats are allocated by objective criteria.
Standard. Math placement shall use published objective criteria from multiple measures, place every student who meets them in the accelerated course with parent opt-out, provide a supported path (double period, tutoring, or summer bridge) for students near the cutoff, and never bar a readiness-qualified student from Algebra I in eighth grade.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (academics and access)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The chief academic officer drafts the objective placement criteria for grades 6 through 9, using at least two prior-achievement measures including the most recent state assessment and no teacher recommendation alone, and submits them to the Superintendent within 60 days.
- The director of secondary mathematics audits every middle school's current math course offerings and reports to the Superintendent within 30 days which schools do not yet offer Algebra I in grade 8.
- The director of research and assessment pulls the prior year's placement, Algebra I completion, end-of-course passing, and repeat data by school and student group to establish the baseline for the October 15 report.
- The Superintendent sends each middle school principal a written directive within 90 days to identify, from current data, every student who meets the draft criteria and every student within one standard error of the cutoff.
Year one
- The Superintendent publishes the final objective placement criteria by March 1 and the communications office issues written eligibility notices with a written opt-out form to every parent or guardian of a student who meets them.
- Each middle school principal schedules Algebra I in grade 8 and a supported placement, such as a double period, scheduled tutoring, or summer bridge, for every student within one standard error of the cutoff and every student placed in Algebra I below grade level.
- The director of secondary mathematics delivers training to every teacher assigned to a supported Algebra I section before the course begins.
- The Superintendent delivers the first report to the Board by October 15 with placement rates, Algebra I completion and passing rates, repeat rates, and calculus or statistics completion disaggregated by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status.
Ongoing
- Each school reassesses every student for placement at least once each school year, and the director of research and assessment verifies that no grade 6 placement decision limits course access in later grades.
- The Superintendent reports placement appeals and overrides by school each year alongside the October 15 report, and the Board reviews any school where the share of criterion-meeting students who are placed falls below the district average.
| Measure | Share of students meeting the published placement criterion who are placed in the accelerated course, and share of eighth graders completing Algebra I with a passing end-of-course score, each disaggregated by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, plus the Algebra I repeat rate. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The prior year's placement rates, eighth grade Algebra I completion and passing rates, and Algebra I repeat rate by school and student group, as pulled by the director of research and assessment in the first 90 days and reported in the first October 15 report. |
| Target | Within 1 year, every student who meets the published criterion is placed unless a parent opts out in writing, and Algebra I is offered in grade 8 at every middle school; within 3 years, the share of eighth graders completing Algebra I with a passing end-of-course score rises for every student group with no increase in the Algebra I repeat rate for any group, and the gap in criterion-meeting placement rates between student groups closes to zero. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric placement or pass-rate target. It supports the direction: an objective placement rule removed race and income from placement decisions in Wake County, and Algebra I with teacher training for below-grade-level ninth graders raised grade 11 math achievement by up to 0.2 SD, while early algebra without support lowered pass rates and later course completion. |
| Reported | The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 15 each year, with every measure disaggregated by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, and with placement appeals and overrides listed by school. |
Sources. Dougherty SM, Goodman JS, Hill DV, Litke EG, Page LC (2015). Middle School Math Acceleration and Equitable Access to Eighth-Grade Algebra: Evidence From the Wake County Public School System. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 37(1S):80S-101S. doi · Dougherty SM, Goodman JS, Hill DV, Litke EG, Page LC (2017). Objective course placement and college readiness: Evidence from targeted middle school math acceleration. Economics of Education Review 58:141-161. doi · Clotfelter CT, Ladd HF, Vigdor JL (2015). The Aftermath of Accelerating Algebra: Evidence from District Policy Initiatives. Journal of Human Resources 50(1):159-188. doi · Domina T, McEachin A, Penner A, Penner E (2015). Aiming High and Falling Short: California's Eighth-Grade Algebra-for-All Effort. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 37(3):275-295. doi · Allensworth E, Nomi T, Montgomery N, Lee VE (2009). College Preparatory Curriculum for All: Academic Consequences of Requiring Algebra and English I for Ninth Graders in Chicago. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 31(4):367-391. doi · Cortes KE, Goodman JS, Nomi T (2015). Intensive Math Instruction and Educational Attainment: Long-Run Impacts of Double-Dose Algebra. Journal of Human Resources 50(1):108-158. doi · Dee TS, Huffaker E (2026). Accelerating Opportunity: The Effects of Instructionally Supported Detracking. American Educational Research Journal 63(2):307-350. doi · Huffaker E, Novicoff S, Dee TS (2025). Ahead of the Game? Course-Taking Patterns Under a Math Pathways Reform. Educational Researcher 54(2):91-102. doi · Card D, Giuliano L (2016). Can Tracking Raise the Test Scores of High-Ability Minority Students? American Economic Review 106(10):2783-2816. doi
○ SilentAccess to rigorous coursework (automatic enrollment, AP, IB, dual credit)no governing section
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. When districts automatically place every student who meets an objective readiness threshold into the next advanced course, with parent opt-out instead of opt-in, advanced course enrollment rises and gaps by race and income narrow without lowering grades or graduation; Washington's Academic Acceleration policies raised the chance of taking any advanced course by about 5 percent district-wide and more among proficient students who had been passed over. Effects on later college enrollment and persistence from the high school version of the policy are null so far. (WA Academic Acceleration: advanced course enrollment up, gaps narrowed, GPA and graduation unchanged; college enrollment and persistence unchanged. Wake County objective math placement: income and race no longer predicted placement; on-track-for-algebra share up. Earning AP credit raises degree completion (regression discontinuity).)
Mixed evidence. The best-studied high school automatic enrollment policy (Washington, grades 11 and 12) did not change college enrollment, first-year coursetaking, or persistence to a second year (Austin et al. 2026). Wake County's objective placement improved access but accelerated students earned lower course grades in middle school and the acceleration did not raise test scores or college readiness measures (Dougherty et al. 2017). Expanding AP and dual enrollment seats without supports is associated with wider, not narrower, racial participation gaps across districts (Xu, Solanki and Fink 2021). Access is necessary but not sufficient; the courses must be taught well and students supported to pass them.
Standard. The policy shall name an objective readiness threshold, require automatic enrollment of every student who meets it in the next most rigorous course offered, allow only written parent opt-out, and require annual public reporting of participation and success by student group.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (academics and access)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent designates the Assistant Superintendent for Teaching and Learning to lead implementation and names a data lead in the assessment office within 30 days.
- The data lead builds the eligibility list by matching the most recent state assessment results in English language arts, mathematics, and science and prerequisite course grades of B or higher to each student, and sends each principal a school roster within 60 days.
- The Superintendent issues an administrative procedure within 60 days that bars teacher recommendations, applications, and test fees as enrollment conditions and defines the written opt-out form.
- Principals brief counselors and department chairs on the automatic enrollment rule and the June 1 parent notice deadline within 90 days.
- The Superintendent reviews the current master schedule with each principal within 90 days to identify where honors, AP, IB, and dual-credit seat counts must grow to hold every eligible student.
Year one
- Principals send written eligibility notices to every eligible student's parent or guardian by June 1 and log each written opt-out received.
- Counselors enroll every eligible student who has not opted out in the next most rigorous course for the following term and the data lead confirms the enrollment match before the term begins.
- The Superintendent delivers the first report to the Board by October 15 covering eligible, enrolled, and opted-out counts and completion and exam pass rates, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, and publishes it on the district website.
- The Assistant Superintendent for Teaching and Learning arranges AP, IB, and dual-credit teacher training and exam fee support so that added sections are staffed and students can sit the exams.
Ongoing
- The data lead refreshes the eligibility roster each term and principals repeat the June 1 notice and opt-out process every year.
- The Superintendent presents the October 15 report to the Board annually and flags any school where opt-out counts or group gaps stand out.
- The Board reviews the policy every 1 to 3 years against state law changes and the district's own enrollment and pass-rate trends.
| Measure | Share of students meeting the readiness threshold who are enrolled in the corresponding advanced course the next term, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, plus AP, IB, and dual-credit participation and pass rates by group and opt-out counts by school. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The eligible-to-enrolled match rate, opt-out counts, and advanced course participation and pass rates by group as calculated by the data lead from the first eligibility roster before the first June 1 notices go out. |
| Target | By the first October 15 report, every eligible student not covered by a written opt-out is enrolled in the corresponding advanced course, and by the third annual report the enrollment rate among eligible students no longer differs by race, ethnicity, or income, with advanced course completion and exam pass rates by group holding steady or rising rather than falling. |
| Benchmark | Washington's Academic Acceleration policies raised the chance of taking any advanced course by about 5 percent district-wide, with larger gains among proficient students who had been passed over, and GPA and graduation unchanged; Wake County's objective math placement ended the link between income or race and placement. The entry gives no numeric pass-rate or college enrollment benchmark, and college enrollment and persistence effects are null so far. |
| Reported | The Superintendent's annual report to the Board by October 15, published on the district website, with the eligible, enrolled, and opted-out counts and completion and exam pass rates disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, cross-checked against the state report card and College Board and IB data. |
Sources. Austin M, Backes B, Goldhaber D, Li D, Streich F (2025). Leveling Up: An Academic Acceleration Policy to Increase Equity in Advanced High School Course Taking. American Educational Research Journal 62(1):136-179. doi · Austin M, Mbekeani P, Backes B, Chen B, Goldhaber D (2026). High School Academic Acceleration and Early Postsecondary Outcomes: Evidence from Washington State. CALDER Working Paper 341-0826. link · Dougherty SM, Goodman JS, Hill DV, Litke EG, Page LC (2015). Middle School Math Acceleration and Equitable Access to Eighth-Grade Algebra: Evidence From the Wake County Public School System. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 37(1S):80S-101S. doi · Dougherty SM, Goodman JS, Hill DV, Litke EG, Page LC (2017). Objective course placement and college readiness: Evidence from targeted middle school math acceleration. Economics of Education Review 58:141-161. doi · Card D, Giuliano L (2016). Universal screening increases the representation of low-income and minority students in gifted education. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 113(48):13678-13683. doi · Smith J, Hurwitz M, Avery C (2017). Giving College Credit Where It Is Due: Advanced Placement Exam Scores and College Outcomes. Journal of Labor Economics 35(1):67-147. doi · Jackson CK (2014). Do College-Preparatory Programs Improve Long-Term Outcomes? Economic Inquiry 52(1):72-99. doi · Xu D, Solanki S, Fink J (2021). College Acceleration for All? Mapping Racial Gaps in Advanced Placement and Dual Enrollment Participation. American Educational Research Journal 58(5):954-992. doi
◐ Partial 0/4Special education placement and inclusion113 Special Education
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Receiving special education services causally raises achievement and attainment for students with disabilities (Texas: removing services lowered high school completion and college enrollment; NYC and Texas: entering special education raised test scores by roughly 0.1 SD), and large correlational and meta-analytic literatures find that students with disabilities who spend most of the day in general education classrooms do better academically with no detectable cost to their peers (d = 0.35 for students with general learning difficulties; peers d = 0.12 to null). Co-teaching shows a medium positive effect in a 2021 meta-analysis. The causal evidence on placement itself, as opposed to services, is thin and contested, so the best-supported policy is a documented, data-driven least restrictive environment decision for each student rather than a placement quota in either direction. (Special education services: about +0.1 SD achievement; service removal lowered high school completion and college entry. Inclusive placement: d = 0.35 cognitive outcomes for students with learning difficulties (meta-analysis of mostly non-randomized studies); peers d = 0.12 (small positive) to null. Co-teaching: medium positive effect on achievement for students with disabilities.)
Mixed evidence. Gilmour (2018) and Gilmour, Fuchs and Wehby (2018) show that the inclusion-achievement correlation is confounded by selection: students with stronger skills and fewer behavior challenges are placed in general education, and the reading gap for students with disabilities is about 1.2 SD regardless of setting. Hanushek, Kain and Rivkin (2002) found special education raised math for students with learning and emotional disabilities but found no difference between general and special classroom settings. Krämer, Möller and Zimmermann (2021) report no psychosocial benefit of inclusion (d = 0.00) and note selection effects in the underlying studies. Correlational work finds higher teacher turnover and more management time in classes with larger shares of students with emotional and behavioral disabilities. Co-teaching effects depend on implementation; much co-teaching in practice is one-teach, one-assist with little specialized instruction. Inclusion done by moving students without moving services or training is not supported by any of this evidence.
Standard. Every placement decision shall start from the general education classroom with supplementary aids and services, document in the IEP the specific reasons a more restrictive setting is required, and be reviewed against the student's academic and behavioral data at least annually; the district shall report placement and outcome data for students with disabilities by school each year.
Checklist. 0 of 4 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires every placement decision to start from the general education classroom with supplementary aids and services. core
- ✕The policy requires the IEP to document the specific reasons a more restrictive setting is required.
- ✕The policy requires each placement to be reviewed against the student's academic and behavioral data at least annually.
- ✕The policy requires the district to report placement and outcome data for students with disabilities by school each year.
What the manual says. 113 Special Education, revised September 23, 2002:
Recommended. Amend 113 Special Education
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Special Education pulls the district's current IDEA Section 618 educational environment data and lists every student placed in general education less than 40 percent of the day, by school, disability category, race and English learner status, within 30 days.
- The Director of Special Education revises the IEP placement template so that every IEP records the supplementary aids and services tried or considered and the data supporting any setting more restrictive than general education, and issues it to all IEP teams within 60 days.
- Each principal submits a roster of co-taught sections showing the assigned general educator and certified special educator and the scheduled weekly common planning block within 60 days.
- The Superintendent sets the annual 12-hour training calendar in specially designed instruction and co-teaching for every teacher assigned to a co-taught section and schedules the first session within 90 days.
- The Director of Special Education audits a sample of current IEPs at each school for documented consideration of supplementary aids and services before a more restrictive placement and reports the share compliant to the Superintendent within 90 days.
Year one
- The Director of Special Education completes an annual review of every placement under 40 percent general education against the student's progress data and records how many reviews resulted in a less restrictive placement.
- Each principal confirms that every co-taught section is staffed by a certified special educator for the full instructional period and reports any section that is not to the Director of Special Education each semester.
- The Superintendent verifies that every teacher assigned to a co-taught section completed at least 12 hours of specially designed instruction and co-teaching training during the year.
- The Director of Special Education delivers the first report to the Board by November 1 with educational environment percentages, state test achievement and growth, graduation and dropout rates, suspension rates and the count of placement reviews that led to a less restrictive placement, by school, disability category, race and English learner status.
Ongoing
- The Director of Special Education reviews every under-40-percent placement at least annually and reports to the Board by November 1 each year.
- The Director of Special Education audits a sample of new and amended IEPs each year for documented consideration of supplementary aids and services and refers any school below full compliance for corrective action.
- The Superintendent continues the 12-hour annual training requirement and the principals' weekly common planning schedule for every co-taught section.
| Measure | Share of students with IEPs in general education 80 percent or more of the day, 40 to 79 percent, and under 40 percent, disaggregated by school, disability category, race and English learner status; achievement and growth of students with disabilities on state tests versus peers; graduation, dropout and suspension rates of students with disabilities; share of IEPs documenting consideration of supplementary aids and services before a more restrictive placement; share of co-taught sections staffed by a certified special educator for the full period. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The most recent IDEA Section 618 educational environment data, state test results, graduation, dropout and suspension rates for students with disabilities, and the first-90-day IEP documentation audit and co-teaching staffing roster. |
| Target | Within 1 year, every reviewed IEP recommending a setting below 80 percent general education documents the supplementary aids and services considered and the supporting data, every co-taught section is staffed by a certified special educator for the full period, and every assigned teacher completes 12 hours of training; within 3 years, the share of students with IEPs in general education 80 percent or more of the day rises and the achievement gap, dropout rate and suspension rate for students with disabilities fall from baseline, with no decline in peer achievement. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no district-level numeric target for placement shares; the state's State Performance Plan Indicator 5 targets for educational environment are the external reference, and the research effect sizes (about 0.1 SD for services, d = 0.35 for inclusive placement, peers d = 0.12 to null) describe expected direction, not a quota. The entry notes that placement quotas in either direction, such as Texas's former 8.5 percent enrollment benchmark, violate IDEA. |
| Reported | Director of Special Education reports to the Board by November 1 each year, by school, disability category, race and English learner status, with the Board comparing each year's figures to baseline and to the state's Indicator 5 targets. |
Sources. Hehir, T., Grindal, T., Freeman, B., Lamoreau, R., Borquaye, Y., & Burke, S. (2016). A Summary of the Evidence on Inclusive Education. Cambridge, MA: Abt Associates, for Instituto Alana. link · Cole, S. M., Murphy, H. R., Frisby, M. B., Grossi, T. A., & Bolte, H. R. (2020). The Relationship of Special Education Placement and Student Academic Outcomes. The Journal of Special Education 54(4):217-227. doi · Gilmour, A. F. (2018). Has Inclusion Gone Too Far? Weighing Its Effects on Students With Disabilities, Their Peers, and Teachers. Education Next 18(4). link · Gilmour, A. F., Fuchs, D., & Wehby, J. H. (2019). Are Students With Disabilities Accessing the Curriculum? A Meta-Analysis of the Reading Achievement Gap Between Students With and Without Disabilities. Exceptional Children 85(3):329-346. doi · Ballis, B., & Heath, K. (2021). The Long-Run Impacts of Special Education. American Economic Journal: Economic Policy 13(4):72-111. doi · Schwartz, A. E., Hopkins, B. G., & Stiefel, L. (2021). The Effects of Special Education on the Academic Performance of Students with Learning Disabilities. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 40(2):480-520. doi · Hurwitz, S., Perry, B., Cohen, E. D., & Skiba, R. (2020). Special Education and Individualized Academic Growth: A Longitudinal Assessment of Outcomes for Students With Disabilities. American Educational Research Journal 57(2):576-611. doi · Hanushek, E. A., Kain, J. F., & Rivkin, S. G. (2002). Inferring Program Effects for Special Populations: Does Special Education Raise Achievement for Students with Disabilities? Review of Economics and Statistics 84(4):584-599. doi · Krämer, S., Möller, J., & Zimmermann, F. (2021). Inclusive Education of Students With General Learning Difficulties: A Meta-Analysis. Review of Educational Research 91(3):432-478. doi · Szumski, G., Smogorzewska, J., & Karwowski, M. (2017). Academic achievement of students without special educational needs in inclusive classrooms: A meta-analysis. Educational Research Review 21:33-54. doi · King-Sears, M. E., Stefanidis, A., Berkeley, S., & Strogilos, V. (2021). Does co-teaching improve academic achievement for students with disabilities? A meta-analysis. Educational Research Review 34:100405. doi · Solis, M., Vaughn, S., Swanson, E., & McCulley, L. (2012). Collaborative models of instruction: The empirical foundations of inclusion and co-teaching. Psychology in the Schools 49(5):498-510. doi · Theobald, R. J., Goldhaber, D. D., Gratz, T. M., & Holden, K. L. (2019). Career and Technical Education, Inclusion, and Postsecondary Outcomes for Students With Learning Disabilities. Journal of Learning Disabilities 52(2):109-119. doi · Gilmour, A. F., & Henry, G. T. (2018). A Comparison of Teacher Quality in Math for Late Elementary and Middle School Students With and Without Disabilities. The Elementary School Journal 118(3):426-451. doi
◐ Partial 0/4Grading practices (zeros, late work, minimum grades, standards-based grading)213 Assessment of Student Progress
Tier C: consistent correlational evidencestakes 2/5
Research. Grades measure a mix of academic mastery and behavior and vary widely from teacher to teacher. The causal evidence favors two things: higher grading standards raise learning (Algebra I students of tougher graders learn more and keep the gain in later courses), and a standards-based system with formative feedback and reassessment for full credit raised ninth-grade math test scores by 0.33 SD in a cluster RCT. The specific rules districts fight over, no zeros, 50-percent floors and late-work penalties, have almost no outcome research; the one study of a minimum-grade policy is from a single school. (Higher teacher grading standards: positive effect on test scores and later math courses; PARLO standards-based grading RCT: +0.33 SD; minimum-grade and no-zero policies: no causal outcome evidence)
Mixed evidence. Carey and Carifio (2012) found no grade inflation or social promotion under a 50-point floor at one urban high school over seven years, but it is a single site with no comparison group. Reeves (2004) argues against zeros on arithmetic grounds (a zero on a 100-point scale is a six-point penalty on a 4-point scale), which is a measurement argument, not outcome evidence. Welsh, D'Agostino and Kaniskan (2013) find standards-based report-card grades only moderately converge with state test scores and vary more within schools than between them. Hjorth-Trolle, Rosenqvist and Hed (2021) show that changing grading practice (Sweden's move from relative to absolute grades) widened the gap between students of low- and high-educated parents, so grading reforms can move equity in either direction. Gershenson, Holt and Tyner (2024), Betts and Grogger (2003) and Figlio and Lucas (2004) all point the other way from lenient grading: students learn more under higher standards. Equity-grading programs such as Feldman's have practitioner and pilot data but no peer-reviewed causal evaluation.
Standard. The policy shall require every course to publish, before the first grading period, how grades are computed, shall separate academic achievement from behavior and compliance in the reported grade, shall allow at least one reassessment of a summative standard for credit, and shall not mandate or forbid numeric floors without the district's own grade-to-test data.
Checklist. 0 of 4 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires every course to publish how grades are computed before the first grading period.
- ✕The policy separates academic achievement from behavior and compliance in the reported grade. core
- ✕The policy allows at least one reassessment of a summative standard for credit.
- ✕The policy does not mandate or forbid numeric grade floors without the district's own grade-to-test data.
What the manual says. 213 Assessment of Student Progress, revised November 21, 2016:
Recommended. Amend 213 Assessment of Student Progress
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Assessment drafts a one-page course grading plan template covering standards assessed, categories and weights, the reassessment procedure, and the late-work procedure, and the Chief Academic Officer approves it within 30 days of adoption.
- Each principal collects a completed grading plan from every teacher and confirms that teachers of the same course in the same school share a common scale and weights before the first ten school days of the next course start.
- The Director of Technology configures the student information system so attendance, participation, effort and conduct are entered in a separate work-habits mark that cannot alter the academic grade.
- The Director of Assessment requests a gradebook export and the end-of-course and state assessment file from the prior year and joins them by student and course to produce the first grade-to-test correlation by school and course within 90 days.
- The Superintendent designates a grading appeals contact in each school and instructs principals to log every appeal with its outcome.
Year one
- The Director of Assessment delivers the first August report to the Board showing grade-to-test correlation by school and course, failure rate by teacher for courses with three or more sections, and the count of grading appeals.
- The Chief Academic Officer runs professional learning on standards-based grading with formative feedback and reassessment for all secondary math teachers first, because the entry's strongest evidence (a 0.33 SD gain in ninth-grade math) comes from that subject.
- Principals audit a sample of gradebooks each grading period to confirm reassessment was offered and the higher score was counted, and report findings to the Chief Academic Officer.
- The Director of Assessment presents the district's own grade-to-test data to the Board before any proposal to mandate or forbid a numeric floor, and the Board takes no action on floors without it.
Ongoing
- The Director of Assessment repeats the August report to the Board every year and recommends policy revisions where grades and test results diverge.
- Principals verify the published grading plans at the start of every course and confirm common scales and weights across sections of the same course each semester.
- The Superintendent reviews the grading appeals log each year and refers any teacher or course with repeated appeals to the Chief Academic Officer for support.
| Measure | Correlation between final course grades and end-of-course or state test scores by school and course; spread of failure rates across teachers of the same course; share of students with a D or F who passed the end-of-course exam and vice versa; count of grading appeals; share of courses with a published grading plan within ten school days. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first joined gradebook and assessment file produced within 90 days of adoption sets the baseline for correlation, failure-rate spread, grade-test mismatch and appeals; publication compliance has no baseline until the first principal collection. |
| Target | Within 1 year, 100 percent of courses have a published grading plan within the first ten school days and all same-course sections in a school use a common scale and weights; within 1 to 3 years, the grade-to-test correlation rises and the spread of failure rates across teachers of the same course narrows in every school and course relative to the baseline, and the share of students with a D or F who passed the exam, and with an A or B who failed it, falls each year. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric benchmark for grade-to-test correlation, failure-rate spread, or appeal counts, so the target is directional. The 0.33 SD effect from the PARLO standards-based grading RCT is the only outcome figure in the entry and applies to ninth-grade math test scores, not to the indicators above; the entry reports no causal outcome evidence for no-zero or minimum-grade rules, and a 2024 RAND survey finding that about 27 percent of teachers report a no-zeros policy is prevalence, not a benchmark. |
| Reported | The Director of Assessment reports to the Board each August, by school and course, with the first report due in the August following adoption and the baseline comparison carried forward in every later report. |
Sources. Brookhart SM, Guskey TR, Bowers AJ, McMillan JH, Smith JK, Smith LF, Stevens MT, Welsh ME (2016). A century of grading research: Meaning and value in the most common educational measure. Review of Educational Research 86(4):803-848. doi · Kramer SL, Posner B, Browman A, Lawrence N, Cardichon J (2024). The impacts of a standards-based grading system emphasizing formative assessment, feedback, and re-assessment: A mixed methods, cluster randomized control trial in ninth grade mathematics classrooms. Journal of Research on Educational Effectiveness 18(1):56-87. doi · Gershenson S, Holt SB, Tyner A (2024). Making the grade: The effect of teacher grading standards on student outcomes. Contemporary Economic Policy 42(2):305-318. doi · Betts JR, Grogger J (2003). The impact of grading standards on student achievement, educational attainment, and entry-level earnings. Economics of Education Review 22(4):343-352. doi · Figlio DN, Lucas ME (2004). Do high grading standards affect student performance? Journal of Public Economics 88(9-10):1815-1834. doi · Carey T, Carifio J (2012). The minimum grading controversy: Results of a quantitative study of seven years of grading data from an urban high school. Educational Researcher 41(6):201-208. doi · Carifio J, Carey T (2009). A critical examination of current minimum grading policy recommendations. The High School Journal 93(1):23-37. doi · Reeves DB (2004). The case against the zero. Phi Delta Kappan 86(4):324-325. doi · Welsh ME, D'Agostino JV, Kaniskan B (2013). Grading as a reform effort: Do standards-based grades converge with test scores? Educational Measurement: Issues and Practice 32(2):26-36. doi · Guskey TR, Link LJ (2019). Exploring the factors teachers consider in determining students' grades. Assessment in Education: Principles, Policy and Practice 26(3):303-320. doi · Hjorth-Trolle A, Rosenqvist E, Hed H (2021). Grading practices and the social gradient in GPA: Quasi-experimental evidence from Sweden. European Sociological Review 38(3):455-471. doi · Feldman J (2018). Grading for Equity: What It Is, Why It Matters, and How It Can Transform Schools and Classrooms. Corwin, Thousand Oaks CA. link
◐ Partial 0/4Homework130 Homework
Tier C: consistent correlational evidencestakes 2/5
Research. Homework has a small to moderate positive association with achievement in secondary grades and little or none in elementary grades; the relation runs through how often and how well homework is assigned, not how many hours students spend on it. Beyond roughly ten minutes per grade level per night the returns flatten, stress rises, and the benefit accrues more to higher-income students. (Cooper 2006: d about 0.6 in the few experimental comparisons, secondary correlations r about 0.25, elementary near zero; Fan 2017: small positive effect in math and science; high-performing high schools average 3 hours per night with higher stress)
Mixed evidence. The meta-analyses pool mostly correlational studies, and time on homework may reflect struggling as much as learning (Trautwein 2007 finds frequency, not time, predicts achievement). Daw (2012) and Ronning (2011) find that homework widens socioeconomic gaps because higher-income students gain more from each hour, and Ronning finds low-SES students may be harmed. Galloway, Conner and Pope (2013) report that high-performing high school students averaging more than three hours a night show more academic stress, physical complaints and less balance. Pressman et al. (2015) find primary school children receive about three times the ten-minute guideline and that family stress rises with load. Eren and Henderson (2008) find positive effects that are concentrated among high and low achievers, with a share of students responding negatively to more homework. No randomized trial of district homework policy exists.
Standard. The policy shall state maximum nightly homework time by grade band (none required in K-2, no more than ten minutes per grade level through grade 8, no more than two hours total in high school), shall cap homework at a minor share of the academic grade, and shall require that assigned homework be practice of taught material that a student can complete without adult help or paid resources.
Checklist. 0 of 4 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy states maximum nightly homework time by grade band: none required in K-2, no more than ten minutes per grade level through grade 8, no more than two hours total in high school. core
- ✕The policy caps homework at a minor share of the academic grade.
- ✕The policy requires that assigned homework be practice of material already taught in class.
- ✕The policy requires that assigned homework be completable by a student without adult help or paid resources.
What the manual says. 130 Homework, revised June 20, 1994:
Recommended. Amend 130 Homework
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent issues the grade-band time limits (none in K-2 beyond nightly reading, ten minutes per grade level in grades 3 through 8, two hours in grades 9 through 12) and the ten percent grade-weight cap to all principals in writing within 30 days of adoption.
- Principals direct every teacher to set the homework category in the gradebook to no more than ten percent of the course grade within 60 days and confirm compliance to the Assistant Superintendent.
- Department chairs at each secondary school build a shared assignment calendar within 90 days so that total expected homework across all subjects stays within the two-hour limit.
- The Assistant Superintendent for Curriculum and Instruction drafts the March student and family homework survey, covering reported nightly minutes by grade and whether assignments required adult help, internet beyond district devices, or purchased materials, and the Board reviews the draft within 90 days.
Year one
- The Superintendent administers the homework survey to students and parents in March and reports results by grade band and by free-lunch status to the Board by May 31, together with the homework grade weight by course from the gradebook.
- Principals, with department chairs, review homework assignments each semester against the practice-only and no-adult-help standard and remove or redesign assignments that fail it.
- The Superintendent directs principals at any school where reported time exceeds the limit to submit a correction plan within 30 days of the May report.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent repeats the March survey and May 31 Board report each year, including the share of high school students reporting more than two hours per night and the homework completion rate by free-lunch status.
- Principals audit gradebook categories each semester to confirm homework stays at or below ten percent of the course grade and that no student has failed solely for missing homework.
| Measure | Share of students in each grade band whose reported nightly homework time exceeds the policy limit (ten minutes per grade level in grades 3 through 8, two hours in grades 9 through 12), from the annual March student and family survey; share of courses with homework weighted above ten percent of the grade; homework completion rate gap by free-lunch status. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First March survey and gradebook pull after adoption; the entry reports that high-performing high schools average about three hours per night, so a district baseline above the two-hour limit is plausible. |
| Target | By the second May 31 report, no school reports average nightly time above the grade-band limit, no course weights homework above ten percent of the grade, and the share of high school students reporting more than two hours per night falls each year compared with the prior survey; the completion gap by free-lunch status narrows year over year within 1 to 3 years. |
| Benchmark | The National PTA and NEA ten-minutes-per-grade guideline and the policy's two-hour high school cap are the only numeric reference points; the entry gives no benchmark for completion rate or stress, so those targets are directional. |
| Reported | Superintendent reports to the Board by May 31 each year with survey results by grade band and free-lunch status, homework grade weight by course, the list of schools exceeding the limit, and the correction directed at each. |
Sources. Cooper H, Robinson JC, Patall EA (2006). Does homework improve academic achievement? A synthesis of research, 1987-2003. Review of Educational Research 76(1):1-62. doi · Fan H, Xu J, Cai Z, He J, Fan X (2017). Homework and students' achievement in math and science: A 30-year meta-analysis, 1986-2015. Educational Research Review 20:35-54. doi · Bas G, Senturk C, Cigerci FM (2017). Homework and academic achievement: A meta-analytic review of research. Issues in Educational Research 27(1):31-50. link · Trautwein U (2007). The homework-achievement relation reconsidered: Differentiating homework time, homework frequency, and homework effort. Learning and Instruction 17(3):372-388. doi · Fernandez-Alonso R, Suarez-Alvarez J, Muniz J (2015). Adolescents' homework performance in mathematics and science: Personal factors and teaching practices. Journal of Educational Psychology 107(4):1075-1085. doi · Eren O, Henderson DJ (2008). The impact of homework on student achievement. Econometrics Journal 11(2):326-348. doi · Ronning M (2011). Who benefits from homework assignments? Economics of Education Review 30(1):55-64. doi · Daw J (2012). Parental income and the fruits of labor: Variability in homework efficacy in secondary school. Research in Social Stratification and Mobility 30(3):246-264. doi · Galloway M, Conner J, Pope D (2013). Nonacademic effects of homework in privileged, high-performing high schools. Journal of Experimental Education 81(4):490-510. doi · Pressman RM, Sugarman DB, Nemon ML, Desjarlais J, Owens JA, Schettini-Evans A (2015). Homework and family stress: With consideration of parents' self confidence, educational level, and cultural background. American Journal of Family Therapy 43(4):297-313. doi
◐ Partial 0/4English learner programs and reclassification138 Limited English Proficiency Program
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Lottery studies show dual-language immersion raises English reading achievement (Portland: +13 percentile points by grade 5 and +22 by grade 8, with no loss in math or science; Charlotte: +0.04 to 0.05 SD per year in math and reading for English learners and non-learners alike) and raises the share of English learners reclassified by grade 6. Regression-discontinuity studies of reclassification show that the rule matters more than the label: reclassifying students on a single lenient test score harmed later outcomes, while multi-measure criteria that keep supports in place removed the harm, and timely reclassification before the grade 5 and grade 8 transitions improved on-time graduation. (Dual-language immersion: English reading +13 to +22 percentile points by grade 5 to 8 (Portland lottery); +0.04 to 0.05 SD per year (Charlotte lottery). Reclassification effects: +0.25 SD English test scores for marginal grade 2 to 4 reclassifiers in Los Angeles; harmful under single-test lenient criteria, null under multi-measure criteria.)
Mixed evidence. Dual-language immersion effects are concentrated in English reading; the Portland lottery found no effect on math or science and the Charlotte study found no effect on EL status. Reclassification effects vary by district: Cimpian, Thompson and Makowski (2017) found that where reclassification cuts off services abruptly, marginal reclassified students lost ground, and Pope (2016) found no benefit for students reclassified in later grades. Johnson (2019) found no effect of initial EL classification on graduation or college entry, so the classification itself is not the lever; program quality and exit rules are. Dual immersion students in San Francisco scored lower in English language arts in early grades before catching up and passing peers by middle school (Valentino and Reardon 2015), which can look like failure on short-horizon accountability measures. Program seats are limited by the supply of bilingual teachers.
Standard. The district shall offer a dual-language or bilingual program where enrollment supports it, use multiple measures (state proficiency test plus academic performance and teacher input) for reclassification, continue academic monitoring and supports for at least four years after exit, and place English learners in grade-level core content with language support rather than in separate lower-track courses.
Checklist. 0 of 4 elements of the standard are in the manual, 2 partly.
- ✕The policy requires reclassification to use multiple measures: the state proficiency test plus academic performance and teacher input. core
- ◐The policy requires the district to offer a dual-language or bilingual program where enrollment supports it. partly, 138 Limited English Proficiency Program
- ✕The policy requires academic monitoring and supports to continue for at least four years after a student exits English learner status.
- ◐The policy requires English learners to be placed in grade-level core content with language support rather than separate lower-track courses. partly, 138 Limited English Proficiency Program
What the manual says. 138 Limited English Proficiency Program, revised September 26, 2022:
Recommended. Amend 138 Limited English Proficiency Program
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Multilingual Programs pulls student information system course rosters within 30 days to identify every English learner placed in a course below grade level and documents whether English learner status was the basis for placement.
- The Superintendent directs principals to move any English learner placed below grade level solely on the basis of English learner status into grade-level core courses with integrated language support within 60 days.
- The Director of Multilingual Programs produces a count, by school and grade level, of English learners who share a home language and flags every grade level with at least 20 such students for a dual-language or bilingual program decision.
- The Director of Multilingual Programs drafts written reclassification criteria that require the state English language proficiency assessment plus at least two additional measures, including classroom academic performance and teacher recommendation, and submits them to the Superintendent within 90 days.
- The Director of Multilingual Programs builds a roster of every student reclassified in the past four academic years so that monitoring can begin on the current cohort.
Year one
- The Superintendent presents to the Board, for each grade level with at least 20 English learners sharing a home language, either a dual-language or bilingual program plan with a start date or a written reason the program cannot be offered.
- The Director of Multilingual Programs runs the first full reclassification cycle under the multi-measure criteria and confirms that no student exits on a single test score.
- The Director of Multilingual Programs establishes a quarterly review of every reclassified student's grades and assessment results and re-enters supports for any student who falls below grade level.
- By October 15 the Director of Multilingual Programs delivers the first annual report to the Board, disaggregated by school, program model, home language and years in program, and posts program models, exit criteria and the report on the district website.
Ongoing
- Each year by October 15 the Director of Multilingual Programs reports to the Board on reclassification rates, long-term English learners, achievement and growth of current and former English learners, and English learner enrollment in advanced and core courses.
- The Director of Multilingual Programs monitors every reclassified student for four academic years and documents each re-entry of supports.
- The Superintendent reviews dual-language seats offered versus applicants each spring and repeats the 20-student threshold check for every grade level.
| Measure | Annual reclassification rate by years in program and program model; number and share of long-term English learners (6 or more years); ELA and math achievement of former English learners tracked for four years after reclassification; share of English learners enrolled in grade-level core courses and advanced courses; dual-language seats offered versus applicants. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first October 15 report establishes the baseline for each measure using the prior school year's data, including the current count of English learners placed below grade level and the current number of grade levels where 20 or more English learners share a home language but no dual-language or bilingual program exists. |
| Target | Within 180 days, zero English learners placed in a course below grade level solely on the basis of English learner status and zero reclassifications resting on a single test score; within 1 to 3 years, the share of long-term English learners (6 or more years) declines each year from baseline, the reclassification rate rises from baseline, former English learners show no decline in ELA and math achievement across the four monitored years, and every grade level with 20 or more English learners sharing a home language has a dual-language or bilingual program or a Board-reviewed reason it does not. |
| Benchmark | Lottery studies found dual-language immersion raised English reading by 13 percentile points by grade 5 and 22 by grade 8 in Portland and by 0.04 to 0.05 SD per year in Charlotte, and raised the share of English learners reclassified by grade 6; multi-measure reclassification with continued supports produced null rather than harmful effects. These are research effects, not district targets, so the district target is directional. ESSA Title III sets the four-year monitoring period and Texas Education Code 29.053 sets the 20-student threshold. |
| Reported | The Director of Multilingual Programs reports to the Board by October 15 each year, disaggregated by school, program model, home language and years in program, and posts the report with program models and exit criteria on the district website; the Board compares each measure against the baseline year and the prior year. |
Sources. Steele, J. L., Slater, R. O., Zamarro, G., Miller, T., Li, J., Burkhauser, S., & Bacon, M. (2017). Effects of Dual-Language Immersion Programs on Student Achievement: Evidence From Lottery Data. American Educational Research Journal 54(1_suppl):282S-306S. doi · Bibler, A. (2021). Dual Language Education and Student Achievement. Education Finance and Policy 16(4):634-658. doi · Umansky, I. M., & Reardon, S. F. (2014). Reclassification Patterns Among Latino English Learner Students in Bilingual, Dual Immersion, and English Immersion Classrooms. American Educational Research Journal 51(5):879-912. doi · Valentino, R. A., & Reardon, S. F. (2015). Effectiveness of Four Instructional Programs Designed to Serve English Learners: Variation by Ethnicity and Initial English Proficiency. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 37(4):612-637. doi · Robinson-Cimpian, J. P., & Thompson, K. D. (2016). The Effects of Changing Test-Based Policies for Reclassifying English Learners. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 35(2):279-305. doi · Cimpian, J. R., Thompson, K. D., & Makowski, M. B. (2017). Evaluating English Learner Reclassification Policy Effects Across Districts. American Educational Research Journal 54(1_suppl):255S-278S. doi · Pope, N. G. (2016). The marginal effect of K-12 English language development programs: Evidence from Los Angeles schools. Economics of Education Review 53:311-328. doi · Johnson, A. (2019). The Effects of English Learner Classification on High School Graduation and College Attendance. AERA Open 5(2). doi · Umansky, I. M. (2016). Leveled and Exclusionary Tracking: English Learners' Access to Academic Content in Middle School. American Educational Research Journal 53(6):1792-1833. doi · Umansky, I. M., & Dumont, H. (2021). English Learner Labeling: How English Learner Classification in Kindergarten Shapes Teacher Perceptions of Student Skills and the Moderating Role of Bilingual Instructional Settings. American Educational Research Journal 58(5):993-1031. doi · National Academies of Sciences, Engineering, and Medicine (2017). Promoting the Educational Success of Children and Youth Learning English: Promising Futures. Washington, DC: The National Academies Press. doi
○ SilentDistrict pre-kindergartenno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 4/5
Research. Every rigorous evaluation finds public pre-K raises school readiness at kindergarten entry (Boston 0.4 to 0.6 SD in language and math, Tulsa large gains, Tennessee gains at end of pre-K), but what happens next depends on the program and the schools that follow: Boston's lottery cohorts showed no later test-score gains yet higher high school graduation, SAT taking and college enrollment and less juvenile incarceration, Tulsa's cohorts kept middle school math and course-taking advantages, and Tennessee's statewide program, a randomized trial, left participants worse off than controls on achievement, discipline and special education by sixth grade. A meta-analysis of 22 causal studies finds average long-run reductions in special education placement (8 points) and grade retention (8 points) and higher graduation (11 points). (Kindergarten entry: +0.4 to +0.6 SD (Boston); long run: special education -8.1 points, grade retention -8.3 points, high school graduation +11.4 points (meta-analysis); Boston lottery: college enrollment up, juvenile incarceration down, test scores null; Tennessee RCT: sixth-grade achievement, discipline and special education all worse than controls)
Mixed evidence. The only large randomized trial of a scaled state program (Tennessee Voluntary Pre-K, n 2,990) found that children offered pre-K had lower state test scores in grades 3 through 6, more disciplinary infractions, worse attendance and more special education designations than wait-listed controls. Test-score fadeout by grade 3 is the norm even in positive studies (Bailey et al. 2017), and the Boston long-run gains came from a program with coached teachers, a shared curriculum and small classes that most districts do not replicate. The Tulsa evidence relies on propensity-score weighting, not randomization. Pre-K is among the most expensive grades to add, and poor-quality programs can be worse than the child-care arrangements they replace.
Standard. District pre-K uses an adopted evidence-based curriculum, certified lead teachers with ongoing coaching, class sizes of 20 or fewer with two adults, and a full instructional day, and the district tracks each pre-K cohort through third grade and reports readiness and later outcomes by subgroup.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain (6 sections touch related words but do not govern it).
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The Director of Early Childhood Education inventories every district pre-K classroom against the clause within 60 days, recording curriculum in use, lead teacher certification, class size, adult-to-child ratio, instructional day length and coaching frequency, and reports the gaps to the Superintendent.
- The Superintendent brings the Board a list of candidate curricula with published evidence of effectiveness within 90 days, and the Board adopts one by vote.
- The Director of Enrollment builds an enrollment priority process that ranks applicants by free or reduced-price meal eligibility, English learner status and identified disability, and publishes it for the next application window.
- The Director of Assessment designates the fall kindergarten entry assessment and the data fields needed to flag each kindergartner as a former district pre-K attendee or non-attendee by subgroup.
Year one
- The Director of Human Resources fills every lead teacher position with an early childhood certified teacher or places uncertified incumbents on a dated certification plan before the first day of the next school year.
- The Director of Early Childhood Education assigns an instructional coach to each pre-K teacher and schedules at least monthly coaching visits, logging each visit by classroom.
- The Superintendent reschedules any classroom not yet on a full instructional day equal to kindergarten and caps enrollment at 20 children with two adults before the next school year opens.
- The Superintendent delivers the first November 1 report on enrollment, wait lists, class sizes, certification and kindergarten entry results by attendance area and subgroup.
Ongoing
- The Director of Assessment maintains a longitudinal cohort file linking each pre-K cohort to its third-grade reading proficiency, grade retention and special education referral records.
- The Superintendent reports to the Board each November 1 on enrollment and kindergarten readiness and each August 1 on the third-grade outcomes of the cohort that attended pre-K four years earlier compared with the district average.
| Measure | Kindergarten entry assessment results for former district pre-K attendees versus non-attendees by subgroup, and third-grade reading proficiency, grade retention and special education referral rates for each tracked pre-K cohort compared with the district average. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first November 1 report establishes the kindergarten entry gap between attendees and non-attendees by subgroup, and the first August 1 report establishes the third-grade reading, retention and special education referral rates for the earliest cohort that can be linked. |
| Target | Within 1 year, every pre-K classroom meets all five program conditions in the clause (adopted curriculum, certified lead teacher, 20 or fewer children with two adults, full day, monthly coaching). Within 1 to 3 years, former pre-K attendees score higher on the fall kindergarten entry assessment than non-attendees in every reported subgroup, and the tracked cohort shows grade retention and special education referral rates below the district average with third-grade reading proficiency at or above it, with no cohort trending worse than the district average on any of the three measures. |
| Benchmark | Rigorous evaluations show kindergarten entry gains of 0.4 to 0.6 SD (Boston), and a meta-analysis of 22 causal studies finds special education placement down 8.1 points, grade retention down 8.3 points and high school graduation up 11.4 points; the Tennessee randomized trial, where participants were worse off by sixth grade on achievement, discipline and special education, is the warning case the cohort tracking is designed to catch early. |
| Reported | Superintendent reports to the Board each November 1 (enrollment, wait lists, class size, certification, kindergarten entry results by subgroup) and each August 1 (third-grade reading, retention and special education referral for the cohort that attended four years earlier versus the district average), with results published on the district website. |
Sources. Durkin K, Lipsey MW, Farran DC, Wiesen SE (2022). Effects of a statewide pre-kindergarten program on children's achievement and behavior through sixth grade. Developmental Psychology 58(3):470-484. doi · Lipsey MW, Farran DC, Durkin K (2018). Effects of the Tennessee Prekindergarten Program on children's achievement and behavior through third grade. Early Childhood Research Quarterly 45:155-176. doi · Gray-Lobe G, Pathak PA, Walters CR (2023). The long-term effects of universal preschool in Boston. Quarterly Journal of Economics 138(1):363-411. doi · Weiland C, Yoshikawa H (2013). Impacts of a prekindergarten program on children's mathematics, language, literacy, executive function, and emotional skills. Child Development 84(6):2112-2130. doi · Gormley WT Jr, Phillips D, Gayer T (2008). Preschool programs can boost school readiness. Science 320(5884):1723-1724. doi · Gormley WT Jr, Phillips D, Anderson S (2018). The effects of Tulsa's pre-K program on middle school student performance. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 37(1):63-87. doi · Amadon S, Gormley WT, Claessens A, Magnuson K, Hummel-Price D, Romm K (2022). Does early childhood education help to improve high school outcomes? Results from Tulsa. Child Development 93(4):e379-e395. doi · McCoy DC, Yoshikawa H, Ziol-Guest KM, Duncan GJ, Schindler HS, Magnuson K, Yang R, Koepp A, Shonkoff JP (2017). Impacts of early childhood education on medium- and long-term educational outcomes. Educational Researcher 46(8):474-487. doi · Bailey D, Duncan GJ, Odgers CL, Yu W (2017). Persistence and fadeout in the impacts of child and adolescent interventions. Journal of Research on Educational Effectiveness 10(1):7-39. doi · Phillips DA, Lipsey MW, Dodge KA, et al. (2017). Puzzling it out: The current state of scientific knowledge on pre-kindergarten effects. A consensus statement. Washington, DC: Brookings Institution and Duke University. link · Puma M, Bell S, Cook R, Heid C, et al. (2010). Head Start Impact Study: Final report. Washington, DC: US Department of Health and Human Services, Administration for Children and Families. link
○ SilentFull-day kindergartenno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Full-day kindergarten raises achievement at the end of the kindergarten year by about 0.25 to 0.35 SD compared with half-day programs (meta-analysis of 40 studies; Community Guide systematic review; an Indiana lottery experiment found 0.31 SD in literacy, larger for Hispanic children and low-entering-skill children), but in most US studies the test-score advantage fades by third grade. (End of kindergarten: +0.25 SD (meta-analysis) to +0.35 SD (Community Guide; verbal +0.46, math +0.24); lottery experiment: literacy +0.31 SD, Hispanic children +0.70 SD; advantage largely gone by grade 3 in ECLS-K studies)
Mixed evidence. Fadeout is the consistent finding: Cannon, Jacknowitz and Painter (2006) and Cooper et al. (2010) both find the achievement difference disappears by third grade, and the 2006 study found no extra benefit for children below the poverty line. Cooper's meta-analysis also found suggestive evidence of less positive attitudes toward school and more behavior problems in full-day programs. Ontario's play-based full-day program showed lasting gains through grade 2 and grade 3 reading, so persistence may depend on program design and the quality of the grades that follow. Full-day kindergarten roughly doubles the staffing and space cost of the grade.
Standard. The district offers tuition-free full-day kindergarten, with the same daily instructional minutes as grade 1, to every eligible child in every attendance area, and reports enrollment and end-of-year readiness results by subgroup.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain (1 sections touch related words but do not govern it).
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent checks the state code for required kindergarten daily minutes, attendance age, and full-day funding, and reports the findings to the Board within 30 days.
- The Assistant Superintendent for Elementary Education inventories every elementary attendance area for current kindergarten format, daily instructional minutes compared with grade 1, tuition charged, classroom space, and staffing.
- The Chief Financial Officer prepares a cost model for tuition-free full-day kindergarten in every attendance area, showing state per-pupil funding, added staff, and any space needs, for Board review within 90 days.
- The Director of Curriculum drafts a kindergarten daily schedule that matches grade 1 instructional minutes and includes daily recess, a play-based component, and physical education, art and music at no less than the grade 1 allocation.
- The Superintendent designates the fall kindergarten entry assessment and the end-of-year literacy and numeracy screeners that will be reported by subgroup.
Year one
- The Board adopts the budget and staffing plan so that every attendance area offers tuition-free full-day kindergarten at the start of the next school year, with half-day only on a family's written request.
- The Director of Student Services builds the registration form and the enrollment file fields that record full-day or half-day status by building and subgroup and any waiting list.
- The Superintendent delivers the October 15 report on full-day enrollment by building and subgroup, any waiting list, and fall entry assessment results, and the July 15 report on end-of-year literacy and numeracy screening by subgroup and the kindergarten chronic absence rate.
- The Assistant Superintendent for Elementary Education audits each building's kindergarten schedule once during the year to confirm minutes, recess, play-based time, and specials match the adopted schedule.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent presents the October 15 and July 15 reports every year and flags any building where full-day enrollment, a waiting list, or subgroup screening results have moved in the wrong direction.
- The Chief Financial Officer confirms each spring that the next year's budget keeps full-day kindergarten tuition-free in every attendance area.
- The Director of Curriculum reviews grade 3 reading results for recent kindergarten cohorts each year, since the entry gives notice that the early advantage can fade by grade 3 without follow-through.
| Measure | Share of kindergarten students enrolled in a tuition-free full-day program, by building and subgroup, from the enrollment file; kindergarten daily instructional minutes compared with grade 1; end-of-year literacy and numeracy screening results by subgroup; kindergarten chronic absence rate. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The current year's enrollment file: percentage of kindergarten students in full-day, tuition-free seats by building and subgroup, any tuition charged, daily kindergarten minutes relative to grade 1, and the most recent end-of-year screening results by subgroup and chronic absence rate. |
| Target | Within 1 year of adoption, every elementary attendance area offers tuition-free full-day kindergarten with daily instructional minutes equal to grade 1, every age-eligible child whose family requests it is enrolled with no waiting list, and the only half-day enrollments are those with a written family request; within 1 to 3 years, end-of-year literacy and numeracy screening results rise for every reported subgroup, with the largest gains expected among Hispanic children and children with low entering skills, and kindergarten chronic absence does not rise. |
| Benchmark | The research gives an effect size, not an enrollment or screening threshold: full-day kindergarten raised end-of-kindergarten achievement by about 0.25 SD (meta-analysis of 40 studies) to 0.35 SD (Community Guide review; verbal +0.46, math +0.24), and an Indiana lottery experiment found +0.31 SD in literacy, with +0.70 SD for Hispanic children. The entry gives no numeric benchmark for enrollment share or screener pass rates, so the enrollment target is universal access and the achievement target is directional. The entry also notes the advantage largely fades by grade 3 in ECLS-K studies, so the Board should treat end-of-kindergarten gains as the primary check and grade 3 results as a watch item. |
| Reported | Superintendent to the Board by October 15 each year (full-day enrollment by building and subgroup, waiting list, fall entry assessment) and by July 15 each year (end-of-year literacy and numeracy screening by subgroup, kindergarten chronic absence rate), each with the prior year's figures alongside for comparison. |
Sources. Cooper H, Allen AB, Patall EA, Dent AL (2010). Effects of full-day kindergarten on academic achievement and social development. Review of Educational Research 80(1):34-70. doi · Hahn RA, Rammohan V, Truman BI, et al., Community Preventive Services Task Force (2014). Effects of full-day kindergarten on the long-term health prospects of children in low-income and racial/ethnic-minority populations: A Community Guide systematic review. American Journal of Preventive Medicine 46(3):312-323. doi · Gibbs CR (2014). Experimental evidence on early intervention: The impact of full-day kindergarten. University of Virginia Batten School working paper (ERIC ED564096). link · Cannon JS, Jacknowitz A, Painter G (2006). Is full better than half? Examining the longitudinal effects of full-day kindergarten attendance. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 25(2):299-321. doi · DeCicca P (2007). Does full-day kindergarten matter? Evidence from the first two years of schooling. Economics of Education Review 26(1):67-82. doi · Pelletier JP, Corter JE (2019). A longitudinal comparison of learning outcomes in full-day and half-day kindergarten. Journal of Educational Research 112(2):192-210. doi · Atteberry A, Bassok D, Wong VC (2019). The effects of full-day prekindergarten: Experimental evidence of impacts on children's school readiness. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 41(4):537-562. doi
Time and schedule
◐ Partial 0/4Secondary school start time804 School Day
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Adolescent circadian timing shifts later, and middle and high schools that start at or after 8:30 a.m. get measurably more sleep from students; a Seattle district-wide delay of nearly an hour produced 34 more minutes of sleep per night, a 4.5 percent rise in median grades and better attendance, and a Florida time-zone natural experiment found each hour of later start relative to sunrise raised adolescent math scores by 0.08 SD. Meta-analyses and a Cochrane review agree on the sleep and attendance effects; achievement effects are positive but smaller and less consistent. (+34 min sleep per school night (Seattle); grades +4.5 percent; math +0.08 SD and reading +0.06 SD per hour later start (Florida); fewer absences and tardies; achievement gains small or mixed in some district studies)
Mixed evidence. Achievement gains are modest and uneven: Bastian and Fuller (2018) found mixed positive and negative test-score associations across North Carolina high schools even where suspensions fell and grades rose, and the Cochrane review (2017) rated the underlying studies as low quality. Costs are real: later secondary starts usually force bus-tier changes, and RAND (2017) modeled roughly 150 dollars per student per year in added transportation cost plus a one-time facilities cost, with net benefits that turn positive only after several years in high-cost scenarios. Moving secondary schools later can push elementary schools earlier, and after-school activities and student work hours are compressed. Florida enacted a 2023 mandate and then, in 2025, replaced it with a report-and-consider requirement after districts objected to bus and staffing costs.
Standard. Instruction in every school serving any of grades 6 through 12 begins no earlier than 8:30 a.m., and the policy names who reports compliance and by when.
Checklist. 0 of 4 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires instruction in every school serving any of grades 6 through 12 to begin no earlier than 8:30 a.m. core
- ✕The policy applies the start time floor to every school serving any grade from 6 through 12, including middle schools.
- ✕The policy names who reports compliance with the start time requirement.
- ✕The policy states by when the compliance report is due.
What the manual says. 804 School Day, revised June 20, 1994:
Recommended. Amend 804 School Day
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent directs the Director of Transportation and each secondary principal to pull the master schedule and list the first-bell instructional start time, any zero period, and any mandatory pre-bell activity for every building serving grades 6 through 12.
- The Chief Academic Officer calculates the number and percentage of secondary students whose instructional day currently begins before 8:30 a.m. and reports the figure to the Board within 90 days.
- The Director of Transportation drafts the bus routing options and cost estimate needed to move every secondary building to an 8:30 a.m. or later start.
- The Superintendent confirms that the district climate survey includes a school-night sleep hours item for secondary students and asks the Director of Assessment to add one if it is missing.
Year one
- The Superintendent presents the schedule report to the Board by March 1 listing each building's first-bell time, the share of secondary students starting before 8:30 a.m., and the transportation plan and cost to comply.
- The Superintendent names any building that cannot comply in the March 1 report and attaches a dated plan for that building to comply within one school year.
- Secondary principals publish master schedules for the coming school year with no instruction, zero period, assembly or mandatory activity before 8:30 a.m. in every building able to comply.
- The Director of Assessment establishes baseline chronic absence and first-period tardy rates by building and baseline median school-night sleep hours from the climate survey.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent presents the schedule report to the Board by March 1 of each year and includes the sleep, chronic absence and first-period tardy figures in the annual student wellness report.
- The Board reviews the report at a public meeting each spring and votes to accept or return any building compliance plan.
| Measure | Percentage of secondary students (grades 6 through 12) whose instructional day begins at or after 8:30 a.m., plus median school-night sleep hours reported by secondary students on the district climate survey and chronic absence and first-period tardy rates by building |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The number and percentage of secondary students starting before 8:30 a.m. in the current master schedule, and the current median school-night sleep hours, chronic absence rate and first-period tardy rate by building, all recorded in the first March 1 schedule report |
| Target | 100 percent of secondary students begin instruction at or after 8:30 a.m. by the start of the school year following the first March 1 report, with any named noncompliant building in compliance within one school year; median school-night sleep hours rise and chronic absence and first-period tardy rates fall in every converted building by the second annual wellness report |
| Benchmark | Research gives an 8:30 a.m. floor as the standard and reports about 34 more minutes of sleep per school night, a 4.5 percent rise in median grades and better attendance after a Seattle district-wide delay of nearly an hour; the entry gives no numeric benchmark for the size of the sleep, absence or tardy change this district should expect, so the sleep and attendance target is directional |
| Reported | The Superintendent reports to the Board by March 1 each year in the schedule report and annually in the student wellness report, with figures broken out by building |
Sources. Adolescent Sleep Working Group, Committee on Adolescence, Council on School Health, American Academy of Pediatrics (2014). School start times for adolescents. Pediatrics 134(3):642-649. doi · Dunster GP, de la Iglesia L, Ben-Hamo M, Nave C, Fleischer JG, Panda S, de la Iglesia HO (2018). Sleepmore in Seattle: Later school start times are associated with more sleep and better performance in high school students. Science Advances 4(12):eaau6200. doi · Heissel JA, Norris S (2018). Rise and shine: The effect of school start times on academic performance from childhood through puberty. Journal of Human Resources 53(4):957-992. doi · Carrell SE, Maghakian T, West JC (2011). A's from Zzzz's? The causal effect of school start time on the academic achievement of adolescents. American Economic Journal: Economic Policy 3(3):62-81. doi · Bowers JM, Moyer A (2017). Effects of school start time on students' sleep duration, daytime sleepiness, and attendance: a meta-analysis. Sleep Health 3(6):423-431. doi · Minges KE, Redeker NS (2016). Delayed school start times and adolescent sleep: A systematic review of the experimental evidence. Sleep Medicine Reviews 28:86-95. doi · Marx R, Tanner-Smith EE, Davison CM, et al. (2017). Later school start times for supporting the education, health, and well-being of high school students. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 7:CD009467. doi · Wheaton AG, Chapman DP, Croft JB (2016). School start times, sleep, behavioral, health, and academic outcomes: A review of the literature. Journal of School Health 86(5):363-381. doi · Lenard M, Morrill M, Westall J (2020). High school start times and student achievement: Looking beyond test scores. Economics of Education Review 76:101975. doi · Groen JA, Pabilonia SW (2019). Snooze or lose: High school start times and academic achievement. Economics of Education Review 72:204-218. doi · Bastian KC, Fuller SC (2018). Answering the bell: High school start times and student academic outcomes. AERA Open 4(4):1-14. doi · Hafner M, Stepanek M, Troxel WM (2017). Later school start times in the U.S.: An economic analysis. RAND Corporation, RR-2109. doi
○ SilentRemote instruction days (virtual snow days and planned remote learning)no governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 2/5
Research. Remote instruction delivers less learning than in-person instruction and widens gaps. In 2020 to 2021, districts that stayed in person lost 13 percentage points less in math pass rates than remote districts (Jack et al.), remote instruction was the primary driver of widened gaps by race and poverty (Goldhaber et al.), and the national decline reached 0.20 to 0.27 SD in math (Kuhfeld et al.). Randomized trials of online delivery at West Point (-0.215 SD in grades) and in Chicago algebra credit recovery (lower pass rates) confirm the direction outside the pandemic. A few weather closures do not measurably hurt achievement, so a remote day mainly needs to beat a day off, which it fails to do when attendance collapses. (remote vs in-person: about -0.2 SD (RCTs and pandemic natural experiments), largest for low-income and Black students; a handful of closure days: about 0)
Mixed evidence. No study isolates occasional virtual snow days specifically; the pandemic evidence covers months of remote schooling under crisis conditions and likely overstates the cost of a single day. Goodman (2014) found that a few snow days did not reduce Massachusetts test scores because schools made the time up, while Marcotte and Hemelt (2008) found that about five unscheduled closures before Maryland's spring tests lowered third-grade proficiency rates by nearly 3 percent, so the cost of lost days is real when they are not recovered before assessment. Blended programs that keep in-person contact perform about as well as in-person classes (Escueta et al.). Remote days do protect calendar end dates and staff pay, and for a multi-day emergency closure a well-run remote day beats nothing.
Standard. The district shall use remote instruction days only for weather or emergency closures, shall cap them at five per year counted toward instructional time, shall require live synchronous instruction and attendance taking on every remote day, shall confirm device and internet access for every student in advance, and shall make up any closure beyond the cap with in-person days.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain (1 sections touch related words but do not govern it).
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent confirms the current state rule on whether remote days count toward minimum instructional time and whether the state caps them, and reports the rule to the Board before the policy is adopted.
- The Director of Technology surveys every enrolled household for a district device and a working home internet connection, issues hotspots where needed, and certifies the results to the Board by October 1 with the count of students who could not be confirmed.
- The Superintendent issues a written remote-day procedure to principals requiring at least two hours of live synchronous instruction for secondary students and one hour for elementary students, attendance entry in the student information system, and same-day family contact for any student absent from the synchronous session.
- The Director of Special Education sets the process for delivering IEP services on remote days and for scheduling compensatory services within 10 school days when services cannot be delivered.
- The Superintendent removes any remote days scheduled for staff development, conferences or other planned purposes from the current calendar.
Year one
- Within 30 days of each remote instruction day the Superintendent reports to the Board the attendance rate for that day by school and by free-and-reduced-lunch status, compared with the prior month's in-person rate, along with minutes of live instruction delivered.
- The Superintendent tracks the count of remote days used and their reasons and, once closures exceed five, adds in-person make-up days to the calendar and brings the revised calendar to the Board.
- The Superintendent presents an annual summary by June 30 covering remote days used, reasons, attendance gaps, device confirmation, and IEP service delivery.
Ongoing
- The Director of Technology repeats the device and connectivity certification to the Board by October 1 every year.
- The Board reviews the annual June 30 summary and the current state rule on remote-day caps each year and revises the cap if the law changes.
| Measure | Student attendance on remote instruction days (share logging into synchronous instruction) by school and by free-and-reduced-lunch status, compared with the prior month's in-person attendance rate; number of remote days used per year and reason for each; share of households confirmed to have a device and connectivity; minutes of live instruction per remote day. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The attendance rate on the first remote instruction day after adoption, by school and by free-and-reduced-lunch status, alongside the prior month's in-person rate and the October 1 device and connectivity certification count. |
| Target | Within 1 year: no remote days used for planned purposes, no more than five remote days counted toward instructional time, every remote day delivering at least two hours of live instruction for secondary and one hour for elementary students, and the gap between remote-day attendance and the prior month's in-person rate narrowing each year, with the free-and-reduced-lunch gap no wider than the overall gap. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric attendance benchmark for remote days. It supports a cap of five days (about 23 states cap remote days, typically at 3 to 5), the two-hour and one-hour live instruction minimums, and the 10 school day compensatory services window. The research shows remote instruction at about -0.2 SD versus in-person, so the goal is to keep remote days rare and to beat a day off, not to match in-person learning. |
| Reported | Superintendent report to the Board within 30 days of each remote instruction day, Director of Technology certification by October 1, and an annual summary by June 30. |
Sources. Kuhfeld M, Soland J, Lewis K (2022). Test Score Patterns Across Three COVID-19-Impacted School Years. Educational Researcher 51(7):500-506. doi · Goldhaber D, Kane TJ, McEachin A, Morton E, Patterson T, Staiger DO (2023). The Educational Consequences of Remote and Hybrid Instruction during the Pandemic. American Economic Review: Insights 5(3):377-392. doi · Jack R, Halloran C, Okun J, Oster E (2023). Pandemic Schooling Mode and Student Test Scores: Evidence from US School Districts. American Economic Review: Insights 5(2):173-190. doi · Kofoed MS, Gebhart L, Gilmore D, Moschitto R (2024). Zooming to Class? Experimental Evidence on College Students' Online Learning during COVID-19. American Economic Review: Insights 6(3):324-340. doi · Heppen JB, Sorensen N, Allensworth E, Walters K, Rickles J, Taylor SS, Michelman V (2017). The Struggle to Pass Algebra: Online vs. Face-to-Face Credit Recovery for At-Risk Urban Students. Journal of Research on Educational Effectiveness 10(2):272-296. doi · Marcotte DE, Hemelt SW (2008). Unscheduled School Closings and Student Performance. Education Finance and Policy 3(3):316-338. doi · Goodman J (2014). Flaking Out: Student Absences and Snow Days as Disruptions of Instructional Time. NBER Working Paper 20221. doi
○ SilentFour-day school weekno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Difference-in-differences studies across Oregon, a multi-state NWEA sample and a RAND study of Idaho, New Mexico and Oklahoma agree that moving to a four-day week lowers achievement growth modestly (spring reading about -0.07 SD and fall-to-spring growth about -0.06 SD in math and reading), with the loss concentrated in non-rural districts and in schedules that cut total instructional time; the saving is small, about 1 to 3 percent of operating spending, and there is no evidence of better attendance. (Oregon: -0.042 SD math after switching; multi-state: spring reading -0.07 SD, fall-to-spring growth -0.06 SD; RAND: slower achievement growth than matched five-day districts; expenditures -1 to -3 percent; juvenile crime +20 percent in Colorado counties; no attendance gain)
Mixed evidence. Anderson and Walker (2015) found positive effects on Colorado elementary math and reading, and Morton (2022) found no detectable effect on Oklahoma high school ACT scores or attendance and 31 to 39 percent fewer fighting and bullying incidents (partly mechanical, since students are in school less). Thompson and Ward (2022) show the harm is near zero in four-day districts that keep total hours at five-day levels, so the schedule itself is less the problem than lost time. Families, students and teachers report high satisfaction, and RAND found qualitative support for teacher recruitment in rural districts. Districts under severe revenue loss may use the small savings to protect instructional spending.
Standard. A district adopts or retains a four-day week only after showing that total instructional hours will equal or exceed its prior five-day calendar, with a published pre-adoption analysis, fifth-day meal and supervision provisions, and a dated outcome review that triggers reconsideration if achievement growth falls.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence is acceptable here.
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent directs the Chief Financial Officer and Director of Curriculum to compute total annual instructional hours by grade span under the current five-day calendar, the proposed four-day calendar and the state minimum, and to project savings as a percentage of operating expenditure.
- The Director of Student Services drafts the fifth-day plan for meals, supervision and academic support for students eligible for free or reduced-price meals, with named providers, sites and costs.
- The Director of Curriculum and Assessment selects the state and interim assessments, the comparable five-day districts, and the prior three-year baseline that will be used to judge the change.
- The Superintendent presents the written analysis at a public Board meeting at least 60 days before any vote and posts it on the district website.
- The Board Attorney confirms whether state law requires voter approval, a performance benchmark or minimum annual hours (for example, 1,080 hours in Oklahoma or 75,600 minutes in Texas) before the Board schedules a vote.
Year one
- The Board votes on the calendar only after confirming on the record that total instructional hours are not less than the most recent five-day calendar.
- The Director of Student Services opens the fifth-day meal and supervision program on the first non-instructional weekday and the Business Office tracks participation by meal-eligibility status.
- The Director of Curriculum and Assessment collects fall and spring interim assessment results and chronic absence counts so the first October 1 report can compare growth with the prior three years and with matched five-day districts.
- The Superintendent delivers the first October 1 report to the Board covering achievement growth, chronic absence, disciplinary incidents and actual savings.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 1 in each of the three school years after adoption on achievement growth, chronic absence, disciplinary incidents and actual savings.
- If achievement growth falls below the prior three-year average for two consecutive years, the Board Clerk places a vote on returning to a five-day calendar on the agenda before the next year's calendar is adopted.
| Measure | Achievement growth in reading and mathematics on state and interim assessments compared with the district's prior three-year average and with comparable five-day districts; total annual instructional hours per grade span; chronic absence rate; actual savings as a share of operating expenditure; fifth-day meal and supervision access for low-income students |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The district's achievement growth, chronic absence rate, instructional hours by grade span and operating expenditure for the three school years before adoption, as documented in the pre-adoption analysis |
| Target | Total instructional hours in every grade span equal to or greater than the most recent five-day calendar in the adopted calendar; achievement growth in reading and mathematics at or above the prior three-year average in each of the three years after adoption, with no two consecutive years below it; chronic absence rate no higher than the prior three-year average |
| Benchmark | The research gives effect sizes, not a performance target: four-day weeks lowered spring reading by about -0.07 SD and fall-to-spring growth by about -0.06 SD in math and reading (Oregon math -0.042 SD), saved about 1 to 3 percent of operating spending, and produced no attendance gain, so the policy sets no numeric achievement threshold beyond the district's own prior three-year average |
| Reported | Superintendent's written report to the Board by October 1 in each of the three school years after adoption, presented at a public meeting and posted with the original pre-adoption analysis |
Sources. Thompson PN (2021). Is four less than five? Effects of four-day school weeks on student achievement in Oregon. Journal of Public Economics 193:104308. doi · Morton E, Thompson PN, Kuhfeld M (2024). A multi-state, student-level analysis of the effects of the four-day school week on student achievement and growth. Economics of Education Review 100:102524. doi · Thompson PN, Ward J (2022). Only a matter of time? The role of time in school on four-day school week achievement impacts. Economics of Education Review 86:102198. doi · Kilburn MR, Phillips A, Gomez CJ, Mariano LT, Doss CJ, Troxel WM, Morton E, Estes K (2021). Does four equal five? Implementation and outcomes of the four-day school week. RAND Corporation, RR-A373-1. doi · Morton E (2022). Effects of 4-day school weeks on older adolescents: Examining impacts of the schedule on academic achievement, attendance, and behavior in high school. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 45(1):52-78. doi · Anderson DM, Walker MB (2015). Does shortening the school week impact student performance? Evidence from the four-day school week. Education Finance and Policy 10(3):314-349. doi · Fischer S, Argyle D (2018). Juvenile crime and the four-day school week. Economics of Education Review 64:31-39. doi · Thompson PN (2021). Does a day lost equal dollars saved? The effects of four-day school weeks on school district expenditures. National Tax Journal 74(1):147-183. doi · Thompson PN, Gunter KB, Schuna JM Jr, Tomayko EJ (2021). Are all four-day school weeks created equal? A national assessment of four-day school week policy adoption and implementation. Education Finance and Policy 16(4):558-583. doi
Discipline and climate
✕ Conflicts 1/6Suspension and expulsion233 Suspension and Expulsion
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 5/5
Research. Out-of-school suspension lowers the suspended student's own math and reading achievement (Philadelphia student panel with instrumental variables), and attending a school with a one standard deviation higher suspension rate raises the chance of adult arrest and incarceration by 15 to 20 percent (North Carolina boundary-change natural experiment). Reforms that ended suspension for minor nonviolent conduct raised achievement and attendance in New York City and Chicago, while reforms that cut suspensions without a replacement behavior system lowered achievement and raised absences for most students in Los Angeles and Philadelphia. (Suspended student: lower math and reading scores; strict school: +15 to 20% adult arrest and incarceration; NYC reform: +0.05 SD math over three years; LAUSD reform: lower scores and GPA, more absences for most students; Chicago reform: about +1 day attendance per year.)
Mixed evidence. Peer effects cut both ways. Pope and Zuo (2023) find Los Angeles' near-elimination of suspensions lowered test scores and GPAs and raised absences and teacher turnover for most students, with gains only for the highest-risk students. Lacoe and Steinberg (2018) find Philadelphia's 2012 reform did not cut total suspensions, and serious misconduct, truancy and achievement all moved the wrong way district-wide; the companion paper shows peers were unharmed only in schools that fully implemented the reform. Hwang and Domina (2021) find classmates' math scores rise when disruptive peers are suspended in a low-suspension district, and Carrell, Hoekstra and Kuka (2018) show one disruptive elementary classmate lowers peers' adult earnings 3 percent. Sorensen et al. (2022) find harsher principals do reduce reported minor misconduct, at the cost of more juvenile complaints and lower graduation for everyone in the building. The 2025 Campbell meta-analysis finds school-based programs reduce exclusion only modestly, and out-of-school suspension is the least responsive outcome. The lesson across studies is that removing suspension without an alternative system harms peers; pairing it with a tiered behavior system (see pbis-restorative) does not.
Standard. Out-of-school suspension is limited to conduct that endangers persons or seriously disrupts instruction after documented alternatives, is barred for defiance, dress code, tardiness and attendance offenses, is capped in length, continues instruction during exclusion, and is reported annually with disparity ratios by building.
Checklist. 1 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual, 1 partly.
- ✕The policy limits out-of-school suspension to conduct that endangers persons or seriously disrupts instruction. core
- ✕The policy requires documented alternatives to be tried before an out-of-school suspension is imposed.
- ✕The policy bars out-of-school suspension for defiance, dress code, tardiness and attendance offenses.
- ✓The policy caps the length of an out-of-school suspension. 233 Suspension and Expulsion
- ◐The policy requires instruction to continue for the student during the period of exclusion. partly, 233 Suspension and Expulsion
- ✕The policy requires annual reporting of suspensions with disparity ratios by building.
What the manual says. 233 Suspension and Expulsion, revised March 9, 2020:
Also governs: 113.1 Discipline of Students With Disabilities
Recommended. Amend 233 Suspension and Expulsion
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent issues administrative regulations within 30 days that define the danger and serious-disruption thresholds, list the barred offense categories (defiance, disrespect, dress code, tardiness, truancy and other attendance conduct), and set the five-school-day cap with the state and federal exceptions.
- The Director of Student Services, with the data office, adds required fields to the student information system within 60 days so every out-of-school suspension records the offense category, days lost, documented prior interventions and the student's race, disability status, sex and English-learner status, reconciled to Civil Rights Data Collection definitions.
- Each principal, within 90 days, designates the staff member who will conduct first-day-back re-entry meetings and the process for sending assignments and instruction to suspended students.
- The Director of Student Services trains every principal and assistant principal within 90 days on Goss v. Lopez notice and hearing steps, the IDEA manifestation determination requirement before removals beyond ten school days, and the district's tiered behavior system documentation that must precede any suspension.
- The Superintendent sends the first monthly building suspension report to the Board within 90 days and identifies any building already using out-of-school suspension for the barred categories.
Year one
- Each principal submits the monthly report to the Superintendent showing suspensions, days lost and offense category by race, disability status, sex and English-learner status, and the Superintendent reviews it against the barred categories and the five-day cap.
- The Director of Student Services audits a sample of suspension files each semester to confirm that less restrictive interventions were documented before exclusion and that every suspended student received assignments and a re-entry meeting.
- The Superintendent publishes the first annual report to the Board by September 30 showing suspensions and expulsions per 100 students by building and student group, the risk ratio for Black students and for students with disabilities, and a corrective plan for any building with a risk ratio above 2.0.
- The Superintendent reports to the Board in year one on attendance and achievement of non-suspended students in buildings that reduce suspensions, so the Board can confirm the district is replacing suspension with a behavior system rather than only removing it.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent delivers the annual report by September 30 each year and the Board reviews this policy against it at a public meeting each October.
- Each building with a risk ratio above 2.0 operates under a written corrective plan with a named principal and quarterly check-ins with the Director of Student Services until the ratio falls to 2.0 or below.
- The data office reconciles district suspension figures to each Civil Rights Data Collection submission and reports any discrepancy to the Superintendent.
| Measure | Out-of-school suspensions per 100 students and instructional days lost, by building and by race, disability, sex and English-learner status; share of suspensions for subjective or nonviolent categories (defiance, disrespect, dress code, tardiness, attendance); risk ratios for Black students and students with disabilities; attendance and achievement of non-suspended peers in buildings that reduce suspensions. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The prior school year's suspensions and expulsions per 100 students, days lost, offense category shares and risk ratios by building, drawn from the student information system and reconciled to the most recent Civil Rights Data Collection submission, as published in the first September 30 report. |
| Target | Within one year of adoption, zero out-of-school suspensions recorded for defiance, disrespect, dress code, tardiness, truancy or other attendance conduct, and no single suspension exceeding five school days outside the state and federal exceptions; within 1 to 3 years, every building's risk ratio for Black students and for students with disabilities at or below 2.0, with suspensions per 100 students and days lost declining each year while attendance and achievement of non-suspended students in those buildings hold steady or improve. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric rate benchmark for suspensions per 100 students; the only numeric thresholds it supports are the 2.0 risk ratio and the five-school-day cap in the clause. Research reference points: NYC's reform that ended suspension for minor conduct raised math about 0.05 SD over three years and Chicago's raised attendance about one day per year, while reforms without a replacement behavior system lowered scores and raised absences in Los Angeles and Philadelphia. |
| Reported | Monthly principal reports to the Superintendent; an annual Superintendent report to the Board by September 30 covering the prior school year, published publicly, with the corrective plan for any building above a 2.0 risk ratio; Board review of the policy at a public meeting each October. |
Sources. Bacher-Hicks A, Billings SB, Deming DJ (2024). The school-to-prison pipeline: long-run impacts of school suspensions on adult crime. American Economic Journal: Economic Policy 16(4):165-193. doi · Lacoe J, Steinberg MP (2019). Do suspensions affect student outcomes? Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 41(1):34-62. doi · Sorensen LC, Bushway SD, Gifford EJ (2022). Getting tough? The effects of discretionary principal discipline on student outcomes. Education Finance and Policy 17(2):255-284. doi · Craig AC, Martin DC (2025). Discipline reform, school culture and student achievement. The Economic Journal 136(675):1029-1065. doi · Hinze-Pifer R, Sartain L (2018). Rethinking universal suspension for severe student behavior. Peabody Journal of Education 93(2):228-243. doi · Pope NG, Zuo GW (2023). Suspending suspensions: the education production consequences of school suspension policies. The Economic Journal 133(653):2025-2054. doi · Lacoe J, Steinberg MP (2018). Rolling back zero tolerance: the effect of discipline policy reform on suspension usage and student outcomes. Peabody Journal of Education 93(2):207-227. doi · Steinberg MP, Lacoe J (2018). Reforming school discipline: school-level policy implementation and the consequences for suspended students and their peers. American Journal of Education 125(1):29-77. doi · Hwang N, Domina T (2021). Peer disruption and learning: links between suspensions and the educational achievement of non-suspended students. Education Finance and Policy 16(3):443-463. doi · Carrell SE, Hoekstra M, Kuka E (2018). The long-run effects of disruptive peers. American Economic Review 108(11):3377-3415. doi · Noltemeyer AL, Ward RM, Mcloughlin C (2015). Relationship between school suspension and student outcomes: a meta-analysis. School Psychology Review 44(2):224-240. doi · Rosenbaum J (2020). Educational and criminal justice outcomes 12 years after school suspension. Youth and Society 52(4):515-547. doi · Mittleman J (2018). A downward spiral? Childhood suspension and the path to juvenile arrest. Sociology of Education 91(3):183-204. doi · Valdebenito S, Gaffney H, Arosemena-Burbano F, et al. (2025). School-based interventions for reducing disciplinary school exclusion: an updated systematic review. Campbell Systematic Reviews 21(4). doi · Welsh RO, Little S (2018). The school discipline dilemma: a comprehensive review of disparities and alternative approaches. Review of Educational Research 88(5):752-794. doi · American Academy of Pediatrics Council on School Health (2013). Out-of-school suspension and expulsion. Pediatrics 131(3):e1000-e1007. doi · US Department of Education, Office for Civil Rights (2023). Student Discipline and School Climate in U.S. Public Schools, 2020-21 Civil Rights Data Collection. link
○ SilentTiered positive behavior supports and restorative practicesno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 4/5
Research. School-wide PBIS has the strongest evidence of any discipline framework: a meta-analysis of 29 group studies including seven RCTs finds small-to-medium reductions in discipline referrals and gains in achievement, and the five-year Maryland RCT found children in PBIS schools 33 percent less likely to receive an office referral with fewer suspensions. Restorative practices are promising but mixed: the Pittsburgh RCT cut days lost to suspension 36 percent against 18 percent in controls and narrowed racial gaps, but did not improve achievement and worsened it in grades 6 to 8, while the Maine middle school RCT found no significant intent-to-treat effects. (PBIS: 33% lower odds of an office referral (Maryland RCT); meta-analytic effects small to medium on discipline and achievement. Restorative: suspension days -36% vs -18% control (Pittsburgh RCT), academic harm in grades 6 to 8, null in Maine.)
Mixed evidence. PBIS effects depend on implementation fidelity and are modest; most RCT evidence is from elementary schools, and a 2026 meta-analysis limited to children through grade 5 found no statistically significant pooled effect, with hints of larger effects in pre-K and kindergarten. PBIS is a framework rather than a curriculum, so naming it in policy without the tiered systems, data review and coaching does not reproduce the trial results. For restorative practices, the two RCTs disagree: Pittsburgh showed suspension reductions in elementary grades but no improvement in middle grades, for male students, for students with IEPs or for violent incidents, no reduction in arrests and lower middle-grade achievement; Maine showed no intent-to-treat effect, and reviews (Darling-Hammond et al. 2020; Lodi et al. 2021) rest mostly on non-experimental studies. Trauma-informed whole-school approaches had no eligible rigorous evidence as of a 2019 Campbell review. The honest position is PBIS as the spine, restorative practices as a complement for repair after incidents, and two or more years of coaching for either.
Standard. Every building operates a school-wide tiered behavior support system named in policy, with a leadership team, taught expectations, data review at least monthly, Tier 2 and Tier 3 interventions, annual fidelity assessment with a recognized instrument, and public reporting of referrals, exclusions and fidelity by building; restorative practices are adopted as a complement with the same reporting.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (discipline and climate)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent names a district PBIS coordinator and confirms that each principal has formed a building leadership team that will meet at least monthly to review discipline data.
- The district data office configures the student information system to report office discipline referrals and out-of-school suspensions per 100 students by building, race, disability status and sex, and computes a baseline referral risk ratio for Black students and students with disabilities in each building.
- The Superintendent identifies which buildings have no functioning tiered system and secures at least two years of external coaching for each of them in the next budget cycle, citing Title IV-A eligibility under ESSA for the funding request.
- Each principal schedules the Tiered Fidelity Inventory or another Board-approved instrument for completion by May 1 and reports the date to the Superintendent.
- The Superintendent selects a restorative practices training provider and sets a calendar for staff training in restorative conferences and circles in every building.
Year one
- Each principal ensures school-wide behavioral expectations are taught to all students each semester and documents the dates and materials used.
- Each principal stands up Tier 2 and Tier 3 teams and ensures that students who do not respond to Tier 1 supports receive function-based behavior intervention plans, coordinated with IEP teams where 34 CFR 300.324(a)(2)(i) applies.
- Each school completes the Tiered Fidelity Inventory by May 1, and the Superintendent assigns coaching to every school scoring below 70 percent at Tier 1.
- By September 30 the Superintendent reports to the Board and publishes on the district website the referral, exclusion, fidelity and restorative practice data by building and student group, with a corrective plan for any building whose referral risk ratio for Black students or students with disabilities exceeds 2.0.
Ongoing
- Building leadership teams review discipline data at least monthly and adjust Tier 1, Tier 2 and Tier 3 supports based on what the data show.
- The Superintendent repeats the annual fidelity assessment, the September 30 public report and corrective plans each year, and administers student and teacher climate surveys to accompany the report.
- The district PBIS coordinator monitors achievement in grades 6 to 8 in buildings using restorative practices and reports any decline to the Board so that restorative practices remain a complement to, not a substitute for, the tiered system.
| Measure | Office discipline referrals and out-of-school suspensions per 100 students by building and student group; annual Tier 1 fidelity score on the Tiered Fidelity Inventory; share of buildings with functioning Tier 2 and Tier 3 teams; referral risk ratios for Black students and students with disabilities; student and teacher climate survey results. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Prior school year referrals and suspensions per 100 students by building and student group from the student information system, the first-year Tiered Fidelity Inventory score for each building, and the current count of buildings with functioning Tier 2 and Tier 3 teams, all established in the first 90 days. |
| Target | Within 1 year, every building completes a fidelity assessment and has functioning Tier 2 and Tier 3 teams; within 3 years, every building scores 70 percent or higher at Tier 1, office referrals and out-of-school suspensions per 100 students decline from baseline in every building, and no building has a referral risk ratio above 2.0 for Black students or students with disabilities. |
| Benchmark | Tiered Fidelity Inventory score of 70 percent or higher at Tier 1 is the recognized fidelity benchmark; referral risk ratio of 2.0 is the policy's corrective-plan trigger. For outcomes, the Maryland RCT found 33 percent lower odds of an office referral in PBIS schools and the Pittsburgh RCT found suspension days down 36 percent against 18 percent in controls; these are reference points from the research, not district targets, and the entry gives no numeric benchmark for the size of a district's own decline. |
| Reported | Superintendent reports to the Board and publishes on the district website by September 30 each year, for the prior school year, by building and by race, disability status and sex, including fidelity scores, restorative practice use and outcomes, and a corrective plan for any building over the 2.0 risk ratio threshold. |
Sources. Lee A, Gage NA (2020). Updating and expanding systematic reviews and meta-analyses on the effects of school-wide positive behavior interventions and supports. Psychology in the Schools 57(5):783-804. doi · Bradshaw CP, Mitchell MM, Leaf PJ (2010). Examining the effects of schoolwide positive behavioral interventions and supports on student outcomes: results from a randomized controlled effectiveness trial in elementary schools. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions 12(3):133-148. doi · Bradshaw CP, Waasdorp TE, Leaf PJ (2012). Effects of school-wide positive behavioral interventions and supports on child behavior problems. Pediatrics 130(5):e1136-e1145. doi · Horner RH, Sugai G, Smolkowski K, et al. (2009). A randomized, wait-list controlled effectiveness trial assessing school-wide positive behavior support in elementary schools. Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions 11(3):133-144. doi · Lee J, Watson K, Yang HW (2026). Positive enough? A meta-analysis on positive behavior support for young children. Journal of Research in Childhood Education. doi · Augustine CH, Engberg J, Grimm GE, et al. (2018). Can Restorative Practices Improve School Climate and Curb Suspensions? An Evaluation of the Impact of Restorative Practices in a Mid-Sized Urban School District. RAND Corporation, RR-2840-DOJ. doi · Acosta J, Chinman M, Ebener P, et al. (2019). Evaluation of a whole-school change intervention: findings from a two-year cluster-randomized trial of the Restorative Practices Intervention. Journal of Youth and Adolescence 48(5):876-890. doi · Darling-Hammond S, Fronius TA, Sutherland H, et al. (2020). Effectiveness of restorative justice in US K-12 schools: a review of quantitative research. Contemporary School Psychology 24(3):295-308. doi · Lodi E, Perrella L, Lepri GL, Scarpa ML, Patrizi P (2022). Use of restorative justice and restorative practices at school: a systematic literature review. International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health 19(1):96. doi · Valdebenito S, Gaffney H, Arosemena-Burbano F, et al. (2025). School-based interventions for reducing disciplinary school exclusion: an updated systematic review. Campbell Systematic Reviews 21(4). doi · Maynard BR, Farina A, Dell NA, Kelly MS (2019). Effects of trauma-informed approaches in schools: a systematic review. Campbell Systematic Reviews 15(1-2):e1018. doi · Kellam SG, Brown CH, Poduska JM, et al. (2008). Effects of a universal classroom behavior management program in first and second grades on young adult behavioral, psychiatric, and social outcomes. Drug and Alcohol Dependence 95(Suppl 1):S5-S28. doi
○ SilentPhysical restraint and seclusionno governing section
Tier D: professional standard or expert consensusstakes 4/5
Research. No outcome study shows that restraint or seclusion improves behavior or learning; the GAO found hundreds of allegations of abuse and death linked to their use in schools between 1990 and 2009, with untrained staff and non-aggressive children with disabilities as the recurring pattern. In 2021-22 about 105,700 students were restrained or secluded, and students served under IDEA were 14 percent of enrollment but 76 percent of those physically restrained and 68 percent of those secluded. A systematic review of 15 studies finds that school-wide prevention approaches reduce the frequency of restraint, but none is an RCT. (IDEA students: 14% of enrollment, 76% of physical restraints, 68% of seclusions (2021-22); earlier CRDC analysis: students with disabilities 7 times as likely to be restrained and 4 times as likely to be secluded; reduction programs: most of 15 studies report significant decreases, magnitudes uncontrolled.)
Mixed evidence. The evidence base is thin and the tier reflects that. Harm evidence is case-based (GAO's closed cases, media investigations) and from medical literature on restraint deaths rather than from controlled school studies. The reduction literature (Hodgkiss and Harding 2023; Trader et al. 2017) is mostly single-site pre-post designs without control groups. Federal counts are unreliable: GAO found about 70 percent of districts reported zero incidents in 2015-16 and that large districts had reported zeros in error, so trend claims from the CRDC are weak. Practitioners argue that restraint remains necessary in genuine emergencies to prevent injury, and no study claims otherwise; the standard here limits rather than bans physical restraint while banning seclusion, mechanical and chemical restraint and restraints that restrict breathing.
Standard. Seclusion, mechanical restraint, chemical restraint and any restraint that restricts breathing are prohibited; physical restraint is limited to imminent danger of serious physical harm, performed by trained staff, with same-day parent notice, a written incident report, a debrief, a behavior-plan review after repeated use, and quarterly public reporting.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain (1 sections touch related words but do not govern it). Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (discipline and climate)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent issues a written directive to all principals within 30 days that seclusion, mechanical restraint, chemical restraint, prone and supine restraint and any hold restricting breathing are prohibited effective immediately, and orders every seclusion room or area closed or repurposed.
- The Director of Special Education adopts a single incident report form and a district-wide incident log within 60 days, and reconciles the current log against the district's most recent Civil Rights Data Collection submission to establish the baseline.
- The Human Resources Director inventories which staff hold current certification in the Board-approved crisis intervention program and schedules certification for every building so each school has trained staff by day 90.
- Each principal reviews the past year's incident log within 90 days and refers any student restrained two or more times to the IEP, Section 504 or behavior support team for a behavior intervention plan review within ten school days.
- The Superintendent delivers the first quarterly report to the Board covering restraints by building, disability status, race and sex, injuries, and the share of incidents with same-day parent notification.
Year one
- The Director of Special Education trains every principal and crisis-certified staff member on the imminent-danger standard, the same-day parent notice, the two-day incident report, the two-day debrief and the ten-day plan review, and audits a sample of incident reports each quarter for compliance.
- The Director of Special Education implements a school-wide positive behavioral intervention and support program in every building, starting with the buildings that had the highest restraint rate per 100 students in the baseline year.
- The Superintendent publishes the prior school year's restraint data and the Civil Rights Data Collection submission on the district website by September 30 and certifies to the Board that the two sources match.
- The Board reviews the full year of quarterly reports and the disability, race and sex breakdowns at a public meeting and directs corrective action for any building that is an outlier.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board each quarter and publishes the annual data by September 30, with the incident log reconciled to the Civil Rights Data Collection submission every year.
- The Human Resources Director verifies annually that every staff member authorized to apply a physical restraint holds current crisis intervention certification and removes authorization when certification lapses.
- The Director of Special Education reviews every student with a second restraint in a school year to confirm the behavior intervention plan was revised within ten school days.
| Measure | Incidents of physical restraint, mechanical restraint and seclusion per 100 students, by building and by disability status, race and sex, from the district incident log reconciled to the Civil Rights Data Collection submission; injuries to students and staff; share of incidents with same-day parent notification; share of incidents involving a student with no behavior intervention plan. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The prior school year's incident log and the district's most recent Civil Rights Data Collection submission, reconciled within 60 days of adoption; nationally, students served under IDEA were 14 percent of enrollment but 76 percent of physical restraints and 68 percent of seclusions in 2021-22, and earlier CRDC analysis found students with disabilities 7 times as likely to be restrained and 4 times as likely to be secluded. |
| Target | Zero seclusions, mechanical restraints, chemical restraints and prone or supine restraints from the first quarterly report onward; physical restraints per 100 students declining each year for 3 years against the baseline year; 100 percent of incidents with same-day parent notification and a written report within two school days by the end of year one; the share of restraints involving students with disabilities moving toward their share of enrollment over 3 years. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric target for an acceptable restraint rate. The only benchmarks are the prohibited practices, which have a benchmark of zero, and the national disproportionality figures (IDEA students 14 percent of enrollment, 76 percent of restraints, 68 percent of seclusions), which the district can compare its own ratios against. A systematic review of 15 studies finds school-wide prevention approaches reduce restraint frequency, but magnitudes are uncontrolled and none is an RCT, so no expected percentage reduction is supported. |
| Reported | The Superintendent reports to the Board each quarter and publishes on the district website by September 30 for the prior school year the number of restraints by building, disability status, race and sex, the number of injuries, the share with same-day parent notification, and the district's Civil Rights Data Collection submission, with a note explaining any difference between the log and the submission; a zero submission from a district with special education programs is flagged for Board inquiry. |
Sources. US Government Accountability Office (2009). Seclusions and Restraints: Selected Cases of Death and Abuse at Public and Private Schools and Treatment Centers. GAO-09-719T, May 19, 2009. link · US Government Accountability Office (2019). K-12 Education: Education Should Take Immediate Action to Address Inaccuracies in Federal Restraint and Seclusion Data. GAO-19-551R, June 18, 2019. link · US Government Accountability Office (2020). K-12 Education: Education Needs to Address Significant Quality Issues with its Restraint and Seclusion Data. GAO-20-345, April 21, 2020. link · US Department of Education (2012). Restraint and Seclusion: Resource Document. Washington, DC, May 15, 2012. link · US Department of Education, Office for Civil Rights (2025). 2021-22 Civil Rights Data Collection: A First Look. link · Gage NA, Pico DL, Evanovich L (2022). National trends and school-level predictors of restraint and seclusion for students with disabilities. Exceptionality 30(1):1-13. doi · Hodgkiss B, Harding E (2023). Reducing physical restraint in educational settings: a systematic literature review. Journal of Research in Special Educational Needs 23(4):265-277. doi · Trader B, Stonemeier J, Berg T, et al. (2017). Promoting inclusion through evidence-based alternatives to restraint and seclusion. Research and Practice for Persons with Severe Disabilities 42(2):75-88. doi · Kern L, George HP, Evanovich LL, Hodnett JM, Freeman J (2024). A review of U.S. policy guidance and legislation on restraint and seclusion in schools: considerations for improvement. Exceptional Children 90(4):382-397. doi · Mohr WK, Petti TA, Mohr BD (2003). Adverse effects associated with physical restraint. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry 48(5):330-337. doi · Scheuermann B, Peterson R, Ryan JB, Billingsley G (2016). Professional practice and ethical issues related to physical restraint and seclusion in schools. Journal of Disability Policy Studies 27(2):86-95. doi
✕ Conflicts 2/6Student searches and due process in discipline226 Searches
Tier D: professional standard or expert consensusstakes 3/5
Research. This domain is governed by constitutional standards rather than outcome research: Goss v. Lopez requires notice and an opportunity to respond before any suspension of ten days or less, New Jersey v. T.L.O. permits school searches on reasonable suspicion when justified at inception and reasonable in scope, and Safford v. Redding holds that a search of a student's underwear requires suspicion that the item is dangerous or hidden there. The one federal randomized trial of random drug testing found lower self-reported use among tested students (16 versus 22 percent) with no spillover to untested students, while national correlational studies find no association between testing and student drug use. (Legal standards, not effect sizes. Drug testing: tested students 16% vs 22% past-30-day use in the federal RCT; no effect on untested students or on intentions; national surveys show no association.)
Mixed evidence. Outcome evidence on searches and hearings is almost nonexistent; nobody has randomized due process. The drug-testing literature is the only causal evidence and it is mixed: the federal RCT (James-Burdumy et al. 2010) found less reported use among students actually subject to testing in seven volunteer districts, with no generalizable national estimate, while Yamaguchi et al. (2003) found no association between school testing and student drug use in national Monitoring the Future data, the SATURN prospective trial of athlete testing found no reduction in past-month use, and Sznitman and Romer (2014) found that a positive school climate, not testing, predicted less use. Courts have upheld suspicionless drug testing of students in extracurricular activities (Vernonia 1995; Earls 2002), so the limit on it here is a policy choice grounded in weak benefit evidence, not a legal requirement. Procedural-justice research in schools is correlational: students who see discipline as fair report less misconduct and more engagement, but the designs cannot show that hearings cause the difference.
Standard. Policy states the Goss procedures for every short suspension and a formal hearing with written notice, representation, evidence and a written decision for any exclusion beyond ten days; searches require individualized reasonable suspicion documented in writing, strip searches are prohibited, and searches and hearings are logged and reported by student group.
Checklist. 2 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✓The policy requires notice and an opportunity to respond before every suspension of ten days or less. core 233 Suspension and Expulsion
- ✕The policy requires a formal hearing with written notice, representation, evidence and a written decision for any exclusion beyond ten days.
- ✕The policy requires individualized reasonable suspicion for any search of a student.
- ✓The policy requires that the suspicion for each search be documented in writing. 226 Searches
- ✕The policy prohibits strip searches.
- ✕The policy requires that searches and hearings be logged and reported by student group.
What the manual says. 226 Searches, revised November 21, 2016:
Also governs: 233 Suspension and Expulsion; 218 Student Discipline
Recommended. Amend 226 Searches
First 90 days
- The General Counsel reviews the clause against state expulsion hearing statutes, IDEA 34 CFR 300.530 to 300.536, Section 504 and FERPA, and drafts the administrative procedure, including which search standard applies when a school resource officer or police officer conducts the search.
- The Director of Student Services adds required fields to the student information system so every search is logged with the written basis for suspicion and every suspension conference is logged with the charge, the evidence explained and the student's response.
- The Superintendent issues the written annual notice to students and families describing when random locker searches may occur and stating that the district does not conduct suspicionless drug testing.
- The Director of Student Services trains every principal, assistant principal and dean on the Goss conference, the one school day limit for emergency removals, same-day written notice to parents, the reasonable-suspicion search record and the strip search prohibition.
- The Superintendent names a pool of hearing officers or Board panel members not employed at any referring school and publishes the expulsion hearing procedure, including the five school day notice and five school day decision timelines.
Year one
- The Director of Student Services audits a sample of suspension records from each building each semester for the documented pre-removal conference and same-day parent notice, and reports the results to the principal and Superintendent.
- The Director of Special Education tracks every removal of a student with a disability and confirms the manifestation determination is completed within ten school days of the decision to remove.
- The Superintendent delivers the first report to the Board by September 30 covering searches, suspensions, expulsions, documented conferences, appeals, complaints and strip searches, broken out by building, race and disability status.
- The General Counsel reviews every complaint alleging a search or hearing violation within 30 days and recommends corrective action to the Superintendent.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by September 30 each year on the prior year's searches, suspensions, expulsions, conference documentation, appeals and complaints by building, race and disability.
- The Director of Student Services retrains new administrators within 90 days of hire and all administrators annually on search and due process procedures.
- The General Counsel reviews the procedure each year against changes in state statute and court decisions and brings any needed amendments to the Board.
| Measure | Share of suspensions with a documented pre-removal conference (charge, evidence and student response) and same-day parent notice; share of expulsion hearings with timely written notice, an independent hearing officer and a written decision within five school days; number of searches logged with a written basis, by building, race and disability; number of strip searches; manifestation determinations completed within ten school days; complaints and appeals and their outcomes. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Set from the first discipline record audit and the first September 30 report after adoption; the entry provides no district baseline. |
| Target | Zero strip searches in every year; every exclusion over ten days has written notice at least five school days before the hearing and a written decision within five school days after it; every manifestation determination completed within ten school days; the share of suspensions with a documented pre-removal conference and same-day parent notice rises each year, with the gap between buildings and between student groups narrowing, as shown in the September 30 report within 1 to 3 years. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric benchmark for conference documentation or search rates; the only numeric evidence is the federal drug testing trial (16 versus 22 percent use), which the clause does not rely on because it bars suspicionless drug testing. The standards are legal floors from Goss, T.L.O., Safford and IDEA, so full compliance is the benchmark. |
| Reported | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by September 30, disaggregated by building, race and disability status, with the discipline record audit results attached. |
Sources. Goss v. Lopez, 419 U.S. 565 (1975). Supreme Court of the United States, decided January 22, 1975. link · New Jersey v. T.L.O., 469 U.S. 325 (1985). Supreme Court of the United States, decided January 15, 1985. link · Safford Unified School District #1 v. Redding, 557 U.S. 364 (2009). Supreme Court of the United States, decided June 25, 2009. link · Vernonia School District 47J v. Acton, 515 U.S. 646 (1995). Supreme Court of the United States. link · Board of Education of Independent School District No. 92 of Pottawatomie County v. Earls, 536 U.S. 822 (2002). Supreme Court of the United States. link · James-Burdumy S, Goesling B, Deke J, Einspruch E (2010). The Effectiveness of Mandatory-Random Student Drug Testing. NCEE 2010-4025. National Center for Education Evaluation and Regional Assistance, Institute of Education Sciences. link · Yamaguchi R, Johnston LD, O'Malley PM (2003). Relationship between student illicit drug use and school drug-testing policies. Journal of School Health 73(4):159-164. doi · Goldberg L, Elliot DL, MacKinnon DP, et al. (2007). Outcomes of a prospective trial of student-athlete drug testing: the Student Athlete Testing Using Random Notification (SATURN) study. Journal of Adolescent Health 41(5):421-429. doi · Sznitman SR, Romer D (2014). Student drug testing and positive school climates: testing the relation between two school characteristics and drug use behavior in a longitudinal study. Journal of Studies on Alcohol and Drugs 75(1):65-73. doi
◐ Partial 0/6Bullying prevention249 Bullying/Cyberbullying
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 4/5
Research. Whole-school anti-bullying programs reduce bullying perpetration by about 19 to 20 percent and victimization by about 15 to 16 percent on average across roughly 100 evaluations, with RCT-only estimates smaller (d about 0.15) but still showing mental-health gains. Written policies matter too: students in states whose anti-bullying laws contain the core US Department of Education components had 24 percent lower odds of being bullied and 20 percent lower odds of cyberbullying, and enumerated policies that name sexual orientation and gender identity are associated with lower suicide-attempt risk among LGB youth. (Perpetration -19 to -20%; victimization -15 to -16% (program meta-analyses); RCT pooled d = -0.15 bullying, -0.21 mental health; compliant state laws: 24% lower odds of bullying, 20% lower odds of cyberbullying.)
Mixed evidence. Program effects shrink with age: a three-level meta-analysis found effects near zero for grade 8 and above, so a program that works in elementary school may do nothing in high school. RCT-only pooled effects are small (d about 0.15). The policy-content findings (Hatzenbuehler 2013, 2015; Meyer 2019; Kull 2016) are cross-sectional associations between state or district policy and student reports, not causal estimates. Most trials are European; KiVa's large cluster-randomized effects in Finland have not been replicated at the same scale in US districts. Self-report prevalence varies several-fold with the definition and recall window used, so year-to-year comparisons require a fixed instrument.
Standard. The policy shall name a specific evidence-based whole-school program with a written policy and classroom rules, enumerate protected characteristics including sexual orientation and gender identity, require a published reporting channel with an investigation deadline, and require an annual prevalence survey and report to the Board.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual, 1 partly.
- ✕The policy names a specific evidence-based whole-school anti-bullying program with a written policy and classroom rules. core
- ✕The policy enumerates protected characteristics and the list includes sexual orientation and gender identity.
- ✕The policy requires a published channel for reporting bullying.
- ✕The policy sets a deadline by which a reported incident must be investigated.
- ✕The policy requires an annual survey measuring the prevalence of bullying.
- ◐The policy requires an annual report on bullying prevalence to the Board. partly, 249 Bullying/Cyberbullying
What the manual says. 249 Bullying/Cyberbullying, revised September 23, 2024:
Recommended. Amend 249 Bullying/Cyberbullying
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent designates the Director of Student Services as program coordinator and contracts for Olweus Bullying Prevention Program training for a coordinating committee at every school.
- Each principal publishes the reporting channel, including an anonymous option, in the student handbook and on the school website, and posts classroom rules against bullying in every classroom.
- The Director of Student Services issues a report log template so each school records the date of every report, the date the investigation began, and the date the outcome was documented against the two-school-day and ten-school-day deadlines.
- The Superintendent sends parent information describing the enumerated protected characteristics, the reporting channel and the support available to targeted students to every family within 90 days of adoption.
- The district counsel reviews the reporting and investigation procedure against the state anti-bullying statute and Title IX, Title VI, Section 504 and IDEA obligations and reports any gap to the Board within 60 days.
Year one
- The Superintendent administers the Olweus Bullying Questionnaire to all students in grades 3 through 12 in the spring and records results by school, grade and demographic group as the baseline.
- Each principal convenes the school coordinating committee at least monthly during the first year to review the report log, deadline compliance and classroom rule enforcement.
- The Director of Student Services trains all staff, including bus drivers, aides and cafeteria staff, in the program's intervention protocol before the start of the second school year.
- The Superintendent delivers the first annual report to the Board by October 1 covering prevalence, reports received, reports investigated within deadline, reports substantiated and the start of the three-year trend record.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent administers the fixed-item survey every spring and reports to the Board by October 1 each year with the three-year trend by school, grade and demographic group.
- Each principal audits the report log each semester and reports to the Superintendent the share of investigations begun within two school days and documented within ten school days.
- The Director of Student Services refreshes staff training annually and reviews the enumerated-characteristics list and the state statute for changes each year.
| Measure | Annual student-reported bullying victimization prevalence on the fixed Olweus Bullying Questionnaire item, by school, grade and demographic group, plus number of reports received, number investigated within the two-school-day and ten-school-day deadlines, number substantiated, and share of students who say they would report. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first spring administration of the Olweus Bullying Questionnaire in year one, broken out by school, grade and demographic group, together with the first full year of report-log counts; no prior-year district data exist until that administration. |
| Target | Within 3 years of the baseline administration, district-wide student-reported victimization prevalence falls by at least 15 percent from baseline, consistent with the 15 to 16 percent victimization reduction in program meta-analyses, and in every year 100 percent of logged reports show an investigation begun within two school days and an outcome documented within ten school days, with the share of students who say they would report rising each year. |
| Benchmark | Whole-school program meta-analyses across roughly 100 evaluations: perpetration down 19 to 20 percent and victimization down 15 to 16 percent; RCT-only pooled d of 0.15 for bullying and 0.21 for mental health; students in states with laws containing the Department of Education core components had 24 percent lower odds of being bullied and 20 percent lower odds of cyberbullying. |
| Reported | The Superintendent's annual written report to the Board by October 1, presenting prevalence by school, grade and demographic group, reports received, reports investigated within deadline, reports substantiated, and the three-year trend, with the Board recording whether the target was met in its minutes. |
Sources. Gaffney H, Ttofi MM, Farrington DP (2019). Evaluating the effectiveness of school-bullying prevention programs: An updated meta-analytical review. Aggression and Violent Behavior 45:111-133. doi · Gaffney H, Farrington DP, Ttofi MM (2019). Examining the effectiveness of school-bullying intervention programs globally: a meta-analysis. International Journal of Bullying Prevention 1(1):14-31. doi · Gaffney H, Ttofi MM, Farrington DP (2021). What works in anti-bullying programs? Analysis of effective intervention components. Journal of School Psychology 85:37-56. doi · Fraguas D, Diaz-Caneja CM, Ayora M, et al. (2021). Assessment of school anti-bullying interventions: a meta-analysis of randomized clinical trials. JAMA Pediatrics 175(1):44-55. doi · Ttofi MM, Farrington DP (2011). Effectiveness of school-based programs to reduce bullying: a systematic and meta-analytic review. Journal of Experimental Criminology 7(1):27-56. doi · Karna A, Voeten M, Little TD, Poskiparta E, Kaljonen A, Salmivalli C (2011). A large-scale evaluation of the KiVa antibullying program: grades 4-6. Child Development 82(1):311-330. doi · Karna A, Voeten M, Little TD, Alanen E, Poskiparta E, Salmivalli C (2013). Effectiveness of the KiVa antibullying program: grades 1-3 and 7-9. Journal of Educational Psychology 105(2):535-551. doi · Waasdorp TE, Bradshaw CP, Leaf PJ (2012). The impact of schoolwide positive behavioral interventions and supports on bullying and peer rejection: a randomized controlled effectiveness trial. Archives of Pediatrics and Adolescent Medicine 166(2):149-156. doi · Hatzenbuehler ML, Schwab-Reese L, Ranapurwala SI, Hertz MF, Ramirez MR (2015). Associations between antibullying policies and bullying in 25 states. JAMA Pediatrics 169(10):e152411. doi · Hatzenbuehler ML, Keyes KM (2013). Inclusive anti-bullying policies and reduced risk of suicide attempts in lesbian and gay youth. Journal of Adolescent Health 53(1 Suppl):S21-S26. doi · Meyer IH, Luo F, Wilson BDM, Stone DM (2019). Sexual orientation enumeration in state antibullying statutes in the United States: associations with bullying, suicidal ideation, and suicide attempts among youth. LGBT Health 6(1):9-14. doi · Kull RM, Greytak EA, Kosciw JG, Villenas C (2016). Effectiveness of school district antibullying policies in improving LGBT youths' school climate. Psychology of Sexual Orientation and Gender Diversity 3(4):407-415. doi · Yeager DS, Fong CJ, Lee HY, Espelage DL (2015). Declines in efficacy of anti-bullying programs among older adolescents: theory and a three-level meta-analysis. Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology 37:36-51. doi · Modecki KL, Minchin J, Harbaugh AG, Guerra NG, Runions KC (2014). Bullying prevalence across contexts: a meta-analysis measuring cyber and traditional bullying. Journal of Adolescent Health 55(5):602-611. doi
◐ Partial 0/6Dress codes and uniforms221 Dress and Grooming
Tier C: consistent correlational evidencestakes 2/5
Research. The best causal evidence on uniforms (school fixed effects in a large urban district) finds a modest attendance gain in secondary grades and no effect on achievement or discipline, and national longitudinal data show no behavior or attendance advantage; the evidence that dress rules improve learning is weak. The evidence on enforcement is clearer: GAO's national review found dress codes restrict items typically worn by girls more than boys, strict enforcement in more than four in five predominantly Black schools against about one third of predominantly white schools, informal class removals in 44 percent of codes, and body-measuring rules in 60 percent; Black girls receive disproportionate office referrals for dress code and other subjective infractions. (Uniforms: small secondary attendance gain, no achievement effect (Gentile and Imberman); no behavior or attendance link in national elementary data (Ansari et al.); physical-activity-enabling uniforms: no significant MVPA gain in a 42-school cluster RCT. Enforcement: strict codes in more than 80% of predominantly Black schools vs about 33% of predominantly white schools (GAO).)
Mixed evidence. Gentile and Imberman (2012) do find an attendance improvement in middle and high school and large increases in elementary teacher retention after uniform adoption, and Ansari et al. (2022) find low-income students in uniform schools attended better, so uniforms are not harmful on the evidence; they are simply not a lever for achievement. Cross-national PISA correlations (Baumann and Krskova 2016) link uniforms with better classroom discipline, but they cannot separate uniforms from the schools that choose them. Brunsma and Rockquemore (1998) found a small negative achievement association that later commentators disputed. The GAO findings describe enforcement patterns, not outcomes, and the harm case for strict dress codes rests on the exclusionary-discipline evidence (see exclusionary-discipline) rather than on dress-code studies themselves. The one RCT in this area (Nathan et al. 2021) tested sports uniforms for physical activity and found no significant primary effect.
Standard. Dress rules are limited to health, safety and the prohibition of hate speech and obscenity, apply identically to all students regardless of sex, do not require measuring bodies or clothing, protect religious and cultural dress and natural hair, and are enforced without removal from instruction or exclusion from school, with enforcement data reported by student group.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual, 2 partly.
- ✕The policy limits dress rules to health, safety, and the prohibition of hate speech and obscenity. core
- ✕The policy applies dress rules identically to all students regardless of sex.
- ◐The policy does not require measuring students' bodies or clothing to determine compliance. partly, 221 Dress and Grooming
- ✕The policy protects religious and cultural dress and natural hair.
- ◐The policy enforces dress rules without removing students from instruction or excluding them from school. partly, 221 Dress and Grooming
- ✕The policy requires enforcement data to be reported by student group.
What the manual says. 221 Dress and Grooming, revised June 20, 1994:
Recommended. Amend 221 Dress and Grooming
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent directs the General Counsel to audit every existing dress rule in the district and each building handbook against the clause, flagging any rule that is sex-specific, requires measuring a body or garment, or restricts shoulders, collarbones, midriffs or leggings.
- The Director of Student Services rewrites the district dress code and every building handbook to the model clause's limits (health, safety, obscenity, threats, hate speech, promotion of illegal substances or violence) and strikes the flagged rules.
- The Director of Technology adds a dress code intervention category to the student information system with required fields for building, student race and sex, type of intervention, and whether any instructional time was lost, so informal removals can be logged.
- Each principal trains all staff within 60 days on the private-conversation response, the ban on body comments, the loaner garment process, and the duty to log every intervention including informal removals.
- The Business Office establishes a loaner garment supply in each building and a procedure for providing free uniforms to students who qualify for free or reduced-price meals in any school that keeps a uniform requirement.
Year one
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by September 30 the prior year's dress code interventions by building, race and sex, with rates per 100 students and instructional minutes lost.
- The Board reviews the report and revises or repeals any rule whose enforcement rate for Black students or for female students exceeds twice the rate for white or male students.
- The Director of Student Services reviews parent and student complaints about dress enforcement quarterly and refers any report of class removal, send-home, suspension or body comment to the principal's supervisor for corrective action.
- The General Counsel reviews the revised code against Title IX, Title VI, the state CROWN Act if one is in force, the First Amendment, and any state uniform opt-out or free-uniform statute, and reports compliance to the Board.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent delivers the September 30 enforcement report to the Board every year and the Board acts on any rule that crosses the two-to-one threshold.
- Each principal spot-checks the intervention log against staff and student reports at least once per semester to confirm informal removals are being logged.
- The Director of Student Services re-audits the district and building codes every year for gender-specific rules and body-measuring rules and reports the share remaining to the Board.
| Measure | Dress code interventions, class removals and suspensions per 100 students by building, race and sex, drawn from the student information system log that includes informal removals; instructional minutes lost to dress code enforcement; share of code rules that are gender-specific or require measuring a student's body; parent and student complaints about dress enforcement. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first full school year of logged data after the student information system category is live, reported by September 30; the district has no prior count because informal removals were not logged. |
| Target | Zero class removals, send-homes, suspensions or activity exclusions for dress code violations in every year after adoption; zero gender-specific rules and zero body-measuring rules in the district and building codes within 90 days; and no student group's dress code intervention rate exceeding twice the rate for white or male students in any building by the end of year one, holding in years two and three. |
| Benchmark | The entry provides no numeric benchmark for an acceptable intervention rate; the only numbers it supports are the GAO national findings (strict codes in more than 80 percent of predominantly Black schools against about 33 percent of predominantly white schools, informal class removals in 44 percent of codes, body-measuring rules in 60 percent) and the clause's own two-to-one disparity threshold, so the target is set on direction and on the clause's threshold. |
| Reported | Annual report to the Board by September 30 covering the prior school year, presented by the Superintendent, with the count of rules revised or repealed and the number of complaints received, and posted publicly with the Board minutes. |
Sources. Gentile E, Imberman SA (2012). Dressed for success? The effect of school uniforms on student achievement and behavior. Journal of Urban Economics 71(1):1-17. doi · Brunsma DL, Rockquemore KA (1998). Effects of student uniforms on attendance, behavior problems, substance use, and academic achievement. Journal of Educational Research 92(1):53-62. doi · Ansari A, Shepard M, Gottfried MA (2022). School uniforms and student behavior: is there a link? Early Childhood Research Quarterly 58:278-286. doi · Yeung R (2009). Are school uniforms a good fit? Results from the ECLS-K and the NELS. Educational Policy 23(6):847-874. doi · Reidy J (2021). Reviewing school uniform through a public health lens: evidence about the impacts of school uniform on education and health. Public Health Reviews 42:1604212. doi · Nathan N, McCarthy N, Hope K, et al. (2021). The impact of school uniforms on primary school student's physical activity at school: outcomes of a cluster randomized controlled trial. International Journal of Behavioral Nutrition and Physical Activity 18:17. doi · US Government Accountability Office (2022). K-12 Education: Department of Education Should Provide Information on Equity and Safety in School Dress Codes. GAO-23-105348, October 25, 2022. link · Edwards TK, Marshall C (2020). Undressing policy: a critical analysis of North Carolina (USA) public school dress codes. Gender and Education 32(6):732-750. doi · Morris EW, Perry BL (2017). Girls behaving badly? Race, gender, and subjective evaluation in the discipline of African American girls. Sociology of Education 90(2):127-148. doi · Baumann C, Krskova H (2016). School discipline, school uniforms and academic performance. International Journal of Educational Management 30(6):1003-1029. doi · National Women's Law Center (2018). Dress Coded: Black Girls, Bodies, and Bias in D.C. Schools. link
◐ Partial 2/6Corporal punishment218 Student Discipline
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 4/5state law covers it
Research. The meta-analysis specific to school corporal punishment (Visser et al. 2022) finds it associated with more externalizing behavior (r = 0.27, 21 studies, 67,400 children), more internalizing problems (r = 0.16) and lower school performance (r = -0.11, 977,367 children); a propensity-matched sample of young adults from the 19 states where it was legal shows lower high school GPA and more depressive symptoms; the 75-study meta-analysis of physical punishment finds 13 of 17 outcomes significantly worse and none better. No study has found that corporal punishment improves behavior or learning, and no study has found that ending it increases misbehavior. (School CP: externalizing r = 0.27, internalizing r = 0.16, school performance r = -0.11; physical punishment generally: 13 of 17 outcomes worse (mental health problems d = 0.53, aggression d = 0.37), immediate compliance not even reliably improved (d = 0.14, n.s.).)
Mixed evidence. The evidence is meta-analytic but correlational: no randomized or natural-experiment study of school corporal punishment exists, and none is likely, so the direction of causation is argued from consistency, dose and the absence of any benefit rather than from an experiment. Font and Cage (2018) found only physical abuse, not mild corporal punishment, predicted declines in cognitive test performance, though every form predicted lower school engagement; do not claim that mild corporal punishment measurably lowers test scores on that study. There is no US difference-in-differences study of suspensions or achievement before and after a state or district ban, so a district that ends paddling without a replacement behavior system could shift to suspension; the cross-national evidence that bans are followed by less adolescent fighting (Elgar et al. 2018) is ecological. The commonly repeated claim that states permitting corporal punishment have lower ACT scores has no locatable primary source and should not be used.
Standard. Corporal punishment is prohibited in policy for every student in every setting, with physical force limited to the restraint standard, and the prohibition is communicated to staff and families annually.
Checklist. 2 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual, 2 partly.
- ◐The policy prohibits corporal punishment for every student in every setting. core partly, 218 Student Discipline
- ◐The policy limits any physical force to the restraint standard. partly, 218 Student Discipline
- ✕The policy requires the prohibition to be communicated to staff annually.
- ✕The policy requires the prohibition to be communicated to families annually.
- ✓The policy does not list corporal punishment among permitted consequences or allow it by the principal or designee. 218 Student Discipline
- ✓The policy contains no parental consent forms, witness, instrument or number-of-licks rules, or reasonable force defined to include paddling. 218 Student Discipline
What the manual says. 218 Student Discipline, revised September 27, 2021:
Recommended. Amend 218 Student Discipline
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Board adopts the model clause by vote within 30 days and the Superintendent files it in the policy manual, superseding any prior policy that permitted corporal punishment or parental opt-in.
- The Superintendent sends every employee, volunteer and contractor a written notice of the prohibition within 60 days and obtains a signed acknowledgment from each, retained in personnel files.
- The Director of Student Services cross-checks the restraint and seclusion policy within 60 days so that physical force is limited to preventing imminent physical harm and no reference to paddling, striking or corporal punishment remains in any district document.
- The Director of Student Services pulls the district's most recent Civil Rights Data Collection corporal punishment submission and building discipline logs within 90 days and reconciles the two counts as the baseline.
- The Superintendent names a single intake route for allegations and directs that every allegation of corporal punishment be investigated and logged, with a referral to the state child protection agency where state law requires.
Year one
- The Superintendent publishes the prohibition in the student handbook and the staff handbook in August and documents the publication date.
- Building principals brief all staff on the prohibition and the restraint standard during the August in-service, with sign-in sheets kept.
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by September 30 the number of substantiated allegations in the prior school year, the action taken on each, and the figure submitted to the Civil Rights Data Collection.
- Human Resources applies discipline up to and including termination to any employee substantiated as having administered corporal punishment and records the outcome.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent repeats the August handbook publication and the September 30 Board report every year.
- The Director of Student Services reconciles the Civil Rights Data Collection count to building discipline logs each year before submission.
- The Board reviews the policy for consistency with state law every 1 to 3 years and whenever the legislature acts on corporal punishment.
| Measure | Number of instances of corporal punishment in the district, counted as substantiated allegations in the Superintendent's annual report and as the figure submitted to the Civil Rights Data Collection, reconciled to building discipline logs; plus presence of the written prohibition in both handbooks. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The most recent Civil Rights Data Collection corporal punishment count and the building discipline log count, reconciled, as of policy adoption; the written prohibition exists or does not. |
| Target | Zero instances of corporal punishment reported in the first full school year after adoption and every year after, with the reconciled count and the CRDC submission both at zero, and the prohibition published in both handbooks each August. |
| Benchmark | The indicator sets the benchmark at zero instances reported to the Civil Rights Data Collection. The entry gives no numeric target for behavioral or academic outcomes; the finding supports only the direction (no study shows ending corporal punishment increases misbehavior, and school corporal punishment is associated with worse externalizing behavior at r = 0.27, internalizing problems at r = 0.16 and school performance at r = -0.11). |
| Reported | The Superintendent's written report to the Board by September 30 each year, stating substantiated allegations, action taken on each, the CRDC figure and the reconciliation to building logs, with the handbook publication dates attached. |
Sources. Visser LN, van der Put CE, Assink M (2022). The association between school corporal punishment and child developmental outcomes: a meta-analytic review. Children 9(3):383. doi · Gershoff ET, Grogan-Kaylor A (2016). Spanking and child outcomes: old controversies and new meta-analyses. Journal of Family Psychology 30(4):453-469. doi · Gershoff ET, Sattler KMP, Holden GW (2019). School corporal punishment and its associations with achievement and adjustment. Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology 63:1-8. doi · Heekes SL, Kruger CB, Lester SN, Ward CL (2022). A systematic review of corporal punishment in schools: global prevalence and correlates. Trauma, Violence, and Abuse 23(1):52-72. doi · Gershoff ET (2017). School corporal punishment in global perspective: prevalence, outcomes, and efforts at intervention. Psychology, Health and Medicine 22(sup1):224-239. doi · Gershoff ET, Font SA (2016). Corporal punishment in U.S. public schools: prevalence, disparities in use, and status in state and federal policy. Social Policy Report 30(1):1-26. doi · Font SA, Cage J (2018). Dimensions of physical punishment and their associations with children's cognitive performance and school adjustment. Child Abuse and Neglect 75:29-40. doi · Elgar FJ, Donnelly PD, Michaelson V, et al. (2018). Corporal punishment bans and physical fighting in adolescents: an ecological study of 88 countries. BMJ Open 8(9):e021616. doi · Zolotor AJ, Puzia ME (2010). Bans against corporal punishment: a systematic review of the laws, changes in attitudes and behaviours. Child Abuse Review 19(4):229-247. doi · Allison MA, Beers N, Peterson JW, AAP Council on School Health (2023). Corporal punishment in schools. Pediatrics 152(3):e2023063284. doi · Sege RD, Siegel BS, AAP Council on Child Abuse and Neglect (2018). Effective discipline to raise healthy children. Pediatrics 142(6):e20183112. doi · US Department of Education, Office for Civil Rights (2023). Corporal Punishment in Public Schools (Focus on Student Discipline, Part 4 of 5), 2017-18 Civil Rights Data Collection. link · US Department of Education, Office for Civil Rights (2025). 2021-22 Civil Rights Data Collection: A First Look. link · Cardona MA (2023). Letter from the Secretary of Education to governors and chief state school officers calling for an end to corporal punishment in schools, March 24, 2023. link
○ SilentSocial-emotional learningno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Universal, sequenced social-emotional learning programs improve social-emotional skills, behavior and achievement: the 2011 meta-analysis of 213 programs found skills gains of 0.57 SD and an 11 percentile-point achievement gain in the 35 studies that measured it, follow-up effects persist at 0.13 to 0.33 SD six months to years later, and the 2023 meta-analysis of 424 studies with 575,361 students confirms positive effects across skills, behavior, climate and achievement. Effects are smaller in independent, at-scale trials than in developer-led efficacy trials and depend on implementation quality; some universal mental-health curricula have produced null or harmful results. (Skills +0.57 SD, achievement +0.27 SD (11 percentile points), conduct problems -0.22 SD, emotional distress -0.24 SD (Durlak 2011); follow-up academic +0.33 SD in the few studies measuring it (Taylor 2017); reading and math about +0.25 SD (Corcoran 2018); effects roughly halve in independent at-scale trials (Wigelsworth 2016).)
Mixed evidence. The 11 percentile-point figure comes from 35 of 213 studies, mostly developer-led, and Wigelsworth's 2016 meta-analysis found effects shrink substantially when trials are run independently and at scale. The largest independent UK trial of PATHS (45 schools, 4,516 children) found only small teacher-rated gains in social competence and nothing on academic outcomes, and effects of the 4Rs program in New York were modest after two years. Universal mental-health-flavored programs have failed outright: the MYRIAD mindfulness trial was null in 85 schools and a DBT-skills program worsened depression and anxiety. Program adoption without fidelity monitoring is the common failure mode; Durlak's SAFE criteria (sequenced, active, focused, explicit) and implementation quality moderate every meta-analytic estimate. SEL has also become politically contested in several states, and districts that cannot explain what is taught lose parent trust.
Standard. A sequenced, explicitly taught SEL program with an independent evidence rating is delivered in every grade K-12 at its designed dose, with annual implementation-fidelity checks, published scope and sequence for families, and annual measurement on the climate survey.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain.
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The Director of Curriculum inventories the SEL program in use at each grade K-12 and checks each against the CASEL SELect list and the What Works Clearinghouse ratings to identify grades with no program or a program without a moderate or strong evidence rating.
- The Director of Curriculum presents to the Board within 60 days a selection of candidate programs holding a CASEL SELect or What Works Clearinghouse moderate or strong rating for any grade lacking one, with the developer's specified dose and cost, including whether ESSA Title IV-A funds can cover it.
- The Director of Curriculum drafts the written family opt-out process and the website format for publishing the scope and sequence and lesson materials, and the Superintendent reviews it with district counsel against current state SEL law.
- Principals schedule the two annual fidelity observations per classroom on the school calendar and obtain the program developer's fidelity tool and fidelity threshold for each adopted program.
- The Director of Curriculum confirms with the Superintendent that the state climate survey or Panorama survey includes items on belonging, trusted adults and peer support and sets the administration date.
Year one
- The Director of Curriculum publishes the scope and sequence and lesson materials for every grade on the district website before the first day of school, together with the written opt-out process.
- Principals complete the first fidelity observation in every classroom by the end of the first semester and the second by the end of the year, and the Director of Curriculum provides coaching to each classroom below the fidelity threshold within 30 days of the observation.
- The Director of Curriculum collects the fidelity results, the climate survey results on belonging and trusted adults by school, and office discipline referrals and suspensions by school, and reports them to the Board by November 1.
- The Director of Curriculum trains all teachers new to the program in its delivery before they begin teaching it, at the dose and sequence the developer specifies.
Ongoing
- Principals complete two fidelity observations per classroom each year and the Director of Curriculum coaches any classroom below threshold within 30 days.
- The Director of Curriculum republishes the scope and sequence and lesson materials before the first day of school each year and reports to the Board by November 1 on program in use by grade, share of classrooms meeting the fidelity threshold, climate survey results by school, and discipline referrals by school.
- The Director of Curriculum rechecks each program's CASEL SELect or What Works Clearinghouse rating annually and brings any program that loses its rating to the Board for replacement.
| Measure | Share of grades K-12 using a program with a CASEL SELect or What Works Clearinghouse moderate or strong rating; share of classrooms meeting the program's fidelity threshold on observations; climate survey scores on belonging and trusted adults by school; office discipline referrals and suspensions by school. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Year-one inventory of programs by grade and the first round of fidelity observations, plus the first climate survey administration and the prior year's discipline referrals and suspensions by school. |
| Target | Every grade K-12 using a rated program within 1 year; the share of classrooms meeting the fidelity threshold rising each year from the year-one baseline; climate survey scores on belonging and trusted adults rising and discipline referrals and suspensions falling at each school within 1 to 3 years. |
| Benchmark | The research gives effect sizes, not an operational threshold: skills +0.57 SD, achievement +0.27 SD (11 percentile points), conduct problems -0.22 SD, emotional distress -0.24 SD in Durlak 2011, with effects roughly halving in independent at-scale trials (Wigelsworth 2016) and depending on implementation quality. No numeric fidelity or climate survey benchmark is given in the entry, so the target is directional against the district's own baseline. |
| Reported | The Director of Curriculum reports to the Board by November 1 each year the program in use at each grade, the share of classrooms meeting the fidelity threshold, climate survey results on belonging and trusted adults by school, and discipline referrals and suspensions by school, and posts the report on the district website alongside the published scope and sequence. |
Sources. Durlak JA, Weissberg RP, Dymnicki AB, Taylor RD, Schellinger KB (2011). The impact of enhancing students' social and emotional learning: A meta-analysis of school-based universal interventions. Child Development 82(1):405-432. doi · Taylor RD, Oberle E, Durlak JA, Weissberg RP (2017). Promoting positive youth development through school-based social and emotional learning interventions: A meta-analysis of follow-up effects. Child Development 88(4):1156-1171. doi · Durlak JA, Mahoney JL, Boyle AE (2022). What we know, and what we need to find out about universal, school-based social and emotional learning programs for children and adolescents: A review of meta-analyses and directions for future research. Psychological Bulletin 148(11-12):765-782. doi · Cipriano C, Strambler MJ, Naples LH, et al. (2023). The state of evidence for social and emotional learning: A contemporary meta-analysis of universal school-based SEL interventions. Child Development 94(5):1181-1204. doi · Corcoran RP, Cheung ACK, Kim E, Xie C (2018). Effective universal school-based social and emotional learning programs for improving academic achievement: A systematic review and meta-analysis of 50 years of research. Educational Research Review 25:56-72. doi · Wigelsworth M, Lendrum A, Oldfield J, Scott A, ten Bokkel I, Tate K, Emery C (2016). The impact of trial stage, developer involvement and international transferability on universal social and emotional learning programme outcomes: A meta-analysis. Cambridge Journal of Education 46(3):347-376. doi · Humphrey N, Barlow A, Wigelsworth M, et al. (2016). A cluster randomized controlled trial of the Promoting Alternative Thinking Strategies (PATHS) curriculum. Journal of School Psychology 58:73-89. doi · Jones SM, Brown JL, Aber JL (2011). Two-year impacts of a universal school-based social-emotional and literacy intervention: An experiment in translational developmental research. Child Development 82(2):533-554. doi · Kuyken W, Ball S, Crane C, et al. (2022). Effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of universal school-based mindfulness training compared with normal school provision in reducing risk of mental health problems and promoting well-being in adolescence: The MYRIAD cluster randomised controlled trial. Evidence-Based Mental Health 25(3):99-109. doi · Harvey LJ, White FA, Hunt C, Abbott M (2023). Investigating the efficacy of a Dialectical behaviour therapy-based universal intervention on adolescent social and emotional well-being outcomes. Behaviour Research and Therapy 169:104408. doi · Collaborative for Academic, Social, and Emotional Learning (CASEL). The CASEL framework and the CASEL Program Guide (SELect program ratings). link
○ SilentSchool climate measurementno governing section
Tier C: consistent correlational evidencestakes 3/5
Research. School climate is a medium-sized correlate of achievement (meta-analysis of 37 K-12 studies), buffers the achievement penalty of low socioeconomic status, and predicts adolescent mental health, engagement and graduation; within-school improvements in safety, leadership and academic expectations measured on New York City's annual survey track lower teacher turnover and higher achievement in a design the authors call consistent with causation. Climate is changeable: a cluster-randomized trial of schoolwide PBIS reduced office referrals by 33 percent. What the evidence does not show is that surveying alone changes anything; the survey is the instrument that makes the rest of the manual's climate commitments testable. (School climate to achievement: medium pooled correlation (37 studies); safety and expectations gains linked to achievement gains and lower teacher turnover within schools over time; climate intervention RCT: office referrals -33%; no direct effect estimated for the act of surveying.)
Mixed evidence. Nearly all climate-outcome evidence is correlational and most reviews say so; schools with high achievement may produce good climate reports rather than the reverse. Definitions and instruments vary widely, which inflates heterogeneity across studies. Self-report scales show reference bias and normative developmental declines after grade 6 that can be misread as a worsening school, so year-over-year comparisons need a fixed instrument and cohort-aware interpretation. Using climate scores for high-stakes accountability may distort responses; the CORE districts use them for improvement, not sanctions. Response rates below about 70 percent make school-level scores unreliable, and no study evaluates whether mandating a survey, by itself, improves outcomes.
Standard. The policy shall require a validated climate survey of students, staff and families every year, with a fixed instrument, a minimum response rate, results published by school and demographic group, and a requirement that each school improvement plan respond to its lowest climate domain.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain.
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The Director of Research and Accountability selects the ED School Climate Surveys or another instrument with published reliability and validity evidence and fixes the core items the district will keep for at least five consecutive years.
- The Superintendent sets the spring administration window for students in grades 3 through 12, all staff and all families, and issues each principal the 70 percent response rate requirement for students and staff.
- The district legal counsel reviews the student items against the Protection of Pupil Rights Amendment and the Director of Research and Accountability prepares the parent notice and opt-out form before any item on a protected topic is asked.
- The Director of Research and Accountability builds the reporting template that breaks results out by school, grade band, race, disability status, English learner status and gender, with fields for three-year trends and the links to chronic absenteeism, suspension rates and achievement.
Year one
- Each principal administers the survey in the spring, tracks daily completion and reaches at least 70 percent of enrolled students and staff before the window closes.
- The Director of Research and Accountability publishes the first results by August 31 and the relationship of climate scores to chronic absenteeism, suspension rates and achievement.
- Each principal names the school's lowest-scoring climate domain in the school improvement plan due October 1 and lists the actions and budget assigned to it.
- The Superintendent presents the district summary to the Board at a public meeting by October 31 and confirms that climate results have not been used as the sole basis for any personnel action.
Ongoing
- The Director of Research and Accountability repeats the survey each spring with the same core items and adds the new year to the three-year trend tables published by August 31.
- The Superintendent reviews each October which schools fell below the 70 percent response rate and which improvement plans failed to cite a climate finding, and reports both counts to the Board by October 31.
| Measure | Share of schools that reach a 70 percent response rate among students and staff, results published by school and demographic group by August 31, and the number of school improvement plans that name the lowest-scoring climate domain with assigned actions and budget |
|---|---|
| Baseline | No district climate survey administered under a fixed instrument; the first spring administration sets the baseline for domain scores by school and group |
| Target | In year one, every school reaches at least 70 percent of enrolled students and staff, results are published by August 31, and every school improvement plan submitted by October 1 cites its lowest-scoring climate domain; by year three, domain scores in safety, relationships, engagement and environment show a rising three-year trend at each school, with no demographic group falling |
| Benchmark | The entry gives a 70 percent response rate floor for students and staff; it gives no numeric benchmark for domain score gains and notes that surveying alone has no estimated direct effect, so the score target is directional |
| Reported | The Director of Research and Accountability publishes results by August 31 each year and the Superintendent presents the district summary to the Board at a public meeting by October 31, with the response rate by school and the count of improvement plans citing a climate finding |
Sources. Thapa A, Cohen J, Guffey S, Higgins-D'Alessandro A (2013). A review of school climate research. Review of Educational Research 83(3):357-385. doi · Wang MT, Degol JL (2016). School climate: a review of the construct, measurement, and impact on student outcomes. Educational Psychology Review 28(2):315-352. doi · Erdem C, Kaya M (2024). The relationship between school and classroom climate, and academic achievement: a meta-analysis. School Psychology International 45(4):380-408. doi · Berkowitz R, Moore H, Astor RA, Benbenishty R (2017). A research synthesis of the associations between socioeconomic background, inequality, school climate, and academic achievement. Review of Educational Research 87(2):425-469. doi · Aldridge JM, McChesney K (2018). The relationships between school climate and adolescent mental health and wellbeing: a systematic literature review. International Journal of Educational Research 88:121-145. doi · Kraft MA, Marinell WH, Yee DS (2016). School organizational contexts, teacher turnover, and student achievement: evidence from panel data. American Educational Research Journal 53(5):1411-1449. doi · Konold T, Cornell D, Jia Y, Malone M (2018). School climate, student engagement, and academic achievement: a latent variable, multilevel multi-informant examination. AERA Open 4(4). doi · Daily SM, Mann MJ, Kristjansson AL, Smith ML, Zullig KJ (2019). School climate and academic achievement in middle and high school students. Journal of School Health 89(3):173-180. doi · Bradshaw CP, Waasdorp TE, Leaf PJ (2012). Effects of school-wide positive behavioral interventions and supports on child behavior problems. Pediatrics 130(5):e1136-e1145. doi · West MR, Pier L, Fricke H, Hough H, Loeb S, Meyer RH, Rice AB (2020). Trends in student social-emotional learning: evidence from the first large-scale panel student survey. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 42(2):279-303. doi · Duckworth AL, Yeager DS (2015). Measurement matters: assessing personal qualities other than cognitive ability for educational purposes. Educational Researcher 44(4):237-251. doi · National Center for Education Statistics. ED School Climate Surveys (EDSCLS). link
Safety
○ SilentLockdown and active shooter drillsno governing section
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Announced, procedure-only lockdown drills paired with training raise students' and staff's sense of preparedness and correct execution (classroom procedural accuracy up 27 percentage points after training) without raising measured anxiety, and students in one district reported less fear and lower perceived risk after drills. High-intensity simulations with actors, gunfire or deception are a different intervention: a 114-school interrupted time series of 54 million social media posts found anxiety and stress up 42 percent and depression up 39 percent after active shooter drills, and the American Academy of Pediatrics calls for ending children's participation in high-intensity drills and prohibiting deception. (Procedure-only drills with training: preparedness up, lockdown accuracy +27 points, state anxiety not higher (one study lower) post-drill; simulation-style drills: anxiety and stress +42%, depression +39% in community social media after drills; 60% of youth in a national text poll say drills make them feel scared and hopeless.)
Mixed evidence. No randomized or controlled comparison of drill types exists; the preparedness and anxiety findings come from pre-post surveys without control groups, mostly from one research team (Schildkraut and Nickerson) in one large urban district and one rural high school. The Everytown and Georgia Tech social media study cannot separate the effect of the drill from news coverage or the type of drill, and was funded by an advocacy organization. Avoidance behaviors increased after drills even as fear fell. No study shows that drills reduce deaths; the real-event analysis of lockdowns is descriptive. Younger children, students with disabilities and students with trauma histories are under-studied, and the effects of monthly drill frequencies mandated in some states are unknown.
Standard. The policy shall require lockdown drills to be announced in advance to staff, students and families, to teach the procedure without simulated gunfire, actors, props or deception, to be developmentally adjusted and accommodate students with disabilities and trauma histories, to include a debrief, and to be observed and reported annually; student participation in any high-intensity simulation shall be prohibited.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (safety)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Safety confirms the district's current state drill statute (for example New York Education Law 807, New Jersey monthly security drills, Florida Statutes 1006.07(4)) and sets the annual lockdown drill frequency for each school in writing.
- The Director of Safety and the Superintendent cancel any scheduled drill that uses simulated gunfire, weapons, actors posing as attackers, theatrical injuries or statements that the event is real, and notify principals in writing that student participation in such simulations is prohibited.
- The Director of Safety issues a one-page announced-drill protocol covering the one-school-day advance notice to staff, students and families, the immediate pre-drill announcement, the procedural checklist for administrator observation, and the same-day classroom debrief.
- Each building administrator and school counselor identify students with disabilities, students with known trauma histories and students in pre-kindergarten through grade 2 and record the accommodations set in advance for each group, along with the parent excusal process.
- The Director of Safety adds drill-related perceived-preparedness and anxiety items to the annual climate survey and sets up a log of counseling contacts in the week following each drill.
Year one
- Each school conducts every required lockdown drill under the announced, procedure-only protocol, with an administrator completing the procedural checklist and the classroom debrief held the same day.
- The Director of Safety delivers staff training on the lockdown procedure in every school before the first drill of the year, since training is what moved procedural accuracy in the evidence.
- Building administrators confirm parent notification before every drill and document the date of notice and any parent excusals.
- The Director of Safety reports to the Board by June 30 the number, type and date of drills in each school, procedural accuracy results, counseling contacts in the week after each drill, and the drill-related climate survey items.
Ongoing
- The Director of Safety reports annually to the Board by June 30 on drill counts and type, procedural accuracy, post-drill counseling contacts and climate survey drill items.
- The Director of Safety and the Superintendent recheck the state drill statute each year and amend the required frequency or conduct rules within 90 days of any change.
- Building administrators and school counselors update the accommodation lists for students with disabilities, trauma histories and grades pre-kindergarten through 2 at the start of each school year.
| Measure | Share of drills that are announced and procedure-only; share of observed classrooms executing the lockdown procedure correctly; drill-related preparedness and anxiety items on the annual climate survey; counseling contacts in the week after each drill; parent notification compliance. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Year-one counts from the Director of Safety's first June 30 report: number and type of drills per school, first-year procedural accuracy, first-year climate survey drill items and post-drill counseling contacts, and the share of drills with documented parent notice. |
| Target | Within one year, 100 percent of drills in which students participate are announced, procedure-only and preceded by parent notification, with zero simulation-style drills; from year one to year three, the share of classrooms executing the procedure correctly rises each year while drill-related anxiety items on the climate survey do not rise and post-drill counseling contacts do not increase. |
| Benchmark | The evidence reports a 27 percentage point gain in classroom procedural accuracy after training with procedure-only drills and no rise in state anxiety; it gives no fixed accuracy threshold, so the accuracy target is directional. The 42 percent anxiety and 39 percent depression increases describe simulation-style drills the policy prohibits and serve only as the harm to avoid. |
| Reported | Annual report from the Director of Safety to the Board by June 30, with drill counts and types by school, procedural checklist results, post-drill counseling contacts, climate survey drill items and parent notification compliance. |
Sources. ElSherief M, Saha K, Gupta P, Mishra S, Seybolt J, Xie J, O'Toole M, Burd-Sharps S, De Choudhury M (2021). Impacts of school shooter drills on the psychological well-being of American K-12 school communities: a social media study. Humanities and Social Sciences Communications 8:315. doi · Everytown for Gun Safety Support Fund, American Federation of Teachers, National Education Association (2020, updated 2024). The Impact of Active Shooter Drills in Schools. link · Schildkraut J, Nickerson AB (2020). Ready to respond: effects of lockdown drills and training on school emergency preparedness. Victims and Offenders 15(5):619-638. doi · Schildkraut J, Nickerson AB (2022). Effects of lockdown drills on students' fear, perceived risk, and use of avoidance behaviors: a quasi-experimental study. Criminal Justice Policy Review 33(8):787-813. doi · Nickerson AB, Schildkraut J (2021). State anxiety prior to and after participating in lockdown drills among students in a rural high school. School Psychology Review 53(6):619-631. doi · Schildkraut J, Nickerson AB, Ristoff T (2020). Locks, lights, out of sight: assessing students' perceptions of emergency preparedness across multiple lockdown drills. Journal of School Violence 19(1):93-106. doi · Schildkraut J, Greene-Colozzi E, Nickerson AB, Florczykowski A (2023). Can school lockdowns save lives? An assessment of drills and use in real-world events. Journal of School Violence 22(2):167-182. doi · Zhe EJ, Nickerson AB (2007). Effects of an intruder crisis drill on children's knowledge, anxiety, and perceptions of school safety. School Psychology Review 36(3):501-508. doi · Dickson MJ, Vargo KK (2017). Training kindergarten students lockdown drill procedures using behavioral skills training. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis 50(2):407-412. doi · Huskey MG, Connell NM (2021). Preparation or provocation? Student perceptions of active shooter drills. Criminal Justice Policy Review 32(1):3-26. doi · Moore-Petinak N, Waselewski M, Patterson BA, Chang T (2020). Active shooter drills in the United States: a national study of youth experiences and perceptions. Journal of Adolescent Health 67(4):509-513. doi · Schonfeld DJ, Rossen E, Woodard D, et al., American Academy of Pediatrics Council on Injury, Violence, and Poison Prevention and Council on School Health (2020). Participation of children and adolescents in live crisis drills and exercises. Pediatrics 146(3):e2020015503. doi · National Association of School Psychologists, National Association of School Resource Officers, Safe and Sound Schools (2021). Best Practice Considerations for Armed Assailant Drills in Schools. link
◐ Partial 0/5Behavioral threat assessment236.1 Threat Assessment
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 4/5
Research. Schools that use the Comprehensive School Threat Assessment Guidelines (CSTAG, formerly the Virginia guidelines) resolve student threats with far less exclusion: in a randomized trial, threatened students in CSTAG schools were about one third as likely to receive a long-term suspension (OR 0.35) and four times as likely to receive counseling, and statewide Virginia comparisons show lower odds of suspension (OR 0.59) and law-enforcement action (OR 0.47) than under generic threat procedures, with almost no threats carried out and no racial disparity in outcomes among assessed students. (Long-term suspension OR 0.35 and alternative placement OR 0.13 (RCT); suspension OR 0.59, police action OR 0.47 versus generic approaches (statewide); about 1 in 100 threats attempted; no Black-White gap in suspension among assessed students.)
Mixed evidence. Nearly all outcome research comes from the model's developer (Cornell and colleagues at the University of Virginia), who has a financial interest in CSTAG training. The single RCT is small (201 students in 40 schools) and measures disciplinary responses, not whether violence was prevented; no study can show that threat assessment reduces attacks because attacks are rare. In Florida's statewide data, Black students are over-referred for threat assessment relative to enrollment even though outcomes after referral show smaller disparities than general discipline, so parity after referral does not mean parity in who gets referred. Students receiving special education were about a third of Virginia cases, well above their enrollment share. Teams that are poorly trained reclassify transient threats as substantive and the exclusion benefit disappears; fidelity predicted lower suspension in the RCT.
Standard. The policy shall establish a multidisciplinary threat assessment team at every school using a named, evidence-based model (CSTAG or equivalent), require initial and refresher training for every team member, require that the team's default response is support and supervision rather than exclusion, and require annual reporting of case counts, outcomes and demographic referral rates to the Board.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual, 1 partly.
- ✕The policy requires that the threat assessment team's default response is support and supervision rather than exclusion. core
- ✕The policy establishes a multidisciplinary threat assessment team at every school.
- ✕The policy names an evidence-based threat assessment model, such as CSTAG or an equivalent, that the teams use.
- ◐The policy requires initial and refresher training for every threat assessment team member. partly, 236.1 Threat Assessment
- ✕The policy requires annual reporting to the Board of case counts, outcomes and demographic referral rates.
What the manual says. 236.1 Threat Assessment, revised September 23, 2024:
Recommended. Amend 236.1 Threat Assessment
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent designates the Director of Student Services as the district threat assessment coordinator and names the three required members (administrator, counselor or psychologist, and law-enforcement liaison) for every school's team within 30 days.
- The Director of Student Services contracts CSTAG or an equivalent model with published controlled evaluation and schedules initial training so every team member completes it before serving.
- The Director of Student Services builds the training roster and a case log that records, for each threat, the transient or substantive classification, the support and supervision plan, and every disciplinary, law-enforcement and counseling outcome.
- The Director of Student Services, with district counsel, issues written guidance to principals that opening an assessment is not by itself grounds for out-of-school suspension, expulsion or police referral, and that IDEA manifestation determination applies to any change of placement for a student with a disability.
- Each principal briefs staff and families on how to report a concern and what a threat assessment is, within 90 days.
Year one
- Each school team classifies every reported threat as transient or substantive and the Director of Student Services spot-checks that every substantive case has a written support and supervision plan within 180 days.
- The Director of Student Services computes referral rates per 1,000 students by race, disability status and gender against enrollment for each school and flags any school whose rate departs from its enrollment share.
- The Superintendent delivers the first annual report to the Board by September 30 with assessment counts by school, transient and substantive counts, outcomes, demographic referral rates and any threat later carried out.
- The Director of Student Services confirms 100 percent of team members hold current initial training by the end of year one and records the date each refresher falls due.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by September 30 each year and the Board reviews the demographic referral rates and outcome shares in open session.
- The Director of Student Services keeps every team member on a refresher cycle of no more than three years and replaces departing members before a team operates short.
- The Director of Student Services reviews any assessed threat later carried out as a case study and reports corrective steps to the Board within 90 days.
| Measure | Share of assessed students who received out-of-school suspension, expulsion, alternative placement or law-enforcement referral versus the share who received counseling and a support plan, and the referral rate per 1,000 students by race, disability status and gender compared with enrollment. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First-year September 30 report: count of assessments by school, the transient versus substantive split, outcome shares, demographic referral rates, team training completion, and any threat carried out. |
| Target | Within 1 to 3 years, the share of assessed students receiving counseling and a support plan rises each year while the share receiving out-of-school suspension, expulsion, alternative placement or law-enforcement referral falls each year; every substantive case has a written plan; team training completion is 100 percent; the referral rate by race, disability status and gender matches enrollment with no group gap; and assessed threats later carried out stay near the published level of about 1 in 100 or below. |
| Benchmark | CSTAG schools in a randomized trial showed long-term suspension OR 0.35 and alternative placement OR 0.13 compared with controls, and statewide Virginia comparisons showed suspension OR 0.59 and police action OR 0.47 versus generic procedures, with about 1 in 100 threats attempted and no Black-White suspension gap among assessed students; the entry gives no district-level numeric target, so the target is directional. |
| Reported | Superintendent to the Board by September 30 each year, as the clause requires, with a one-page comparison to the prior year and to the published CSTAG figures. |
Sources. Cornell DG, Allen K, Fan X (2012). A randomized controlled study of the Virginia Student Threat Assessment Guidelines in kindergarten through grade 12. School Psychology Review 41(1):100-115. doi · Maeng JL, Cornell DG, Huang FL (2020). Student threat assessment as an alternative to exclusionary discipline. Journal of School Violence 19(3):377-388. doi · Cornell D, Maeng JL, Burnette AG, Jia Y, Huang F, Konold T, Datta P, Malone M, Meyer P (2018). Student threat assessment as a standard school safety practice: results from a statewide implementation study. School Psychology Quarterly 33(2):213-222. doi · Cornell D, Maeng J, Huang F, Shukla K, Konold T (2018). Racial/ethnic parity in disciplinary consequences using student threat assessment. School Psychology Review 47(2):183-195. doi · Maeng JL, Cornell DG, Edwards K (2024). Threat assessment and disparities in school discipline. Journal of Threat Assessment and Management 11(3):186-196. doi · Nekvasil EK, Cornell DG (2015). Student threat assessment associated with safety in middle schools. Journal of Threat Assessment and Management 2(2):98-113. doi · Cornell DG, Sheras PL, Gregory A, Fan X (2009). A retrospective study of school safety conditions in high schools using the Virginia Threat Assessment Guidelines versus alternative approaches. School Psychology Quarterly 24(2):119-129. doi · Burnette AG, Datta P, Cornell D (2018). The distinction between transient and substantive student threats. Journal of Threat Assessment and Management 5(1):4-20. doi · US Secret Service National Threat Assessment Center (2019). Protecting America's Schools: A U.S. Secret Service Analysis of Targeted School Violence. link
◐ Partial 1/5School resource officers and school policing805.3 Use of Force
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 4/5
Research. The strongest causal studies agree that placing police in schools increases suspensions, expulsions, police referrals and arrests, with the largest increases for Black students, male students and students with disabilities; a Texas quasi-experiment ties federal school-police grants to a 6 percent rise in middle school discipline, a 2.5 percent drop in high school graduation and a 4 percent drop in college enrollment. Safety effects are mixed: a national regression discontinuity finds SROs reduce some violence but not gun incidents, while a matched COPS-grant study finds no safety gain and more recorded drug and weapon offenses. (Discipline +6% (Texas); graduation -2.5%, college enrollment -4%; exclusionary discipline rate ratio 1.21 (meta-analysis); suspensions, referrals and arrests up with largest effects for Black students and students with disabilities; some non-gun violence down (RD), gun incidents unchanged.)
Mixed evidence. Sorensen et al. 2023 find real reductions in some forms of in-school violence, and Owens 2017 finds SROs improve measured safety and help police make drug arrests, so the claim that SROs do nothing for safety is not supported. Much of the recorded-offense increase may be detection and reporting rather than more misbehavior. Several studies identify effects off federal COPS grants, which may not generalize to districts that fund officers locally. The 2023 Campbell review found no true experiments and high heterogeneity, with the direction of effects depending on how officers are used; surveys show many students and staff feel safer with an officer present. Officer role (law enforcement only versus mixed mentoring role) changes recording and referral behavior, which is why the MOU, not the headcount, is the policy lever.
Standard. If the district places law-enforcement officers in schools, the policy shall require a written memorandum of understanding that bars officer involvement in routine discipline, defines the narrow conditions for arrest or referral, requires youth-specific training, and requires annual public reporting of arrests, referrals and use of force by school and demographic group; the Board shall review the data before renewing any officer assignment.
Checklist. 1 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires a written memorandum of understanding that bars officer involvement in routine student discipline. core
- ✕The policy requires the memorandum of understanding to define the narrow conditions under which an officer may arrest or refer a student.
- ✓The policy requires officers placed in schools to complete youth-specific training. 805.3 Use of Force
- ✕The policy requires annual public reporting of arrests, referrals and use of force by school and demographic group.
- ✕The policy requires the Board to review the reported data before renewing any officer assignment.
What the manual says. 805.3 Use of Force, revised February 27, 2023:
Also governs: 805.2 School Security Personnel; 225 Students and the Police
Recommended. Amend 805.2 School Security Personnel
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent and district counsel draft the memorandum of understanding with the law-enforcement agency, including the bar on code-of-conduct enforcement, the narrow arrest and referral conditions, the administrator-present and parent-notification rule for questioning, and the annual review date, and present it to the Board within 90 days.
- The Director of Safety pulls the district's most recent Civil Rights Data Collection submission on school-related arrests and law-enforcement referrals, adds citations and use-of-force counts from agency records, and files it with the Board as the baseline, disaggregated by school, race, disability status and gender.
- The Director of Safety arranges and documents completion of adolescent development, de-escalation, disability awareness and implicit bias training for every officer currently assigned, before any officer continues under the new memorandum.
- Each principal and the Director of Safety issue written guidance to school staff stating which behaviors are handled by school staff and may not be referred to an officer, and brief staff at a faculty meeting within 60 days.
- The Superintendent adds student and staff perceived-safety items and a question about officer interactions to the annual climate survey instrument.
Year one
- The Director of Safety builds a single incident log that records every arrest, citation, law-enforcement referral and use of force by school, date, student demographic group and whether the underlying conduct was criminal or a code-of-conduct matter, and reviews it with principals each quarter.
- The Superintendent delivers the first annual report to the Board by October 15 and publishes it on the district website, with the share of referrals arising from non-criminal conduct and out-of-school suspension rates by school.
- The Board holds a public review of the report and the baseline before voting on renewal of each officer assignment, and records in the minutes the data it relied on.
- District counsel and the Director of Safety establish a complaint channel for students and families regarding officer conduct and report complaint counts in the annual report.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 15 each year and the Board reviews the data before renewing any memorandum or officer assignment.
- The Director of Safety documents annual refresher training for every assigned officer and confirms the memorandum is re-signed by both parties each year.
- The Director of Safety reconciles the district incident log against the Civil Rights Data Collection submission each reporting cycle so the public figures match the federal filing.
| Measure | Annual counts and rates per 1,000 students of school-based arrests, citations, law-enforcement referrals and uses of force, by school and by race, disability status and gender; share of referrals arising from non-criminal code-of-conduct matters; out-of-school suspension rate by school; perceived-safety items on the climate survey; complaints against officers. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The district's most recent Civil Rights Data Collection submission of school-related arrests and law-enforcement referrals, supplemented by agency records for citations and use of force, filed with the Board within the first 90 days and disaggregated by school and demographic group. |
| Target | Within 1 year of adoption, the share of law-enforcement referrals arising from non-criminal code-of-conduct matters falls from baseline and continues to fall each year; within 3 years, arrest and referral rates per 1,000 students decline from baseline overall and for Black students, male students and students with disabilities, with the gap between those groups and the district rate narrowing each year, while perceived-safety items do not decline. |
| Benchmark | The research reports effect sizes for officer presence (discipline up 6 percent, graduation down 2.5 percent, college enrollment down 4 percent, exclusionary discipline rate ratio 1.21) but gives no numeric standard for an acceptable arrest or referral rate, so the target is directional against the district's own baseline and against the Civil Rights Data Collection figures for comparable districts. |
| Reported | The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 15 each year and publishes the report on the district website; the Board reviews it in a public meeting before voting on renewal of any officer assignment or memorandum of understanding. |
Sources. Sorensen LC, Avila-Acosta M, Engberg JB, Bushway SD (2023). The thin blue line in schools: new evidence on school-based policing across the U.S. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 42(4):941-970. doi · Gottfredson DC, Crosse S, Tang Z, Bauer EL, Harmon MA, Hagen CA, Greene AD (2020). Effects of school resource officers on school crime and responses to school crime. Criminology and Public Policy 19(3):905-940. doi · Weisburst EK (2019). Patrolling public schools: the impact of funding for school police on student discipline and long-term education outcomes. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 38(2):338-365. doi · Owens EG (2017). Testing the school-to-prison pipeline. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 36(1):11-37. doi · Fisher BW, Hennessy EA (2016). School resource officers and exclusionary discipline in U.S. high schools: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Adolescent Research Review 1(3):217-233. doi · Fisher BW, Petrosino A, Sutherland H, Guckenburg S, Fronius T, Benitez I, Earl K (2023). School-based law enforcement strategies to reduce crime, increase perceptions of safety, and improve learning outcomes in primary and secondary schools: a systematic review. Campbell Systematic Reviews 19(4):e1360. doi · Na C, Gottfredson DC (2013). Police officers in schools: effects on school crime and the processing of offending behaviors. Justice Quarterly 30(4):619-650. doi · Devlin DN, Gottfredson DC (2018). The roles of police officers in schools: effects on the recording and reporting of crime. Youth Violence and Juvenile Justice 16(2):208-223. doi · Peterson J, Densley J, Erickson G (2021). Presence of armed school officials and fatal and nonfatal gunshot injuries during mass school shootings, United States, 1980-2019. JAMA Network Open 4(2):e2037394. doi · Livingston MD, Rossheim ME, Hall KS (2019). A descriptive analysis of school and school shooter characteristics and the severity of school shootings in the United States, 1999-2018. Journal of Adolescent Health 64(6):797-799. doi
◐ Partial 1/6Hazing and athletics safety247 Hazing
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Hazing is common in high school (48 percent of students in groups report hazing activities, 17 percent of grade 6 to 12 athletes in one survey, and only 14 percent of hazed students call it hazing), but no controlled study shows that any hazing policy or program reduces hazing; the evidence supports clear definitions, mandatory reporting and consent-does-not-matter language as a standard. For concussion, state remove-from-play and return-to-play laws produced a rise in reported concussions (better identification) followed by falling recurrent-concussion rates about 2.6 years after passage, and mandated preseason heat-acclimatization rules cut exertional heat illness in football by roughly half. (Hazing: prevalence 17% (athletes) to 48% (all group members); no measured program effect. Concussion laws: reported concussions up (reporting 47% to 71%), recurrent concussion rate declining 2.6 years post-law; incident rate trend reversed from +1.85% to -1.08% per month. Heat rules: exertional heat illness IRR about 0.45 (95% CI 0.23 to 0.87).)
Mixed evidence. The hazing half of this domain is tier D: prevalence surveys are old (Alfred 2000, Hazing in View 2008, Gershel 2003) and self-reported, and the only published high school prevention evaluation is a two-school pilot that measured knowledge, not behavior. For concussion laws, all evaluations are ecological interrupted time series; the initial rise in reported concussions is almost certainly detection, and the later decline in new concussions could partly reflect reporting fatigue rather than prevention. Laws do not include prevention components (contact limits), and recurrent-concussion declines were larger but not statistically significant in states that named the clearing provider. Emergency action plans, athletic trainer coverage and sudden cardiac arrest protocols rest on professional-body standards (NATA, Korey Stringer Institute) with policy rankings rather than outcome trials.
Standard. The policy shall define hazing by listed behaviors regardless of consent, require every coach, sponsor and student participant to receive annual training, require coaches to report suspected hazing to the principal within 24 hours, and require immediate removal from play after a suspected concussion with written clearance by a licensed health care provider, a preseason heat-acclimatization schedule, and a venue-specific emergency action plan rehearsed annually.
Checklist. 1 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✓The policy defines hazing by listed behaviors and states that the definition applies regardless of the participant's consent. core 247 Hazing
- ✕The policy requires every coach, sponsor and student participant to receive annual hazing training.
- ✕The policy requires coaches to report suspected hazing to the principal within 24 hours.
- ✕The policy requires immediate removal from play after a suspected concussion, with return permitted only on written clearance by a licensed health care provider.
- ✕The policy requires a preseason heat-acclimatization schedule.
- ✕The policy requires a venue-specific emergency action plan that is rehearsed annually.
What the manual says. 247 Hazing, revised June 13, 2016:
Recommended. Amend 247 Hazing
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Athletic Director drafts the hazing definition, 24-hour coach reporting rule, consent-does-not-matter language and remove-from-play standard into administrative regulations and brings them to the Board for adoption within 60 days.
- The Athletic Director inventories every athletic venue and records which have a written venue-specific emergency action plan and an AED reachable within three minutes, reporting gaps to the Superintendent within 90 days.
- The school nurse and Athletic Director select a licensed-provider concussion clearance form and a graduated return-to-learn template and distribute them to every building within 90 days.
- The Superintendent assigns the Athletic Director and principals to confirm each coach and activity sponsor has completed hazing-prevention training before the next season begins.
- The Athletic Director sets up the athletic trainer injury log to record concussions per 1,000 athlete-exposures, documented written clearance and days to return, starting with the current season.
Year one
- Each principal collects a signed hazing and concussion acknowledgment from every student athlete and parent before the first practice of each season.
- The Athletic Director schedules and documents a rehearsal of each venue's emergency action plan with local EMS in August and records the date by venue.
- Every head coach runs preseason practices on the National Athletic Trainers' Association heat-acclimatization schedule, and the Athletic Director audits practice plans for compliance.
- The Superintendent adds a climate-survey item on initiation experiences in teams and groups and administers it to students in grades 6 to 12 within the first year.
Ongoing
- The Athletic Director reports to the Board by July 31 each year the hazing reports and substantiated cases by activity, concussions and serious injuries by sport, return-to-play clearance compliance, and emergency action plan rehearsal dates by venue.
- Each principal reports every hazing case to the Superintendent within three school days and confirms annual training completion for coaches, sponsors and student participants before each season.
- The Athletic Director reviews athletic trainer coverage by sport each year and recommends to the Superintendent any changes needed to maintain injury logging and immediate removal from play.
| Measure | Share of coaches, sponsors and student participants with current hazing training; hazing reports and substantiated cases per season by team or group; climate-survey item on initiation experiences; concussions per 1,000 athlete-exposures and share with documented written clearance before return; exertional heat illness and cardiac events per season; share of venues with a rehearsed emergency action plan and an AED within three minutes. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Set in year one from the first season of athletic trainer injury logs, the first climate survey, the training roster, and the venue inventory; the district has no prior hazing or concussion counts of its own. |
| Target | Within 1 year, 100 percent of coaches and sponsors trained before the season, 100 percent of venues with a rehearsed emergency action plan and an AED within three minutes, and 100 percent of concussion returns with documented written clearance. Reported concussions and hazing reports are expected to rise in the first 1 to 2 years as identification improves; within 3 years, the recurrent-concussion rate and exertional heat illness count per season should decline from the year-one baseline, consistent with the 2.6-year post-law decline and the roughly 0.45 incidence rate ratio seen for heat rules. |
| Benchmark | Hazing: national prevalence of 17 percent of grade 6 to 12 athletes and 48 percent of students in groups, with only 14 percent of hazed students calling it hazing; no controlled study gives a program-effect benchmark, so the hazing target is directional. Concussion: state laws raised reporting from 47 to 71 percent and reversed the incident trend from +1.85 to -1.08 percent per month, with recurrent concussions falling about 2.6 years after passage. Heat: mandated acclimatization cut exertional heat illness in football by about half (IRR 0.45, 95 percent CI 0.23 to 0.87). |
| Reported | Athletic Director to the Board by July 31 each year, with the Superintendent presenting the climate-survey initiation item and any substantiated hazing cases in the same report. |
Sources. Hoover NC, Pollard NJ (2000). Initiation Rites in American High Schools: A National Survey. Alfred University. link · Allan EJ, Madden M (2008). Hazing in View: College Students at Risk. University of Maine. link · Allan EJ, Madden M (2012). The nature and extent of college student hazing. International Journal of Adolescent Medicine and Health 24(1):83-90. doi · Gershel JC, Katz-Sidlow RJ, Small E, Zandieh S (2003). Hazing of suburban middle school and high school athletes. Journal of Adolescent Health 32(5):333-335. doi · Diamond AB, Callahan ST, Chain KF, Solomon GS (2016). Qualitative review of hazing in collegiate and school sports: consequences from a lack of culture, knowledge and responsiveness. British Journal of Sports Medicine 50(3):149-153. doi · Hakkola L, Allan EJ, Kerschner D (2019). Applying utilization-focused evaluation to high school hazing prevention: a pilot intervention. Evaluation and Program Planning 75:61-68. doi · Yang J, Comstock RD, Yi H, Harvey HH, Xun P (2017). New and recurrent concussions in high-school athletes before and after traumatic brain injury laws, 2005-2016. American Journal of Public Health 107(12):1916-1922. doi · Arakkal AT, Baron AE, Lamb MM, Fields SK, Comstock RD (2020). Evaluating the effectiveness of traumatic brain injury state laws among high school athletes. Injury Epidemiology 7:12. doi · Gibson TB, Herring SA, Kutcher JS, Broglio SP (2015). Analyzing the effect of state legislation on health care utilization for children with concussion. JAMA Pediatrics 169(2):163-168. doi · Bompadre V, Jinguji TM, Yanez ND, Satchell EK, Gilbert K, Burton M, Conrad EU, Herring SA (2014). Washington State's Lystedt Law in concussion documentation in Seattle public high schools. Journal of Athletic Training 49(4):486-492. doi · LaRoche AA, Nelson LD, Connelly PK, Walter KD, McCrea MA (2016). Sport-related concussion reporting and state legislative effects. Clinical Journal of Sport Medicine 26(1):33-39. doi · Harvey HH (2013). Reducing traumatic brain injuries in youth sports: youth sports traumatic brain injury state laws, January 2009-December 2012. American Journal of Public Health 103(7):1249-1254. doi · Kerr ZY, Register-Mihalik JK, Pryor RR, Pierpoint LA, Scarneo SE, Adams WM, Kucera KL, Casa DJ, Marshall SW (2019). The association between mandated preseason heat acclimatization guidelines and exertional heat illness during preseason high school American football practices. Environmental Health Perspectives 127(4):047003. doi · Adams WM, Scarneo SE, Casa DJ (2017). State-level implementation of health and safety policies to prevent sudden death and catastrophic injuries within secondary school athletics. Orthopaedic Journal of Sports Medicine 5(9):2325967117727262. doi
Health and wellbeing
◐ Partial 0/6School-based mental health, counseling and suicide prevention820 Suicide Awareness, Prevention, & Response
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 4/5
Research. Mental health services delivered in school by school staff reduce student mental health problems (Hedges g = 0.39 across 43 controlled trials with 49,941 elementary students; g = 0.76 for targeted services), and placing licensed clinicians in schools raised treatment use 8 percent and cut self-reported suicide attempts about 15 percent across 263 Minnesota schools. Counselors have causal effects: an additional counselor reduces disciplinary incidents and raises achievement (Carrell and Hoekstra), individual counselors move graduation and college attendance as much as teachers do (Mulhern), and one more high school counselor raises four-year college enrollment by up to 10 points in a regression-discontinuity design. Universal suicide prevention programs that teach help-seeking (YAM in the SEYLE trial, SOS) roughly halve new suicide attempts, but the largest Sources of Strength trial found no overall reduction and harm where fidelity was poor. (Services: g = 0.39 overall, 0.76 targeted; in-school clinicians: treatment use +8%, suicide attempts -15%; counselors: fewer disciplinary incidents and higher attainment, effects comparable to teacher effects; YAM: new suicide attempts and severe ideation about -50% at 12 months; Sources of Strength: no overall effect on attempts across 40 schools.)
Mixed evidence. The ASCA 250:1 ratio is a professional benchmark, not a research finding: the 2021 meta-analysis found only a small negative effect of higher ratios with serious design bias in the underlying studies, and ratio evidence does not say which staff or services matter. Universal programs can backfire: the MYRIAD trial (85 UK schools) found no benefit from school mindfulness training, a 1,071-student DBT-skills program (WISE Teens) worsened depression (d = -0.22) and anxiety (d = -0.28), and in the 40-school Sources of Strength trial poorly implemented schools saw more new suicide attempts among 9th graders than controls. The Minnesota suicide-attempt result is self-reported and the suspension result there is weaker. Counselor effects vary widely between individuals (Mulhern), so headcount alone does not guarantee results. Universal screening finds more students with depression but creates a referral load the district must be able to meet.
Standard. Every school meets or has a funded plan to reach 250 students per counselor, 500 per school psychologist and 250 per school social worker; every school has a licensed mental health clinician on site at least weekly through district staff or a community partner; secondary students are screened annually for depression with parental consent and a same-week referral pathway; every secondary school runs an evidence-based suicide prevention program with annual fidelity monitoring and a written postvention protocol.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires every school to meet, or have a funded plan to reach, 250 students per counselor, 500 per school psychologist and 250 per school social worker. core
- ✕The policy requires every school to have a licensed mental health clinician on site at least weekly through district staff or a community partner.
- ✕The policy requires secondary students to be screened annually for depression with parental consent.
- ✕The policy provides a same-week referral pathway for students identified through depression screening.
- ✕The policy requires every secondary school to run an evidence-based suicide prevention program with annual fidelity monitoring.
- ✕The policy requires every secondary school to have a written postvention protocol.
What the manual says. 820 Suicide Awareness, Prevention, & Response, revised August 10, 2015:
Also governs: 146 Student Services; 238 Student Assistance Program
Recommended. Amend 820 Suicide Awareness, Prevention, & Response
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Student Services pulls the October 1 enrollment and the staffing roster and computes students per counselor, school psychologist and school social worker for every building against the 250, 500 and 250 standards.
- The Director of Student Services surveys each building for whether a licensed mental health clinician is on site at least one day each week and lists the schools without one.
- The Superintendent opens talks with community mental health providers and the state Medicaid agency on contracted on-site clinicians and school Medicaid billing under the 2023 CMS guidance.
- Each secondary principal reports whether the school runs a registry-listed suicide prevention program and has a written postvention protocol, and the Director of Student Services approves or returns each protocol.
- The Director of Student Services selects a validated depression and suicide risk screening instrument and drafts a parental consent form that meets the Protection of Pupil Rights Amendment and state law.
Year one
- By March 1 the Superintendent presents to the Board a funded plan to bring every building above a ratio to the 250, 500 and 250 standards within three years, drawing on ESSA Title IV-A and Bipartisan Safer Communities Act pipeline funds where eligible.
- By the start of the second semester every school has a district or contracted licensed clinician on site at least one day each week, and each building logs time from referral to first appointment against the 10 school day standard.
- Each secondary school completes its first universal screening with parental consent, gives same-day follow-up by a licensed professional to students at elevated risk, and refers students who need services within the same week.
- Each secondary school delivers its registry-listed suicide prevention program, and the Director of Student Services completes the first semester adherence review and suspends any component not delivered as designed.
Ongoing
- The Director of Student Services documents program adherence each semester and reports to the Board by November 1 the staffing ratios by building, students served by on-site clinicians, screening and referral shares, time to first appointment, suspension rates and fidelity findings.
- The Superintendent updates the funded staffing plan each year and presents it to the Board by March 1 for any building still above a ratio.
- The Director of Student Services reviews every postvention protocol annually and after any suicide death or attempt.
| Measure | Students per school counselor, school psychologist and school social worker by building; share of students screened and share of referred students who begin services within 30 days; time to first appointment; number and share of students served by an on-site licensed clinician; student survey items on depression, suicidal ideation and attempts; suspension rate; suicide prevention fidelity checks. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First-year staffing roster against October 1 enrollment, the first screening cycle's screened and referred shares, the first semester's referral-to-appointment log, the most recent YRBS or state climate survey items on ideation and attempts, and the prior year's suspension rate. |
| Target | Every building at or below 250 students per counselor, 500 per school psychologist and 250 per school social worker within three years of the first March 1 plan; every school with a licensed clinician on site weekly by the end of year one; every referred student offered an initial appointment within 10 school days; share of referred students beginning services within 30 days rising each year; self-reported suicide attempts and suspension rates declining over 1 to 3 years with every program component passing fidelity checks. |
| Benchmark | The entry supplies the 250, 500 and 250 staffing ratios as the standard. For outcomes it reports in-school clinicians raising treatment use 8 percent and cutting self-reported suicide attempts about 15 percent in Minnesota, and YAM cutting new attempts about 50 percent at 12 months, but these come from research settings and are not district targets; Sources of Strength showed no overall effect and harm where fidelity was poor, so the fidelity check is a benchmark in its own right. |
| Reported | Director of Student Services to the Board by November 1 each year, with the funded staffing plan from the Superintendent by March 1 each year; the ratio, clinician access, screening and referral figures are broken out by building and the survey and suspension items are compared with the baseline year. |
Sources. Sanchez AL, Cornacchio D, Poznanski B, Golik AM, Chou T, Comer JS (2018). The effectiveness of school-based mental health services for elementary-aged children: A meta-analysis. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry 57(3):153-165. doi · Golberstein E, Zainullina I, Sojourner A, Sander MA (2024). Effects of school-based mental health services on youth outcomes. Journal of Human Resources 59(S):S256-S281. doi · Carrell SE, Hoekstra M (2014). Are school counselors an effective education input? Economics Letters 125(1):66-69. doi · Reback R (2010). Schools' mental health services and young children's emotions, behavior, and learning. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 29(4):698-725. doi · Mulhern C (2023). Beyond teachers: Estimating individual school counselors' effects on educational attainment. American Economic Review 113(11):2846-2893. doi · Hurwitz M, Howell J (2014). Estimating causal impacts of school counselors with regression discontinuity designs. Journal of Counseling and Development 92(3):316-327. doi · Kearney C, Akos P, Domina T, Young Z (2021). Student-to-school counselor ratios: A meta-analytic review of the evidence. Journal of Counseling and Development 99(4):418-428. doi · Wasserman D, Hoven CW, Wasserman C, et al. (2015). School-based suicide prevention programmes: The SEYLE cluster-randomised, controlled trial. Lancet 385(9977):1536-1544. doi · Schilling EA, Aseltine RH, James A (2016). The SOS Suicide Prevention Program: Further evidence of efficacy and effectiveness. Prevention Science 17(2):157-166. doi · Wyman PA, Brown CH, LoMurray M, et al. (2010). An outcome evaluation of the Sources of Strength suicide prevention program delivered by adolescent peer leaders in high schools. American Journal of Public Health 100(9):1653-1661. doi · Wyman PA, Cero I, Brown CH, et al. (2023). Impact of Sources of Strength on adolescent suicide deaths across three randomized trials. Injury Prevention 29(6):474-481. doi · Wyman PA, Cero I, Pisani AR, et al. (2025). Impact of the Sources of Strength peer leader program on suicide attempt rates in 40 high schools: A hybrid effectiveness-implementation cluster randomized trial. School Mental Health. doi · Sekhar DL, Schaefer EW, Waxmonsky JG, et al. (2021). Screening in high schools to identify, evaluate, and lower depression among adolescents: A randomized clinical trial. JAMA Network Open 4(11):e2131836. doi · Kuyken W, Ball S, Crane C, et al. (2022). Effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of universal school-based mindfulness training compared with normal school provision in reducing risk of mental health problems and promoting well-being in adolescence: The MYRIAD cluster randomised controlled trial. Evidence-Based Mental Health 25(3):99-109. doi · Harvey LJ, White FA, Hunt C, Abbott M (2023). Investigating the efficacy of a Dialectical behaviour therapy-based universal intervention on adolescent social and emotional well-being outcomes. Behaviour Research and Therapy 169:104408. doi · Foulkes L, Stringaris A (2023). Do no harm: Can school mental health interventions cause iatrogenic harm? BJPsych Bulletin 47(6):349-351. doi · American School Counselor Association. School counselor roles and ratios (recommended ratio 250:1; national average 372:1 in 2024-25). link · National Association of School Psychologists. Shortage of school psychologists (recommended ratio 1 psychologist per 500 students). link
○ SilentClassroom temperature, ventilation and indoor airno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Heat cuts learning: across 10 million PSAT retakers, each 1 degree F hotter school year reduced that year's learning by about 1 percent in schools without air conditioning, and air conditioning offset nearly all of it; hot school days fall hardest on Black and Hispanic students and explain roughly 5 percent of the racial achievement gap. Poor ventilation costs attendance and scores: in 162 California classrooms each additional 1 L/s per person of outdoor air cut illness absence 1.6 percent, a 140-classroom study found math scores rose 0.5 percent per L/s-person up to the 7.1 L/s-person standard and a further 0.5 percent per degree C cooler within 20 to 25 C, and a double-blind crossover experiment found 3 to 7 percent more correct answers when outdoor air rose from 1.7 to 6.6 L/s-person. (Learning -1% per +1 F school-year temperature without AC, mostly offset by AC; illness absence -1.6% per +1 L/s-person ventilation; math +0.5% per L/s-person and +0.5% per 1 C cooler (20 to 25 C); test speed +12% and errors -2% when classroom CO2 falls from 2100 to 900 ppm (pooled model); most US classrooms ventilate below the ASHRAE 62.1 rate.)
Mixed evidence. The heat evidence is tier A (several large natural experiments agree); the ventilation evidence is weaker: Mendell and Haverinen-Shaughnessy are prospective observational studies, Petersen is a small crossover with four classrooms, and Wargocki's 12 percent figure is a pooled model prediction rather than a measured effect. Graff Zivin, Hsiang and Neidell found heat lowers math performance on the day of the test but found no long-run effect of early-life temperature exposure. Stafford's Texas study found renovations that fixed indoor air problems raised test scores, but renovations change many things at once. Air conditioning and ventilation upgrades are capital-intensive (an elementary school HVAC replacement runs into the millions) and raise energy costs, and ASHRAE 241 is a voluntary standard. CO2 is an indicator of ventilation, not a pollutant at classroom levels.
Standard. Every occupied classroom is kept between 68 and 78 F during instruction, every classroom is ventilated at or above the ASHRAE 62.1 outdoor air rate with MERV-13 filtration and continuous CO2 monitoring held below 1,000 ppm, and the district has a written heat response plan with a trigger temperature, cooling priorities and a capital plan to air-condition every classroom.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (health and wellbeing)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Facilities inventories every classroom within 30 days, recording whether it has mechanical cooling, its ventilation system type, and its current filter rating.
- The Director of Facilities installs data loggers or uses the building management system in every building within 60 days to record classroom temperature during instructional hours.
- The Director of Facilities orders continuous CO2 monitors for every classroom within 60 days and begins installation in the buildings with the highest share of classrooms without cooling.
- The Superintendent issues a written heat response procedure within 90 days that directs principals to relocate instruction when a classroom cannot be held at or below 82 F and bars teaching in any room at or above 88 F.
- The Director of Facilities replaces all filters with MERV-13 or higher within 90 days in every system that can accept them and lists the systems that cannot.
Year one
- The Director of Facilities completes CO2 monitor installation in every classroom and sets a monthly report of the share of occupied hours above 1,000 ppm by building.
- The Director of Facilities commissions a measurement of outdoor air rate per person in each building and schedules corrective work for every system below the ASHRAE 62.1 rate.
- The Director of Facilities delivers the first annual report to the Board by September 30, including the prioritized capital plan to cool and ventilate every classroom.
- The Superintendent includes the capital plan in the next annual capital budget request to the Board.
Ongoing
- The Director of Facilities investigates and corrects every classroom whose CO2 exceeds 1,000 ppm for more than 10 percent of occupied hours in any month and logs the fix.
- The Director of Facilities reports to the Board each September 30 on classrooms without cooling, instructional hours above 78 F by building, monthly CO2 exceedance by building, and filter replacement records.
- The Superintendent requests capital funding each year until every classroom has mechanical cooling and code-rate ventilation.
| Measure | Share of classrooms with mechanical cooling, instructional hours above 78 F by building, share of occupied classroom hours with CO2 above 1,000 ppm, measured outdoor air rate per person at commissioning, illness absence by building, and number of heat-related early dismissals |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First-year inventory and logger data: count of classrooms without mechanical cooling, instructional hours above 78 F in the prior year, and monthly CO2 exceedance rate once monitors are installed |
| Target | Within 1 year every classroom has a continuous CO2 monitor and no building exceeds 1,000 ppm for more than 10 percent of occupied hours in any month; within 3 years the share of classrooms without mechanical cooling and the instructional hours above 78 F fall each year, no student is taught at or above 88 F, and illness absence by building declines |
| Benchmark | Classroom temperature held between 68 and 78 F; CO2 below 1,000 ppm; outdoor air at or above the ASHRAE 62.1 rate (California sets 7.1 L/s-person); MERV-13 filtration; New York law requires relief at 82 F and bars occupancy at 88 F |
| Reported | Annual report from the Director of Facilities to the Board by September 30, with monthly CO2 exceedance rates by building available to the Board on request |
Sources. Park RJ, Goodman J, Hurwitz M, Smith J (2020). Heat and learning. American Economic Journal: Economic Policy 12(2):306-339. doi · Park RJ (2022). Hot temperature and high-stakes performance. Journal of Human Resources 57(2):400-434. doi · Park RJ, Behrer AP, Goodman J (2021). Learning is inhibited by heat exposure, both internationally and within the United States. Nature Human Behaviour 5(1):19-27. doi · Graff Zivin J, Hsiang SM, Neidell M (2018). Temperature and human capital in the short and long run. Journal of the Association of Environmental and Resource Economists 5(1):77-105. doi · Cho H (2017). The effects of summer heat on academic achievement: A cohort analysis. Journal of Environmental Economics and Management 83:185-196. doi · Mendell MJ, Eliseeva EA, Davies MM, et al. (2013). Association of classroom ventilation with reduced illness absence: A prospective study in California elementary schools. Indoor Air 23(6):515-528. doi · Haverinen-Shaughnessy U, Moschandreas DJ, Shaughnessy RJ (2011). Association between substandard classroom ventilation rates and students' academic achievement. Indoor Air 21(2):121-131. doi · Haverinen-Shaughnessy U, Shaughnessy RJ (2015). Effects of classroom ventilation rate and temperature on students' test scores. PLOS ONE 10(8):e0136165. doi · Petersen S, Jensen KL, Pedersen ALS, Rasmussen HS (2016). The effect of increased classroom ventilation rate indicated by reduced CO2 concentration on the performance of schoolwork by children. Indoor Air 26(3):366-379. doi · Wargocki P, Porras-Salazar JA, Contreras-Espinoza S (2019). The relationship between classroom temperature and children's performance in school. Building and Environment 157:197-204. doi · Wargocki P, Porras-Salazar JA, Contreras-Espinoza S, Bahnfleth W (2020). The relationships between classroom air quality and children's performance in school. Building and Environment 173:106749. doi · Fisk WJ (2017). The ventilation problem in schools: Literature review. Indoor Air 27(6):1039-1051. doi · Gaihre S, Semple S, Miller J, Fielding S, Turner S (2014). Classroom carbon dioxide concentration, school attendance, and educational attainment. Journal of School Health 84(9):569-574. doi · Stafford TM (2015). Indoor air quality and academic performance. Journal of Environmental Economics and Management 70:34-50. doi · ASHRAE. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1, Ventilation and acceptable indoor air quality (classroom outdoor air rate: 10 cfm per person plus 0.12 cfm per square foot). link · ASHRAE (2023). ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 241, Control of infectious aerosols (equivalent clean airflow target of 20 L/s per person for classrooms in infection risk management mode). link
○ SilentRecessno governing section
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Daily recess is associated with better classroom behavior and attention: in a national sample of 11,000 third graders, children with at least one daily recess of 15 or more minutes had better teacher-rated class behavior, a within-subject experiment found fourth graders more on task and less fidgety on recess days, and a cluster-randomized trial of a structured-recess program (Playworks) in 27 to 29 schools reduced teacher-reported bullying and exclusion and cut transition time back to learning. The AAP and CDC state that recess is a necessary break and should not be withheld as punishment or to complete work. (Daily recess of 15 or more minutes: better teacher-rated class behavior (n about 11,000); recess days: more on task, less fidgeting, all ADHD children benefited; Playworks RCT: less bullying and exclusion, fewer minutes lost in transition; LiiNK four 15-minute recesses: off-task behavior down, attentional focus up)
Mixed evidence. No randomized trial varies the amount of recess itself; the Playworks RCT tests a coached recess program, and its accelerometer and student-survey measures of physical activity showed null or marginal effects even where teacher reports were positive. The LiiNK results come from two private schools with no random assignment. Brez and Sheets (2017) found no clear classroom benefit of recess timing in their small experiment. The large national association (Barros et al. 2009) is cross-sectional and children without recess were disproportionately poor, Black and urban, so the comparison is confounded. Recess competes with instructional minutes and requires supervision staffing.
Standard. Every elementary student receives at least 20 minutes of daily supervised recess, scheduled separately from physical education and lunch, which no staff member may withhold as a disciplinary consequence or to complete academic work.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (health and wellbeing)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent issues an administrative regulation within 30 days defining recess as at least 20 minutes of supervised unstructured play scheduled apart from physical education and the seated lunch period, and stating that no staff member may withhold, shorten or assign recess as a consequence or require academic work during it.
- Each elementary principal revises the building master schedule within 60 days so every K-5 class has at least 20 minutes of daily recess and certifies the schedule to the Superintendent by September 15.
- The student information system administrator adds a recess removal record type with a required reason field and a same-day entry rule within 60 days, and removes recess from the list of available disciplinary consequences.
- Each principal briefs all teachers, paraprofessionals and recess supervisors on the policy at a staff meeting within 90 days and sends a one-page notice home to families.
Year one
- The Superintendent reviews certified schedules and recess removal records by building each quarter and requires a written correction plan from any building below 20 minutes or with a pattern of removals not tied to an immediate safety risk.
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by November 1 the daily recess minutes for each elementary building, the number of recorded recess removals by building and reason, and any correction plans.
- The student services director audits a sample of discipline and make-up-work records from each building once during the year to confirm recess has not been withheld as a consequence.
Ongoing
- Each elementary principal recertifies the building recess schedule to the Superintendent by September 15 every year.
- The Superintendent delivers the November 1 recess report to the Board every year and flags any building below 20 minutes or any rise in recess removals.
| Measure | Share of K-5 students scheduled for at least 20 minutes of daily recess per the certified master schedules, and the count of recess removals logged in the student information system by building and reason |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first September 15 schedule certifications and the first year of logged recess removals establish the baseline; many districts will have no prior count because recess withholding was not tracked |
| Target | Within 1 year, 100 percent of K-5 students in every elementary building have at least 20 minutes of scheduled daily recess, and all logged recess removals cite an immediate safety risk, with the count of removals declining year over year in years 1 to 3 |
| Benchmark | The research supports at least one daily recess of 15 or more minutes for better classroom behavior; the policy standard is 20 minutes daily, matching Florida (20 consecutive minutes daily, 100 minutes per week) and New Jersey (20 minutes daily), while Washington and Pennsylvania (from 2027-28) set 30 minutes daily |
| Reported | Superintendent reports to the Board by November 1 each year with recess minutes by building, recess removals by building and reason, and correction plans for any building below 20 minutes |
Sources. Council on School Health, American Academy of Pediatrics (2013). The crucial role of recess in school. Pediatrics 131(1):183-188. doi · Barros RM, Silver EJ, Stein REK (2009). School recess and group classroom behavior. Pediatrics 123(2):431-436. doi · Jarrett OS, Maxwell DM, Dickerson C, Hoge P, Davies G, Yetley A (1998). Impact of recess on classroom behavior: Group effects and individual differences. Journal of Educational Research 92(2):121-126. doi · Beyler N, Bleeker M, James-Burdumy S, Fortson J, Benjamin M (2014). The impact of Playworks on students' physical activity during recess: Findings from a randomized controlled trial. Preventive Medicine 69(Suppl 1):S20-S26. doi · Fortson J, James-Burdumy S, Bleeker M, Beyler N, London RA, Westrich L, Stokes-Guinan K, Castrechini S (2013). Impact and implementation findings from an experimental evaluation of Playworks: Effects on school climate, academic learning, student social skills and behavior. Mathematica Policy Research and John W. Gardner Center, Stanford University. link · London RA, Westrich L, Stokes-Guinan K, McLaughlin M (2015). Playing fair: The contribution of high-functioning recess to overall school climate in low-income elementary schools. Journal of School Health 85(1):53-60. doi · Rhea DJ, Rivchun AP (2018). The LiiNK Project: Effects of multiple recesses and character curriculum on classroom behaviors and listening skills in grades K-2 children. Frontiers in Education 3:9. doi · Massey WV, Thalken J, Szarabajko A, Neilson L, Geldhof J (2021). Recess quality and social and behavioral health in elementary school students. Journal of School Health 91(9):730-740. doi · Brez C, Sheets V (2017). Classroom benefits of recess. Learning Environments Research 20(3):433-445. doi · Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and SHAPE America (2017). Strategies for recess in schools. Atlanta: US Department of Health and Human Services. link
◐ Partial 0/5School nurses and health services146 Student Services
Tier C: consistent correlational evidencestakes 3/5
Research. A full-time registered nurse in every school pays for itself: the Massachusetts cost-benefit study found $2.20 in avoided medical costs, teacher time and parent lost wages for every $1 spent. Schools that add a full-time nurse show lower illness absence, with the clearest gains for students with asthma (23 percent fewer days missed with a full-time versus part-time nurse in Toledo; fewer illness absences and emergency visits after San Jose added full-time nurses), but the attendance evidence is quasi-experimental, integrative reviews rate it weak, and no study shows a nurse effect on test scores. (Benefit-cost ratio 2.2 (Massachusetts); students with asthma -23% days absent with full-time vs part-time nurse; illness absence fell in schools adding full-time RNs; teachers in schools without a full-time nurse spent about an hour a day on student health; achievement effects unproven.)
Mixed evidence. No randomized or natural-experiment study of nurse staffing exists; the two best quasi-experiments (Telljohann 2004, Rodriguez 2013) are small and matched rather than randomized, and Yoder's 2019 review found nurse presence associated with less absence and missed class time but not with achievement. A matched 46-school study of licensed practical nurses (not RNs) found at best negligible attendance gains at $68,228 per school per year (Leach 2022), which suggests the benefit depends on scope of practice and on what the nurse is asked to do. The Massachusetts benefit-cost figure rests on modeled productivity savings, not measured outcomes. NASN itself abandoned the fixed 1:750 ratio in 2020 in favor of a workload and acuity analysis, so there is no single staffing number the research supports.
Standard. Every school building has a licensed registered nurse on site for the full instructional day, every day school is in session, with additional nursing staff assigned from an annual workload and acuity analysis; LPNs and unlicensed health aides work only under RN delegation and supervision.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires a licensed registered nurse on site in every school building for the full instructional day, every day school is in session. core
- ✕The policy assigns additional nursing staff based on an annual workload and acuity analysis.
- ✕The policy allows LPNs and unlicensed health aides to work only under registered nurse delegation and supervision.
- ✕The policy contains no language making nurse presence contingent on available funding, sharing a nurse among buildings, or as-needed contracting.
- ✕The policy contains no language allowing clerical staff or health aides to staff the health office in a nurse's absence.
What the manual says. 146 Student Services, revised November 4, 2019:
Recommended. New policy (health and wellbeing)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Coordinator of Health Services audits the current staffing roster within 30 days and lists every building that lacks a full-time registered nurse on site for the full instructional day.
- The Coordinator of Health Services builds the workload and acuity analysis template using student health conditions, medication and treatment orders, individualized healthcare plans and enrollment for each building.
- The Superintendent directs Human Resources to post registered nurse positions for every building identified as uncovered and reports the hiring timeline to the Board within 60 days.
- The Coordinator of Health Services issues written delegation and supervision procedures so that every LPN and health aide is assigned to a named supervising registered nurse within 90 days.
- The business office confirms the district is enrolled to bill Medicaid for school health services to eligible students and assigns a staff member to file claims.
Year one
- The Coordinator of Health Services completes the first workload and acuity analysis for every building by June 30 and the Superintendent assigns additional licensed nursing staff where it shows a single nurse cannot provide safe care.
- The Superintendent and Human Resources fill every registered nurse vacancy so each building has a full-time RN on site every day students are present by the start of the next school year.
- The Coordinator of Health Services and the student information system administrator set up tracking of days each building lacked an RN, illness-related absence for students with asthma, diabetes, seizure disorders and food allergies, and 911 calls from schools.
- The Coordinator of Health Services delivers the first annual report to the Board by October 15 covering nursing staff by building, workload results, days without an RN, and illness-related absence for students with chronic conditions.
Ongoing
- The Coordinator of Health Services repeats the workload and acuity analysis by June 30 each year and the Superintendent adjusts nursing assignments before the next school year begins.
- The Coordinator of Health Services reports to the Board by October 15 each year and the Board reviews the report in open session.
- The business office reports Medicaid reimbursement for school health services to the Board annually so the Board can weigh it against nursing costs.
| Measure | Share of school buildings with a registered nurse on site every full school day, and number of days any building lacked an RN, from the district staffing roster; illness-related absence rate for students with asthma, diabetes, seizure disorders and food allergies, from the student information system; count of emergency 911 calls from schools. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Roster audit and student information system data for the school year before adoption, recorded by the Coordinator of Health Services in the first 90 days. |
| Target | 100 percent of buildings have a full-time RN on site every day students are present, with zero uncovered days, within 1 year of adoption; illness-related absence for students with chronic health conditions declines from the baseline within 2 years and does not rise thereafter. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric target for coverage or absence. The Massachusetts study found a benefit-cost ratio of 2.2 and Toledo found 23 percent fewer days absent for students with asthma with a full-time versus part-time nurse, but these are quasi-experimental findings rated weak by integrative reviews and should not be adopted as a district target. Pennsylvania law sets a maximum of 1,500 students per certified school nurse, which the district may use as an outer ceiling for ratio, not a goal. No achievement effect is established, so test scores are not a measure. |
| Reported | Coordinator of Health Services reports to the Board by October 15 each year: nursing staff by building, workload and acuity results, days each building lacked an RN on site, illness-related and chronic absence for students with chronic health conditions, 911 calls from schools, and Medicaid reimbursement received. |
Sources. Wang LY, Vernon-Smiley M, Gapinski MA, Desisto M, Maughan E, Sheetz A (2014). Cost-benefit study of school nursing services. JAMA Pediatrics 168(7):642-648. doi · Telljohann SK, Dake JA, Price JH (2004). Effect of full-time versus part-time school nurses on attendance of elementary students with asthma. Journal of School Nursing 20(6):331-334. doi · Rodriguez E, Rivera DA, Perlroth D, Becker E, Wang NE, Landau M (2013). School nurses' role in asthma management, school absenteeism, and cost savings: A demonstration project. Journal of School Health 83(12):842-850. doi · Best NC, Oppewal S, Travers D (2018). Exploring school nurse interventions and health and education outcomes: An integrative review. Journal of School Nursing 34(1):14-27. doi · Yoder CM (2020). School nurses and student academic outcomes: An integrative review. Journal of School Nursing 36(1):49-60. doi · Leach SM, Hollands FM, Stone E, et al. (2022). Costs and effects of school-based licensed practical nurses on elementary student attendance and chronic absenteeism. Prevention Science 23(8):1414-1427. doi · Harris K, Kneale D, Lasserson TJ, McDonald VM, Grigg J, Thomas J (2019). School-based self-management interventions for asthma in children and adolescents: A mixed methods systematic review. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 1:CD011651. doi · Hill NJ, Hollis M (2012). Teacher time spent on student health issues and school nurse presence. Journal of School Nursing 28(3):181-186. doi · Willgerodt MA, Tanner A, McCabe E, Jameson B, Brock D (2024). Public school nurses in the United States: National School Nurse Workforce Study 2.0. Journal of School Nursing 40(5):468-481. doi · National Association of School Nurses (2025). Position statement: School nurse workload, essential staffing for safe and equitable student care. Journal of School Nursing 41(5):642-645. doi · Council on School Health, American Academy of Pediatrics (2016). Role of the school nurse in providing school health services. Pediatrics 137(6):e20160852. doi
◐ Partial 0/4Physical education minutes and activity policy246 Wellness
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 2/5
Research. Meta-analyses of experimental studies find that physical activity delivered through physical education improves classroom behavior and academic outcomes, with the gains concentrated in programs that raise the quality and intensity of PE lessons (cognition g 0.38, academic performance g 0.15) rather than in simply adding minutes (academic g 0.09, not significant). Instrumental-variable estimates using state PE mandates show more PE time increases physical activity and lowers obesity among fifth-grade boys without crowding out test scores. SHAPE America's standard is 150 minutes per week in elementary and 225 in secondary school. (Quality-focused PE interventions: cognition +0.38 SD, academic performance +0.15 SD; PA interventions: math +0.21 SD, on-task behavior +0.77 SD; more PE time: no crowd-out of test scores, lower BMI z-score for boys; added minutes alone: academic +0.09 SD (null))
Mixed evidence. Adding PE minutes without changing lesson quality has little measurable academic effect. Packham and Street (2019) used a regression discontinuity on Texas Fitness Now, a 37 million dollar daily-PE mandate for low-income middle schools, and found no overall fitness improvement, no test-score or attendance gain, and some evidence of lower attendance and more disciplinary incidents. Cawley, Meyerhoefer and Newhouse (2007) found binding state PE requirements raised activity but not weight outcomes for high school students. Singh et al. (2019) rated only 11 of 58 PA intervention studies as high quality and called the evidence on overall academic performance inconclusive, while confirming math benefits. Observed PE lessons average well under the 50 percent moderate-to-vigorous activity target, so minutes on a schedule overstate activity delivered.
Standard. Every student receives at least 150 minutes per week of PE in elementary and 225 minutes per week in secondary grades, taught by a certified physical educator, with no waivers for athletics or other courses and no PE time withheld as punishment.
Checklist. 0 of 4 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy guarantees every student at least 150 minutes per week of PE in elementary grades and 225 minutes per week in secondary grades. core
- ✕The policy requires that PE be taught by a certified physical educator.
- ✕The policy allows no waivers from PE for athletics, band, JROTC, or other courses.
- ✕The policy prohibits withholding PE time as punishment.
What the manual says. 246 Wellness, revised August 21, 2017:
Recommended. Amend 246 Wellness
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Curriculum pulls each building's master schedule and records scheduled PE minutes per week by grade, flagging every grade below 150 minutes in K-5 or 225 minutes in 6-12.
- The Human Resources Director verifies the physical education certification of every teacher assigned a PE section and lists any section taught by a non-certified teacher.
- Each principal reports to the Director of Curriculum every current waiver or substitution of athletics, marching band, JROTC, recess or online coursework for PE, and every instance in the last year of PE withheld as discipline.
- The Director of Curriculum and the Student Services Director revise the student discipline code to remove PE withholding as a consequence and notify staff in writing.
- The Superintendent names a PE lead who selects SOFIT or an equivalent observation tool and trains at least two observers before the end of the 90 days.
Year one
- Each principal rebuilds the master schedule for the next school year so that every grade meets the 150 or 225 minute standard, and the Director of Curriculum certifies the minutes and certification status to the Superintendent by September 30.
- The PE lead completes at least one observed-activity sample per building and records the share of lesson time spent in moderate-to-vigorous activity.
- The Human Resources Director posts and fills certified PE positions for any section still taught by a non-certified teacher, or the Superintendent presents a dated hiring plan to the Board.
- The Superintendent reports minutes by grade and building, certification share, observation results, waiver counts and a dated correction plan for any shortfall to the Board by December 1.
Ongoing
- The Director of Curriculum certifies PE minutes and teacher certification to the Superintendent by September 30 every year, and the Superintendent reports to the Board by December 1 every year.
- The PE lead repeats at least one observed-activity sample per building each year and uses the results to plan PE teacher professional development on lesson intensity.
- The Superintendent includes PE minutes and activity goals in the triennial Local School Wellness Policy assessment required by 7 CFR 210.31.
| Measure | Share of grade levels in each building scheduled for at least 150 minutes per week of PE (K-5) or 225 minutes per week (6-12); share of PE sections taught by a certified physical educator; observed share of PE lesson time in moderate-to-vigorous activity; count of waivers, substitutions and disciplinary withholdings. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Scheduled PE minutes per week by grade and building from the master schedule in the first 90 days, certification status of each PE section from Human Resources, waiver and substitution counts from principals, and the first observed-activity sample taken in year one. |
| Target | By the September 30 certification in year two, every grade in every building is scheduled for at least 150 minutes (K-5) or 225 minutes (6-12) of PE per week, every PE section is taught by a certified physical educator, waivers, substitutions and disciplinary withholdings are zero, and the observed share of lesson time in moderate-to-vigorous activity is at least half in each building and rising from baseline in each later year. |
| Benchmark | SHAPE America's standard of 150 minutes per week in elementary and 225 minutes per week in secondary school, with at least half of class time in moderate-to-vigorous activity per the model clause; by comparison, California requires 200 minutes per 10 days in grades 1-6 and 400 minutes per 10 days in grades 7-12, and Texas requires 135 minutes weekly in K-5. The research supports quality and intensity over added minutes alone, so the activity-share measure carries as much weight as the minutes count. |
| Reported | Superintendent's annual PE report to the Board by December 1, built on the Director of Curriculum's September 30 certification, with minutes by grade and building, certification share, observation results, waiver and withholding counts, and a dated correction plan for any shortfall. |
Sources. Garcia-Hermoso A, Ramirez-Velez R, Lubans DR, Izquierdo M (2021). Effects of physical education interventions on cognition and academic performance outcomes in children and adolescents: a systematic review and meta-analysis. British Journal of Sports Medicine 55(21):1224-1232. doi · Alvarez-Bueno C, Pesce C, Cavero-Redondo I, Sanchez-Lopez M, Garrido-Miguel M, Martinez-Vizcaino V (2017). Academic achievement and physical activity: A meta-analysis. Pediatrics 140(6):e20171498. doi · Singh AS, Saliasi E, van den Berg V, et al. (2019). Effects of physical activity interventions on cognitive and academic performance in children and adolescents: a novel combination of a systematic review and recommendations from an expert panel. British Journal of Sports Medicine 53(10):640-647. doi · Donnelly JE, Hillman CH, Castelli D, et al. (2016). Physical activity, fitness, cognitive function, and academic achievement in children: A systematic review. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise 48(6):1197-1222. doi · Cawley J, Frisvold D, Meyerhoefer C (2013). The impact of physical education on obesity among elementary school children. Journal of Health Economics 32(4):743-755. doi · Packham A, Street B (2019). The effects of physical education on student fitness, achievement, and behavior. Economics of Education Review 72:1-18. doi · Cawley J, Meyerhoefer C, Newhouse D (2007). The impact of state physical education requirements on youth physical activity and overweight. Health Economics 16(12):1287-1301. doi · Lonsdale C, Rosenkranz RR, Peralta LR, Bennie A, Fahey P, Lubans DR (2013). A systematic review and meta-analysis of interventions designed to increase moderate-to-vigorous physical activity in school physical education lessons. Preventive Medicine 56(2):152-161. doi · Hollis JL, Williams AJ, Sutherland R, et al. (2016). A systematic review and meta-analysis of moderate-to-vigorous physical activity levels in elementary school physical education lessons. Preventive Medicine 86:34-54. doi · SHAPE America (2015). The essential components of physical education. Reston, VA: SHAPE America. link
○ SilentLead in school drinking waterno governing section
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 2/5
Research. Lead harms learning at every measured level: in Rhode Island, each 1 ug/dL lower average preschool blood lead cut the chance of scoring substantially below proficient in third-grade reading by about 1 percentage point on a 12 percent base, Swedish and North Carolina natural experiments find the same for school grades, crime and suspensions, and Flint's water crisis lowered math achievement and raised special education classification district-wide. Lead in school water is common: in seven state testing programs 13 to 81 percent of tested schools had at least one outlet above 5 ppb, and 37 percent of US districts that tested found elevated lead, but no study links school-water lead itself to achievement, so testing policy rests on the blood-lead evidence plus prevalence data. (Below-proficient reading -0.96 pct points per 1 ug/dL lower blood lead (base 12%); Flint: math achievement down and special education classification up across the district; 37% of testing districts found elevated lead (GAO); 4 of 7 states found more than 20% of schools with an outlet above 5 ppb.)
Mixed evidence. The causal chain is indirect: the strong studies measure blood lead from all sources (paint, soil, water) and no study isolates school drinking water's contribution to blood lead or achievement, and Flint's effects appeared even in homes with copper service lines, which points to stress and disruption as well as lead. Water is a smaller lead source than paint and dust for most children, and a child drinks only part of the day's water at school. Sampling results depend heavily on protocol (first draw versus flushed, stagnation time, which outlets), so a single clean test does not prove safety and a single high test may reflect one fixture. Remediation costs are real (fixture replacement, filtered bottle fillers, re-testing every few years) and there is no agreed health-based action level for schools: EPA uses 15 ppb for water systems and recommends schools act at 5 ppb or lower, AAP recommends 1 ppb.
Standard. Every outlet used for drinking or cooking in every building is tested for lead with first-draw samples at least every 3 years and after any plumbing work, any outlet above 5 ppb is taken out of service within 24 hours until fixed or replaced, results are posted publicly within 30 days, and every building has filtered drinking stations.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (health and wellbeing)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Facilities inventories every outlet used for drinking or food preparation in every district building, assigns each a unique identifier, and files the inventory with the Superintendent within 60 days.
- The Director of Facilities adopts a written sampling protocol following the EPA 3Ts guidance, contracts a certified laboratory, and asks the community water system whether it will sample eligible elementary schools under 40 CFR 141.92 at no cost.
- The Business Manager applies for WIIN Act school lead testing and remediation grant funds and any state testing program money within 90 days.
- The Director of Facilities completes first-draw testing of all outlets in the earliest-built elementary buildings within 90 days and removes any outlet at or above 5 ppb from service within 24 hours of the result.
- The Director of Communications prepares the results web page by outlet and the family and staff notification template so that posting within 30 days of results is possible from the first batch.
Year one
- The Director of Facilities completes initial testing of every outlet in every building, posts results by outlet on the district website, and notifies families and staff of each building within 30 calendar days of receipt.
- The Director of Facilities replaces or filters every outlet at or above 5 ppb and returns each to service only after a follow-up sample below 5 ppb, keeping a status log for the Board.
- The Director of Facilities installs at least one NSF/ANSI 53 certified filtered bottle-filling station on every floor of every building and starts a filter replacement log on the manufacturer's schedule.
- The Director of Facilities delivers the first annual report to the Board by September 30 listing outlets tested, results, outlets removed from service and their status, and the filter replacement log.
Ongoing
- The Director of Facilities retests each outlet at least once every 3 years and within 90 days after any plumbing repair or replacement affecting it, with the retest calendar reviewed each June.
- The Director of Facilities reports to the Board by September 30 each year, and the Board checks that no outlet above 5 ppb stayed in service more than 24 hours after its result was received.
- The Superintendent requests county health department blood lead screening rates each year and includes them in the annual report where available.
| Measure | Share of drinking and cooking outlets tested within the last 3 years, share of tested outlets at or above 5 ppb, days between a result at or above 5 ppb and outlet shutoff, number of NSF/ANSI 53 filtered bottle-filling stations per building floor, and share of families notified within 30 days, all drawn from the district's published results and the annual Board report. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Most districts have no complete outlet inventory or test record; across seven state testing programs 13 to 81 percent of tested schools had at least one outlet above 5 ppb, and 37 percent of US districts that tested found elevated lead. |
| Target | 100 percent of drinking and cooking outlets tested by June 30, 2027 and retested within every 3 year cycle thereafter; every outlet at or above 5 ppb out of service within 24 hours of the result; 100 percent of results posted and families notified within 30 days; at least one filtered station on every floor of every building by the end of year one; and the share of outlets at or above 5 ppb falling each cycle toward zero. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric benchmark for school-water lead and achievement, since no study links school-water lead itself to achievement; the 5 ppb action level and 3 year retest cycle follow New York 10 NYCRR Subpart 67-4 and New Jersey law, and the filtered station requirement follows Michigan's 2023 Filter First law. The 1 ug/dL blood lead effect on reading is the supporting evidence, not a district target. |
| Reported | The Director of Facilities reports to the Board by September 30 each year, with results posted by outlet on the district website within 30 days of receipt and the filter replacement log attached. |
Sources. Aizer A, Currie J, Simon P, Vivier P (2018). Do low levels of blood lead reduce children's future test scores? American Economic Journal: Applied Economics 10(1):307-341. doi · Aizer A, Currie J (2019). Lead and juvenile delinquency: New evidence from linked birth, school, and juvenile detention records. Review of Economics and Statistics 101(4):575-587. doi · Gronqvist H, Nilsson JP, Robling PO (2020). Understanding how low levels of early lead exposure affect children's life trajectories. Journal of Political Economy 128(9):3376-3433. doi · Billings SB, Schnepel KT (2018). Life after lead: Effects of early interventions for children exposed to lead. American Economic Journal: Applied Economics 10(3):315-344. doi · Sorensen LC, Fox AM, Jung H, Martin EG (2019). Lead exposure and academic achievement: Evidence from childhood lead poisoning prevention efforts. Journal of Population Economics 32(1):179-218. doi · Lanphear BP, Hornung R, Khoury J, et al. (2005). Low-level environmental lead exposure and children's intellectual function: An international pooled analysis. Environmental Health Perspectives 113(7):894-899. doi · Reyes JW (2015). Lead exposure and behavior: Effects on antisocial and risky behavior among children and adolescents. Economic Inquiry 53(3):1580-1605. doi · Hanna-Attisha M, LaChance J, Sadler RC, Champney Schnepp A (2016). Elevated blood lead levels in children associated with the Flint drinking water crisis: A spatial analysis of risk and public health response. American Journal of Public Health 106(2):283-290. doi · Trejo S, Yeomans-Maldonado G, Jacob B (2024). The effects of the Flint water crisis on the educational outcomes of school-age children. Science Advances 10(5):eadk4737. doi · Cradock AL, Barrett JL, Poole MK, Flax CN, Vollmer L, Hecht C (2022). Lead concentrations in US school drinking water: Testing programs, prevalence, and policy opportunities, 2016-2018. American Journal of Public Health 112(S7):S679-S689. doi · Lambrinidou Y, Triantafyllidou S, Edwards M (2010). Failing our children: Lead in U.S. school drinking water. NEW SOLUTIONS 20(1):25-47. doi · Council on Environmental Health, American Academy of Pediatrics (2016). Prevention of childhood lead toxicity. Pediatrics 138(1):e20161493. doi · US Government Accountability Office (2018). K-12 Education: Lead testing of school drinking water would benefit from improved federal guidance. GAO-18-382. link · US Environmental Protection Agency. 3Ts for reducing lead in drinking water in schools and child care facilities (Training, Testing, Taking Action). link
○ SilentUniversal free school meals and breakfast after the bellno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Making meals free for every student (the Community Eligibility Provision or a district-wide universal free lunch) raises school-meal participation and produces small but real gains in test scores and fewer suspensions: the New York City difference-in-differences study found math and ELA gains of 0.03 to 0.08 SD, state CEP rollouts found elementary math gains of about 0.02 to 0.06 SD, and CEP cut suspensions by roughly 17 percent for white elementary boys with negative but imprecise estimates elsewhere. Moving breakfast after the bell reliably raises breakfast participation (from about 43 to 74 percent of students in one 446-school district), but the best causal studies of breakfast-in-classroom find little or no test-score gain from the service change itself. (Universal free lunch: math +0.03 to +0.06 SD, ELA +0.03 to +0.08 SD; participation +5 to +11 pct points; suspensions about -17% for one elementary subgroup; no BMI increase. Breakfast after the bell: participation roughly +30 pct points; test-score effect near zero in NYC and in a 446-school propensity study.)
Mixed evidence. Breakfast-in-classroom raised participation in New York City with no detectable gain in achievement or attendance (Corcoran, Elbel and Schwartz 2016), and the 446-school Anzman-Frasca study found better participation and slightly better attendance but no achievement change; only Imberman and Kugler (2014) found test-score gains from in-class breakfast, and they could not separate nutrition from the timing of the test. The 2024 JAMA Network Open systematic review of CEP rated the attendance evidence low certainty (no or slight improvement in 2 studies) and the suspension and obesity evidence very low certainty. Gordon and Ruffini could not rule out large positive or negative discipline effects for middle and high schools, and the math gains in CEP studies are small (0.02 to 0.06 SD) and concentrated among elementary students and students newly gaining access. Districts with an identified student percentage near the 25 percent floor receive less than full federal reimbursement under CEP and must cover the gap from general funds.
Standard. Every school with an identified student percentage at or above the federal CEP threshold operates under CEP or a state universal-meals program so that no student is charged for breakfast or lunch, and every school serves breakfast after the start of the instructional day (in-classroom, grab-and-go, or second-chance) so that breakfast participation reaches at least 70 percent of lunch participation.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain.
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The Director of Nutrition Services pulls the identified student percentage for every school from the state direct certification match and lists each school at or above the 25 percent CEP threshold under 7 CFR 245.9.
- The Superintendent files CEP elections for every eligible school, or enrolls them in the state universal-meals program where one exists, at the next federal election window.
- The Director of Nutrition Services inventories each school's current breakfast model and start time and computes breakfast participation as a share of lunch participation from the last 12 months of USDA reimbursement claims.
- The Superintendent adopts and posts the written unpaid meal charge policy required by USDA SP 46-2016 that bars alternate meals, meal denial, and identification of students over balances.
- The Director of Nutrition Services selects a breakfast after the bell model (in-classroom, grab-and-go, or second-chance) with each principal for every school now serving breakfast only before the instructional day.
Year one
- Principals launch breakfast after the bell in every school by the start of the second semester, with the Director of Nutrition Services training cafeteria staff and teachers on serving and counting procedures.
- The Director of Nutrition Services builds a monthly dashboard of breakfast and lunch average daily participation by school from the reimbursement claims and shares it with principals within 30 days of each claim.
- The Director of Nutrition Services delivers the first annual report to the Board by October 15 listing CEP status by school, prior-year participation by school, and a corrective plan for every school where breakfast participation is below 70 percent of lunch participation.
- The Superintendent confirms that no school is charging students for reimbursable meals and that no alternate-meal or debt-identification practices remain, through a principal attestation collected within 180 days.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent re-elects CEP for every eligible school at each federal election window and adds newly eligible schools as direct certification data changes.
- The Director of Nutrition Services reports to the Board by October 15 each year on CEP status, participation by school, and corrective plans for schools below the 70 percent breakfast-to-lunch ratio.
- The Superintendent reviews chronic absence and out-of-school suspension rates from the state report card alongside participation data each year to track outcomes across years of adoption.
| Measure | Average daily breakfast and lunch participation as a share of enrollment by school, breakfast participation as a share of lunch participation by school, and share of eligible schools operating under CEP, all from monthly USDA reimbursement claims; chronic absence and out-of-school suspension rates from the state report card. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Prior-year average daily participation in breakfast and lunch by school from the last 12 months of reimbursement claims, the current breakfast-to-lunch participation ratio by school, the count of eligible schools under CEP, and the most recent state report card chronic absence and suspension rates, all recorded before the first CEP election and before any breakfast model change. |
| Target | Within 1 year, 100 percent of schools at or above the 25 percent identified student percentage threshold operate under CEP or a state universal-meals program, and every school serves breakfast after the bell; within 2 years, every school's breakfast participation reaches at least 70 percent of its lunch participation, and district lunch participation rises by at least 5 percentage points over baseline, with suspension and chronic absence rates trending down across years of adoption. |
| Benchmark | Universal free lunch raised participation 5 to 11 percentage points and produced math gains of 0.03 to 0.06 SD and ELA gains of 0.03 to 0.08 SD in NYC and state CEP rollouts; breakfast after the bell raised breakfast participation from about 43 to 74 percent of students in a 446-school district (roughly 30 points); the standard's 70 percent breakfast-to-lunch ratio is the operating threshold. The entry gives no numeric benchmark for suspension or absence change beyond one subgroup (about 17 percent fewer suspensions), so those are tracked directionally. |
| Reported | Annual report by the Director of Nutrition Services to the Board by October 15, with CEP status by school, prior-year breakfast and lunch participation by school, the list of schools below the 70 percent breakfast-to-lunch ratio with corrective plans, and state report card chronic absence and suspension rates compared across years of adoption. |
Sources. Schwartz AE, Rothbart MW (2020). Let them eat lunch: The impact of universal free meals on student performance. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 39(2):376-410. doi · Ruffini K (2022). Universal access to free school meals and student achievement: Evidence from the Community Eligibility Provision. Journal of Human Resources 57(3):776-820. doi · Gordon NE, Ruffini K (2021). Schoolwide free meals and student discipline: Effects of the Community Eligibility Provision. Education Finance and Policy 16(3):418-442. doi · Gordanier J, Ozturk O, Williams B, Zhan C (2020). Free lunch for all! The effect of the Community Eligibility Provision on academic outcomes. Economics of Education Review 77:101999. doi · Spill MK, Trivedi R, Thoerig RC, et al. (2024). Universal free school meals and school and student outcomes: A systematic review. JAMA Network Open 7(8):e2424082. doi · Cohen JFW, Hecht AA, McLoughlin GM, Turner L, Schwartz MB (2021). Universal school meals and associations with student participation, attendance, academic performance, diet quality, food security, and body mass index: A systematic review. Nutrients 13(3):911. doi · Frisvold DE (2015). Nutrition and cognitive achievement: An evaluation of the School Breakfast Program. Journal of Public Economics 124:91-104. doi · Imberman SA, Kugler AD (2014). The effect of providing breakfast in class on student performance. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 33(3):669-699. doi · Corcoran SP, Elbel B, Schwartz AE (2016). The effect of Breakfast in the Classroom on obesity and academic performance: Evidence from New York City. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 35(3):509-532. doi · Anzman-Frasca S, Djang HC, Halmo MM, Dolan PR, Economos CD (2015). Estimating impacts of a Breakfast in the Classroom program on school outcomes. JAMA Pediatrics 169(1):71-77. doi · Bartfeld JS, Berger L, Men F, Chen Y (2019). Access to the School Breakfast Program is associated with higher attendance and test scores among elementary school students. Journal of Nutrition 149(2):336-343. doi · Leos-Urbel J, Schwartz AE, Weinstein M, Corcoran SP (2013). Not just for poor kids: The impact of universal free school breakfast on meal participation and student outcomes. Economics of Education Review 36:88-107. doi
○ SilentVision screening and eyeglassesno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 2/5
Research. Screening every student and then delivering eye exams and free glasses on site improves reading: the Baltimore cluster randomized trial of 2,304 students in grades 3 to 7 found a 0.09 SD reading gain after one year, with gains of 0.28 SD for students in the lowest baseline quartile and 0.25 SD for students in special education; rural China trials found math gains of 0.11 to 0.16 SD from free glasses. The gains fade by the second year unless glasses are replaced and wear is followed up, and screening alone, without exams and glasses, does nothing for achievement. (Reading +0.09 SD at 1 year overall, +0.28 SD for lowest-quartile readers (Baltimore RCT); math +0.11 to +0.16 SD (China cluster RCTs); FCAT pass rate +2 pct points averaged over all students (Florida RCT); no sustained effect at 2 years without follow-up.)
Mixed evidence. Effects fade: Baltimore found no sustained impact at two years and no effect on the state PARCC test, and the Florida trial also reports fade-out. Screening without a guaranteed exam and glasses did not raise achievement in Florida, and the 2018 Cochrane review found only low-certainty evidence that school screening programs by themselves improve outcomes. Compliance is the binding constraint: many students stop wearing or lose their glasses within months, and the Baltimore and Los Angeles programs needed replacement pairs and classroom follow-up. Math effects in the US trials were small (0.03 SD in Baltimore elementary grades) and the Los Angeles study was observational.
Standard. Every student is screened for distance and near vision at school entry and at least every two years thereafter (and whenever a teacher refers), every student who fails is guaranteed a comprehensive eye exam and glasses at no cost to the family, delivered on site or through a partner within 90 days, with a replacement pair and a documented wear check each semester.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain.
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The Coordinator of Health Services adopts an evidence-based screening protocol for distance and near vision and sets the screening calendar for kindergarten and grades 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9 within 30 days.
- The Coordinator of Health Services trains every school nurse and designated screening staff on the protocol and on the referral log, including the 60-day exam and 90-day glasses fields, within 60 days.
- The Superintendent signs an agreement with a school-based vision partner (optometrist or ophthalmologist) to deliver comprehensive exams and glasses on site or by referral, and the business office sets up Medicaid EPSDT and private insurance billing, within 90 days.
- Each school nurse opens the referral log and begins screening newly enrolled and teacher-referred students immediately, recording every failed screening on the day it occurs.
Year one
- Each school nurse completes screening of every student in the designated grades and every student not screened within the previous two years, and arranges an exam and glasses for every student who fails within 90 calendar days of referral.
- Classroom teachers conduct the semester wear check for every student with prescribed glasses, document it in the referral log, and the nurse contacts the family of any student without glasses and issues a replacement pair on request.
- The Coordinator of Health Services matches students who received glasses to the district's benchmark assessment and delivers the first report to the Board by December 15, by school and by grade.
Ongoing
- The Coordinator of Health Services reports to the Board each December 15 the screening, referral, 60-day exam, 90-day glasses, wear-check and reading-growth figures by school and grade.
- Each school nurse re-screens every student at least every two years and continues the semester wear check and replacement-pair process, since the research shows gains fade by year two without follow-up.
| Measure | From the school nurse's referral log and the district benchmark assessment: share of students screened each year by grade; share of referred students examined within 60 days and fitted with glasses within 90 days; share still wearing glasses at the semester classroom check; reading growth of students who received glasses versus their prior-year growth. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First year of the referral log: the share of students screened by grade, the share of referrals that reached an exam and glasses within 60 and 90 days, the share wearing glasses at the first semester check, and the prior-year reading growth of the students later fitted with glasses. |
| Target | By the end of year one, every student in the designated grades is screened, every student who fails screening is examined within 60 days and fitted with glasses within 90 days, and the share wearing glasses at each semester check rises from the first check onward; by the end of year two, reading growth of students who received glasses exceeds their own prior-year growth, with the largest gains among students in the lowest baseline reading quartile and students in special education. |
| Benchmark | Baltimore cluster RCT (2,304 students, grades 3 to 7): reading +0.09 SD at one year overall, +0.28 SD for the lowest baseline quartile, +0.25 SD for students in special education; China cluster RCTs: math +0.11 to +0.16 SD; Florida RCT: FCAT pass rate +2 percentage points. No sustained effect at two years without replacement glasses and wear follow-up, so the wear-check and replacement figures are the leading indicators. |
| Reported | Coordinator of Health Services to the Board by December 15 each year, by school and by grade, with the semester wear-check results and the 60-day and 90-day delivery shares shown separately so the Board can see whether the follow-up that sustains the effect is happening. |
Sources. Neitzel AJ, Wolf B, Guo X, et al. (2021). Effect of a randomized interventional school-based vision program on academic performance of students in grades 3 to 7: A cluster randomized clinical trial. JAMA Ophthalmology 139(10):1104-1114. doi · Glewwe P, Park A, Zhao M (2016). A better vision for development: Eyeglasses and academic performance in rural primary schools in China. Journal of Development Economics 122:170-182. doi · Ma X, Zhou Z, Yi H, et al. (2014). Effect of providing free glasses on children's educational outcomes in China: Cluster randomized controlled trial. BMJ 349:g5740. doi · Glewwe P, West KL, Lee J (2018). The impact of providing vision screening and free eyeglasses on academic outcomes: Evidence from a randomized trial in Title I elementary schools in Florida. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 37(2):265-300. doi · Slavin RE, Collins ME, Repka MX, et al. (2018). In plain sight: Reading outcomes of providing eyeglasses to disadvantaged children. Journal of Education for Students Placed at Risk 23(3):250-258. doi · Dudovitz RN, Sim MS, Elashoff D, et al. (2020). Receipt of corrective lenses and academic performance of low-income students. Academic Pediatrics 20(4):527-533. doi · Evans JR, Morjaria P, Powell C (2018). Vision screening for correctable visual acuity deficits in school-age children and adolescents. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 2:CD005023. doi
◐ Partial 1/4Seated lunch time246 Wellness
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 2/5
Research. Children with fewer than 20 minutes seated to eat consume less of their lunch, especially fruit and vegetables: in a randomized crossover trial, 10 minutes of seated time versus 20 cut fruit consumption by 11 percentage points and vegetables by 14 points, and observational cafeteria studies in Massachusetts and California show the same pattern at scale. CDC guidance is at least 20 minutes seated after being served. (10 vs 20 seated minutes: fruit consumption -11 percentage points, vegetables -14 points (RCT); under 20 minutes: entree, milk and vegetable consumption all lower (observational); longer lunch period raises odds of eating fruit 1.4x and vegetables 1.5x)
Mixed evidence. The only randomized trial (Burg et al. 2021) enrolled 38 children at a university summer camp, not a school cafeteria, and found no difference in entree or beverage consumption between 10 and 20 minutes. The school-based studies are cross-sectional and cannot rule out that schools with longer lunches differ in other ways. No study links seated lunch minutes to achievement or attendance; the outcome evidence is dietary intake and plate waste. Longer lunches cost instructional minutes or require staggered periods and more cafeteria supervision.
Standard. Every building schedule provides each student at least 20 minutes seated to eat lunch after being served, and the district measures and reports seated time, not period length.
Checklist. 1 of 4 elements of the standard are in the manual, 1 partly.
- ✓The policy guarantees every student at least 20 minutes seated to eat lunch after being served. core 246 Wellness
- ◐The policy applies the seated lunch time requirement to every building schedule in the district. partly, 246 Wellness
- ✕The policy requires the district to measure seated eating time rather than lunch period length.
- ✕The policy requires the district to report seated eating time, not period length.
What the manual says. 246 Wellness, revised August 21, 2017:
Recommended. New policy (health and wellbeing)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Food Services, with each building principal, observes serving-line time in every cafeteria within 30 days and records minutes from the last student served to the end of each lunch period.
- The Superintendent compares each building's master schedule against the observed line times and lists every lunch period that gives any student fewer than 20 seated minutes within 60 days.
- Each principal of a building below 20 seated minutes submits a dated correction plan to the Superintendent within 90 days, covering schedule changes, added serving lines, or staggered release to the cafeteria.
- Elementary principals report to the Superintendent within 90 days whether their facility permits recess before lunch and the date by which it will be scheduled.
Year one
- Each principal implements the correction plan so that every lunch period in the building provides 20 seated minutes for lunch and 10 seated minutes for breakfast by the start of the next school year.
- The Director of Food Services repeats the serving-line observation in every cafeteria in the second semester and reports seated minutes by building and lunch period to the Superintendent.
- The Director of Food Services adds plate-waste or production-record data for fruit and vegetables to the report so the Board can see whether consumption moves with seated time.
- The Superintendent presents seated lunch minutes by building, the number of buildings below 20 minutes, and a dated correction plan for each in the annual wellness report at the first regular Board meeting in October.
Ongoing
- The Director of Food Services and each principal observe serving-line times once each semester and report seated minutes by building and lunch period to the Superintendent.
- The Superintendent includes seated lunch minutes, the count of buildings below 20 minutes, and dated correction plans in every annual wellness report presented to the Board by its first regular October meeting.
| Measure | Seated lunch minutes per lunch period by building, measured from the time the last student in line is served to the end of the period, from the master schedule plus a cafeteria line-time observation each semester; the share of buildings meeting 20 seated minutes; fruit and vegetable plate-waste or production-record data from food service. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First-semester serving-line observation in every cafeteria within 90 days of adoption, establishing seated minutes per lunch period, the number of buildings below 20 minutes, and current fruit and vegetable plate waste. |
| Target | Every building and every lunch period provides at least 20 seated minutes for lunch and 10 for breakfast by the start of the next school year, with the count of buildings below 20 minutes at zero in each annual report thereafter and fruit and vegetable plate waste moving down from baseline over 1 to 3 years. |
| Benchmark | CDC guidance of at least 20 minutes seated after being served; Connecticut General Statutes 10-221o (20-minute lunch period) and Louisiana law (no less than 20 minutes seated); CDC reports about half of districts neither require nor recommend 20 minutes. The entry gives no numeric benchmark for plate waste, so the plate-waste target is directional only. |
| Reported | Annual wellness report presented to the Board no later than its first regular meeting in October, showing seated lunch minutes by building and lunch period, the number of buildings not meeting 20 minutes, a dated correction plan for each, and fruit and vegetable plate-waste or production-record data. |
Sources. Burg X, Metcalfe JJ, Ellison B, Prescott MP (2021). Effects of longer seated lunch time on food consumption and waste in elementary and middle school-age children: A randomized clinical trial. JAMA Network Open 4(6):e2114148. doi · Cohen JFW, Jahn JL, Richardson S, Cluggish SA, Parker E, Rimm EB (2016). Amount of time to eat lunch is associated with children's selection and consumption of school meal entree, fruits, vegetables, and milk. Journal of the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics 116(1):123-128. doi · Gosliner W (2014). School-level factors associated with increased fruit and vegetable consumption among students in California middle and high schools. Journal of School Health 84(9):559-568. doi · Price J, Just DR (2015). Lunch, recess and nutrition: Responding to time incentives in the cafeteria. Preventive Medicine 71:27-30. doi · Hunsberger M, McGinnis P, Smith J, Beamer BA, O'Malley J (2014). Elementary school children's recess schedule and dietary intake at lunch: a community-based participatory research partnership pilot study. BMC Public Health 14:156. doi · Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (2011). School health guidelines to promote healthy eating and physical activity. MMWR Recommendations and Reports 60(RR-5):1-76. link
Family and community
✕ Conflicts 0/6Family engagement and two-way communication918 District-Wide Parental Involvement
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Randomized trials show that specific, frequent, two-way teacher-to-family communication about a child's own effort, attendance and missed work raises engagement and achievement: daily teacher messages increased homework completion 40 percent, weekly one-sentence notes cut course failure 41 percent, automated missed-assignment alerts cut course failures 27 percent, and parent-school meetings in France reduced truancy and discipline sanctions by about 0.15 SD. Meta-analyses of family-school partnership programs find small to moderate positive associations with achievement (r about 0.12 for involvement overall; about 0.3 SD for structured programs), strongest for communication about schoolwork and parental expectations rather than attendance at events. (Teacher-family communication RCTs: homework completion +40%, course failure -27% to -41%, truancy and sanctions -0.15 SD; involvement meta-analyses: r = 0.12 overall, programs about +0.3 SD; achievement effects of information nudges concentrated in grades, not state tests)
Mixed evidence. Most of the 'family engagement' literature is correlational and the strong associations in meta-analyses (Jeynes 2012, Castro 2015) partly reflect which families are already engaged; Hill and Tyson (2009) found school-based involvement (volunteering, attending events) and homework help have the weakest or even negative links to achievement in middle school, so policies that count event attendance measure the wrong thing. The causal trials show effects on grades, homework and course passing but generally not on state test scores (Bergman and Chan 2021, Avvisati et al. 2014), and they involve information about the specific child, delivered by the teacher or an automated system, not generic newsletters or parent nights. Eklund et al. (2022) found the family-school partnership category of attendance interventions had a confidence interval including zero. Take-up collapses under opt-in enrollment, and immigrant and limited-English families report the most barriers, so an unfunded two-way expectation can widen gaps rather than close them.
Standard. Policy sets a measurable district-wide expectation (not only Title I schools) of at least two individualized two-way contacts per family per year about the child's own progress, attendance and missed work, in the family's preferred language, logged in the student information system; requires default enrollment of all families in progress alerts; and requires annual public reporting of contact rates, conference participation and family survey results by school and subgroup.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy requires at least two individualized two-way contacts per family per year about the child's own progress, attendance and missed work. core
- ✕The policy applies the family contact expectation district-wide to all schools, not only Title I schools.
- ✕The policy requires that family contacts be made in the family's preferred language.
- ✕The policy requires that family contacts be logged in the student information system.
- ✕The policy requires default enrollment of all families in progress alerts.
- ✕The policy requires annual public reporting of contact rates, conference participation and family survey results by school and subgroup.
What the manual says. 918 District-Wide Parental Involvement, revised September 24, 2013:
Also governs: 212 Reporting Pupil Progress; 908 Relations With Parents
Recommended. Amend 918 District-Wide Parental Involvement
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent designates the Director of Family Engagement as policy lead and names a principal and a teacher representative from each grade band to a 90-day implementation team.
- The student information system administrator builds the two-way contact log fields (date, mode, language, topic, family response) and a per-student report, and the Director of Family Engagement trains every principal and teacher on logging within 60 days.
- The Chief Technology Officer configures weekly progress alerts for absences, missing assignments and grades below the passing threshold, enrolls every family by default with an opt-out, and the registrar verifies each family's phone number and language preference at enrollment.
- The Director of Family Engagement publishes a one-page contact guide and sample scripts in the district's top five home languages and confirms interpretation is available for calls and conferences.
- Each principal reviews the policy with staff and sets the October 31 and March 31 contact deadlines on the school calendar, with conferences offered at two or more times including one outside working hours.
Year one
- Each principal pulls the contact log monthly and assigns follow-up to the counselor or family liaison for any student whose family has not yet responded to a two-way contact before the October 31 and March 31 deadlines.
- The Director of Family Engagement administers the annual family survey in the district's top five home languages and reports the response rate and results by school and subgroup.
- The Superintendent delivers the first annual report to the Board by November 30 covering two-contact rates, conference participation, alert enrollment and verified phone reach by school and subgroup, and posts it on the district website.
- The Title I coordinator aligns the district and school parent and family engagement policies and school-parent compacts under ESEA Section 1116 with this clause and confirms the 1 percent reservation, with 90 percent passed to schools, funds liaisons and interpretation.
Ongoing
- The registrar re-verifies every family's phone number and language preference each August and the Chief Technology Officer re-enrolls new families in alerts by default.
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by November 30 each year and the Board reviews school and subgroup gaps in two-contact rates and conference participation before adopting the next budget.
- The Director of Family Engagement audits a sample of logged contacts each semester to confirm they were individualized, two-way and in the family's preferred language.
| Measure | Percent of enrolled students whose family received at least two logged, individualized two-way contacts in the school year (one by October 31, one by March 31), by school and subgroup; plus share of families enrolled in alerts and reachable by verified phone, conference participation rate, and family survey response rate and agreement with 'the school tells me how my child is doing' |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Year-one contact log and the first family survey establish the baseline, since no district-wide two-way contact rate exists before the log is built |
| Target | Every school reaches a majority of students with two logged two-way contacts in year one and raises that share each year through year three, with the gap between the lowest and highest subgroup narrowing each year; all families enrolled in alerts by default with a verified phone on file by the end of each August; survey response rate and agreement with 'the school tells me how my child is doing' rising each year |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric benchmark for contact rates; the evidence is from trials of communication practices (homework completion +40 percent, course failure -27 to -41 percent, truancy and sanctions -0.15 SD), not a published target rate, so the target is directional |
| Reported | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by November 30, by school and subgroup, published on the district website, with a mid-year check at the March 31 deadline |
Sources. Kraft MA, Dougherty SM (2013). The effect of teacher-family communication on student engagement: evidence from a randomized field experiment. Journal of Research on Educational Effectiveness 6(3):199-222. doi · Kraft MA, Rogers T (2015). The underutilized potential of teacher-to-parent communication: evidence from a field experiment. Economics of Education Review 47:49-63. doi · Bergman P (2021). Parent-child information frictions and human capital investment: evidence from a field experiment. Journal of Political Economy 129(1):286-322. doi · Bergman P, Chan EW (2021). Leveraging parents through low-cost technology: the impact of high-frequency information on student achievement. Journal of Human Resources 56(1):125-158. doi · Avvisati F, Gurgand M, Guyon N, Maurin E (2014). Getting parents involved: a field experiment in deprived schools. Review of Economic Studies 81(1):57-83. doi · Smith TE, Sheridan SM, Kim EM, Park S, Beretvas SN (2020). The effects of family-school partnership interventions on academic and social-emotional functioning: a meta-analysis exploring what works for whom. Educational Psychology Review 32(2):511-544. doi · Castro M, Exposito-Casas E, Lopez-Martin E, Lizasoain L, Navarro-Asencio E, Gaviria JL (2015). Parental involvement on student academic achievement: a meta-analysis. Educational Research Review 14:33-46. doi · Hill NE, Tyson DF (2009). Parental involvement in middle school: a meta-analytic assessment of the strategies that promote achievement. Developmental Psychology 45(3):740-763. doi · Jeynes W (2012). A meta-analysis of the efficacy of different types of parental involvement programs for urban students. Urban Education 47(4):706-742. doi · York BN, Loeb S, Doss C (2019). One step at a time: the effects of an early literacy text-messaging program for parents of preschoolers. Journal of Human Resources 54(3):537-566. doi · Doss C, Fahle EM, Loeb S, York BN (2019). More than just a nudge: supporting kindergarten parents with differentiated and personalized text messages. Journal of Human Resources 54(3):567-603. doi · Bergman P, Lasky-Fink J, Rogers T (2020). Simplification and defaults affect adoption and impact of technology, but decision makers do not realize it. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes 158:66-79. doi · Gubbels J, van der Put CE, Assink M (2019). Risk factors for school absenteeism and dropout: a meta-analytic review. Journal of Youth and Adolescence 48(9):1637-1667. doi · Eklund K, Burns MK, Oyen K, DeMarchena S, McCollom EM (2022). Addressing chronic absenteeism in schools: a meta-analysis of evidence-based interventions. School Psychology Review 51(1):95-111. doi · Elementary and Secondary Education Act Section 1116, Parent and family engagement, 20 U.S.C. 6318 (as amended by ESSA 2015). link
◐ Partial 0/6Community schools and integrated student supports146 Student Services
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Quasi-experimental evaluations of the two largest community school systems find consistent gains in attendance and behavior and smaller, slower gains in achievement: New York City's 2014 initiative cut chronic absence by 7 to 8 percentage points, raised graduation 4.9 points over three years and credits earned by 1.3 per year, reduced disciplinary incidents in elementary and middle schools, and raised grade 3-8 math by 0.13 SD only in year three with no ELA effect; California's 2022 grantee cohort cut chronic absence about 30 percent and suspensions about 15 percent relative to matched schools with math +0.06 SD and ELA +0.05 SD in the first year. Longitudinal studies of City Connects, the best-studied integrated-support model, show higher middle-school test scores and roughly half the odds of high school dropout for students served in elementary school. (NYC: chronic absence -7.3 points (K-8) and -8.3 points (HS), graduation +4.9 points, credits +1.3/year, math +0.13 SD (year 3 only), ELA null; California: chronic absence -30%, suspensions -15%, math +0.06 SD, ELA +0.05 SD; City Connects: dropout 9.2% vs 16.6%; Michigan caseworkers: chronic absence -8%)
Mixed evidence. No randomized trial of the whole-school community schools model exists; the NYC and California estimates rest on matched-comparison designs that cannot rule out selection into the initiative, and the California window is one year. The one RCT of a core component, Communities In Schools case management (24 secondary schools, two years), found no effect on attendance, achievement, progress or behavior despite higher service receipt, improving only attitudes and relationships; MDRC's quasi-experimental study of the whole-school CIS model found attendance gains in elementary but not secondary schools. Heers et al. (2016), reviewing the literature, concluded that causal evidence for community schools as such is lacking and that extracurricular activities do not appear to raise achievement. Achievement effects where found are small (0.05 to 0.13 SD) and arrive after two to three years; ELA effects are repeatedly null. Costs run from a few hundred dollars per student for a coordinator to several thousand with wraparound services, and the Michigan material-needs program shows effects concentrated in schools with higher dosage and, uncomfortably, in wealthier and less diverse schools.
Standard. Policy defines the community school strategy by its four pillars (integrated student supports, expanded learning time, family and community engagement, collaborative leadership), requires each designated school to have a funded full-time coordinator, an annual needs assessment, a universal student support review, and a lead partner agreement, and requires annual reporting of attendance, discipline and achievement against matched comparison schools.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy defines the community school strategy by four pillars: integrated student supports, expanded learning time, family and community engagement, collaborative leadership. core
- ✕The policy requires each designated community school to have a funded full-time coordinator.
- ✕The policy requires each designated community school to conduct an annual needs assessment.
- ✕The policy requires each designated community school to conduct a universal student support review.
- ✕The policy requires each designated community school to have a lead partner agreement.
- ✕The policy requires annual reporting of attendance, discipline and achievement against matched comparison schools.
What the manual says. 146 Student Services, revised November 4, 2019:
Recommended. Amend 146 Student Services
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent identifies every school in which 60 percent or more of students are eligible for free or reduced-price meals, are English learners or are in foster care, and presents the eligible list to the Board.
- The Board designates the first cohort of community schools from the eligible list and the Chief Financial Officer identifies Title I schoolwide, state community school and Title IV Part F funds for coordinator salaries.
- The Superintendent posts and fills a full-time coordinator position for each designated school, employed by the district or a lead partner.
- The Superintendent negotiates and brings to the Board a signed lead partner agreement for each designated school.
- Each principal convenes a site leadership team of the principal, the coordinator, at least two teachers, at least two parents and a community partner and schedules monthly meetings.
Year one
- Each coordinator completes the needs and assets assessment of students, families and the neighborhood by October 31 and reviews the findings with the site leadership team.
- Each coordinator leads a review of every enrolled student at least once during the year and logs identified needs and the service connected in the student support system.
- The research or data office identifies for each designated school the three district schools most similar in enrollment and poverty and sets up the comparison reporting.
- The Superintendent delivers the first annual report to the Board by December 31 covering coordinator staffing, signed agreements, the 30-school-day service match rate, and attendance, suspension, course-passing and assessment results against comparison schools.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by December 31 each year on each designated school against its three comparison schools and presents the per-pupil cost of the strategy in the annual budget.
- Each coordinator repeats the needs and assets assessment by October 31 each year and the universal student review, and the site leadership team continues to meet monthly.
- The Board reviews the designation list annually and adds or removes schools based on eligibility and reported results.
| Measure | For each designated school: full-time coordinator in place, signed lead partner agreement, share of identified student needs matched to a service within 30 school days, and chronic absence, suspension and course-passing rates compared with the three most similar district schools. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Prior-year chronic absence, suspension and course-passing rates at each designated school and its three comparison schools, recorded before designation; no needs are logged before the first student review. |
| Target | By the first December 31 report, every designated school has a full-time coordinator and a signed lead partner agreement and has matched 90 percent of identified needs to a service within 30 school days; within 1 to 3 years, chronic absence and suspension rates at designated schools fall relative to their comparison schools, with a direction of improvement in course-passing rates. |
| Benchmark | Evaluated systems show chronic absence reductions of 7 to 8 percentage points (New York City) and about 30 percent with suspensions down about 15 percent (California) relative to comparison schools; achievement gains were small and slow, math +0.13 SD only in year three in New York City and +0.06 SD math and +0.05 SD ELA in the first year in California, so attendance and discipline are the earlier signals. |
| Reported | Superintendent's written report to the Board by December 31 each year, one page per designated school showing staffing, agreement status, the 30-school-day match rate, and the three-school comparison on attendance, suspension, course-passing and state assessment results, with the per-pupil cost shown in the annual budget. |
Sources. Johnston WR, Engberg J, Opper IM, Sontag-Padilla L, Xenakis L (2020). Illustrating the promise of community schools: an assessment of the impact of the New York City Community Schools Initiative. RR-3245-NYCCEO. RAND Corporation. doi · Swain W, Leung-Gagne M, Maier A, Rubinstein CF (2025). Community schools impact on student outcomes: evidence from California. Learning Policy Institute. doi · Heers M, Van Klaveren C, Groot W, Maassen van den Brink H (2016). Community schools: what we know and what we need to know. Review of Educational Research 86(4):1016-1051. doi · Maier A, Daniel J, Oakes J, Lam L (2017). Community schools as an effective school improvement strategy: a review of the evidence. Learning Policy Institute and National Education Policy Center. link · Walsh ME, Madaus GF, Raczek AE, Dearing E, Foley C, An C, Lee-St. John TJ, Beaton A (2014). A new model for student support in high-poverty urban elementary schools: effects on elementary and middle school academic outcomes. American Educational Research Journal 51(4):704-737. doi · Lee-St. John TJ, Walsh ME, Raczek AE, Vuilleumier CE, Foley C, Heberle A, Sibley E, Dearing E (2018). The long-term impact of systemic student support in elementary school: reducing high school dropout. AERA Open 4(4). doi · Dearing E, Walsh ME, Sibley E, Lee-St. John T, Foley C, Raczek AE (2016). Can community and school-based supports improve the achievement of first-generation immigrant children attending high-poverty schools? Child Development 87(3):883-897. doi · Sokol R, Degli Esposti M, Victor BG, Kernsmith P, Medina Del Toro V, Heinze J, Portugal J, Grinnell R, Gernaat E (2025). A school-based material needs intervention for chronic absenteeism: a state-wide staggered interrupted time series analysis. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health 80(3):174-181. doi · Parise L, Corrin W, Granito K, Haider Z, Somers MA, Cerna O (2017). Two years of case management: final findings from the Communities In Schools random assignment evaluation. MDRC. link · Biag M, Castrechini S (2016). Coordinated strategies to help the whole child: examining the contributions of full-service community schools. Journal of Education for Students Placed at Risk 21(3):157-173. doi
○ SilentLanguage access for familiesno governing section
Tier D: professional standard or expert consensusstakes 3/5
Research. Federal civil rights law (Title VI, the Equal Educational Opportunities Act and Lau v. Nichols) requires districts to communicate with limited-English parents in a language they understand, and IDEA requires native-language notices and interpreters for special education. Nationally representative data show that immigrant parents report the most barriers to school involvement and that English ability predicts how involved they are; the largest communication RCT that improved attendance (131,312 students) delivered its notices in five languages, and a vendor-funded matched study of a translated two-way messaging platform reports attendance gains concentrated among English learner and Latino families. (Compliance obligation; involvement gap by English proficiency documented in ECLS-K and PISA; translated two-way messaging platform (vendor study): absence -24% in Tulsa, larger gains for ELs; no causal estimate of translation itself)
Mixed evidence. No randomized or quasi-experimental study isolates the effect of translating or interpreting school communication on student outcomes; the trials that used home-language messages did not report results by language, and the strongest platform evidence (TalkingPoints) is produced by the vendor from matched comparisons. Machine translation can carry errors in high-stakes documents (discipline notices, IEPs, consent forms), and Cheatham (2011) documents interpretation in special education that fails IDEA's participation and consent standards even when an interpreter is present. Federal enforcement has weakened: Executive Order 14224 (March 2025) revoked EO 13166, the Department of Justice rescinded its LEP guidance in July 2025, and the Department of Education rescinded the January 2015 Dear Colleague letter in August 2025; the statutes and Lau remain binding but complaint-driven enforcement is less predictable, so the obligation increasingly rests on district policy and state law.
Standard. Policy identifies each family's preferred language at enrollment, translates all vital documents into every language spoken by 5 percent or 1,000 families (whichever is less) and provides free qualified interpretation on request for any language, prohibits reliance on children or untrained staff as interpreters, names a district language access coordinator, and reports delivery rates by language annually.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (family and community)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent names a language access coordinator within 30 days and announces the role to all principals and front office staff.
- The coordinator adds a preferred-language field for written and spoken communication to the enrollment form and the student information system within 60 days.
- The coordinator pulls a count of enrolled families by home language from the student information system and identifies every language spoken by at least 5 percent of families or 1,000 families, whichever is less.
- The coordinator contracts with a qualified interpretation and translation vendor, including remote interpretation for unscheduled contacts, within 90 days.
- The coordinator issues written direction to all schools that students, siblings, other children and staff without demonstrated proficiency may not be used as interpreters except in an emergency to arrange a qualified interpreter.
Year one
- The coordinator oversees translation of every vital document category named in the clause into each qualifying language and posts the list of translated documents and the language access plan on the district website.
- Principals confirm each family's preferred language in August and ensure it is recorded in the student information system.
- The coordinator sets up tracking of interpreter requests, fulfillment dates and notice delivery by language in the student information system so that requests can be checked against the five school day timeline.
- The coordinator trains front office staff, counselors, special education staff and administrators on how to request interpreters and how to route vital documents for translation.
Ongoing
- The coordinator reports to the Board by October 31 each year on families by preferred language, share of required notices delivered in the family's language, interpreter requests and fulfillment times, conference and IEP participation of limited-English families compared with all families, and complaints received.
- Principals reconfirm preferred language with every family each August and the coordinator updates the qualifying-language list from the new enrollment counts.
- The coordinator reviews any machine-translated vital document with a proficient speaker before release and investigates every complaint about language access.
| Measure | Share of families with a recorded home language other than English who received each required notice category (enrollment, discipline, special education, attendance, health, emergency) in their preferred language, share of interpreter requests fulfilled within five school days, and conference and IEP meeting participation rates of limited-English families compared with all families. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First-year report to the Board by October 31 establishes the baseline for each measure; before this policy most districts have no recorded preferred language and cannot report delivery by language. |
| Target | Within 1 to 3 years, the share of required notices delivered in the family's preferred language rises each year, every interpreter request is fulfilled within five school days or sooner where a legal deadline applies, and the gap in conference and IEP participation between limited-English families and all families narrows year over year. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric benchmark for delivery rates or participation gaps; the only numeric thresholds are the 5 percent or 1,000 family translation trigger, the five school day interpreter timeline, and the October 31 reporting date. The vendor study of translated two-way messaging reports absence down 24 percent in Tulsa with larger gains for English learners, but the entry notes no causal estimate of translation itself, so that figure is not a target. |
| Reported | The language access coordinator reports to the Board by October 31 each year in a public written report, broken out by language, with interpreter fulfillment times, participation rate comparisons and complaints received. |
Sources. Turney K, Kao G (2009). Barriers to school involvement: are immigrant parents disadvantaged? Journal of Educational Research 102(4):257-271. doi · Kim Y (2009). Minority parental involvement and school barriers: moving the focus away from deficiencies of parents. Educational Research Review 4(2):80-102. doi · Cheatham GA (2011). Language interpretation, parent participation, and young children with disabilities. Topics in Early Childhood Special Education 31(2):78-88. doi · OECD (2017). PISA 2015 Results (Volume III): Students' Well-Being. OECD Publishing, Paris. doi · Lasky-Fink J, Robinson CD, Chang HN, Rogers T (2021). Using behavioral insights to improve school administrative communications: the case of truancy notifications. Educational Researcher 50(7):442-450. doi · TalkingPoints (2025). Boosting attendance and reducing suspensions with TalkingPoints: a two-year quasi-experimental study in a large urban district. link · Lau v. Nichols, 414 U.S. 563 (1974). link · Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 42 U.S.C. 2000d. link · Equal Educational Opportunities Act of 1974, 20 U.S.C. 1703(f). link · Elementary and Secondary Education Act Section 1116(f), 20 U.S.C. 6318(f). link · 34 CFR 300.503(c) and 300.322(e), Individuals with Disabilities Education Act regulations on prior written notice and parent participation. link · US Department of Education Office for Civil Rights and US Department of Justice (2015). Dear Colleague Letter: English learner students and limited English proficient parents. January 7, 2015. Rescinded August 2025 and retained online for historical purposes. link · US Department of Justice, Office of the Attorney General (2025). Memorandum: Implementation of Executive Order 14224, Designating English as the Official Language of the United States. July 14, 2025. link
○ SilentAttendance messaging to familiesno governing section
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. Large randomized trials show that plain, personalized letters and text messages telling families how many days their child has missed, and why it matters, reduce chronic absence by about 10 to 15 percent (2 to 7 percentage points) at a cost of roughly $6 to $9 per student or $5 to $10 per added day of attendance. Supportive, simply worded messages outperform legalistic ones, and automated alerts about missed classes and assignments also cut course failure in secondary school. (Mailings: chronic absence -10% (K-12) to -15% (K-5); texts: -2 to -7 points in grades 3-5, -20% in Head Start; supportive truancy notice: 40% more effective than standard notice; cost $5 to $10 per added day)
Mixed evidence. Effects on attendance are real but modest: a 10 percent reduction in chronic absence leaves nine in ten chronically absent students still absent, and the adaptive-text trial found no achievement gain after one year. Message content matters less than expected (benefit-framed and consequence-framed texts performed alike), while delivery details matter a lot: an opt-in default for an alert platform produced near-zero take-up compared with opt-out (Bergman, Lasky-Fink and Rogers 2020). Nudges that worked in district trials have failed when scaled by states or national organizations in another domain (FAFSA completion), so district-level ownership and data linkage appear to be preconditions. Check & Connect mentoring produced larger per-student gains than letters but at roughly 50 times the cost per added day, so messaging is a complement to, not a substitute for, case management for the most absent students.
Standard. Policy requires the district to send every family a plain-language, personalized absence update (days missed, why it matters, whom to call) at least when a student reaches 5 and 10 percent absence and again at each term, by mail and text in the family's preferred language, with supportive rather than legalistic wording, and to maintain current family contact information; legal truancy notices required by state law must use the same plain-language format.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain (1 sections touch related words but do not govern it).
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The student information system administrator runs a contact data audit within 30 days and reports to the Superintendent the percent of students with a verified mailing address, a verified mobile number, and a recorded preferred language.
- The Director of Student Services drafts the 5 percent, 10 percent, and end-of-term message templates at or below a sixth-grade reading level, stating days missed, a comparison with typical attendance, why attendance matters, and a named staff contact with phone number, and has them translated into each language spoken by at least one family.
- District legal counsel reviews the state-required truancy notice and rewrites it in the same plain-language format with the required legal content appended, within 60 days.
- Each principal names one staff member per school as the attendance contact whose phone number appears in messages, and the Superintendent confirms the list within 60 days.
- The student information system administrator configures automated triggers at 5 percent and 10 percent absence and at each grading period, with default enrollment and an opt-out flag, and tests them on a sample of records within 90 days.
Year one
- School registrars verify each family's address, mobile number, and preferred language at enrollment and again at the start of the school year, and the student information system administrator reports completeness to the Superintendent at 180 days.
- The Director of Student Services launches messaging districtwide by the first grading period and reviews the messaging log monthly to confirm that families are messaged within 10 school days of a student reaching 5 percent absence.
- The Superintendent delivers the first report to the Board by October 31 covering verified contact information, messages sent by language, timeliness at the 5 percent trigger, and chronic absence by school and subgroup.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 31 each year on the four measures named in the clause.
- The Director of Student Services reviews the message templates and translation list each summer and removes any wording that threatens fines, prosecution, or exclusion.
- The student information system administrator re-runs the contact data audit at the start of each school year and flags schools with incomplete records to their principals.
| Measure | Share of students reaching 5 percent absence whose family received a personalized absence message in the family's preferred language within 10 school days, from the student information system messaging log; chronic absence rate by school and subgroup; and percent of students with a verified phone number or address on file. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Prior-year chronic absence rate by school and subgroup from district records, the contact data audit completed in the first 30 days, and the messaging timeliness rate from the first full year of operation. |
| Target | Messaging timeliness at the 5 percent trigger rises each year from the first-year rate; verified contact information coverage rises each year from the 30-day audit; and the district chronic absence rate falls from the prior-year baseline within 1 to 3 years, with a reduction of about 10 percent (K-12) to 15 percent (K-5) as the reference range from the evidence. |
| Benchmark | Randomized trials: mailings reduced chronic absence about 10 percent (K-12) to 15 percent (K-5); texts reduced it 2 to 7 percentage points in grades 3 to 5 and 20 percent in Head Start; supportive truancy notices were 40 percent more effective than standard notices; cost about $6 to $9 per student or $5 to $10 per added day of attendance. The entry gives no numeric benchmark for messaging timeliness or contact information completeness. |
| Reported | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by October 31, covering the prior year, with the four measures broken out by school, subgroup, and language. |
Sources. Rogers T, Feller A (2018). Reducing student absences at scale by targeting parents' misbeliefs. Nature Human Behaviour 2(5):335-342. doi · Robinson CD, Lee MG, Dearing E, Rogers T (2018). Reducing student absenteeism in the early grades by targeting parental beliefs. American Educational Research Journal 55(6):1163-1192. doi · Lasky-Fink J, Robinson CD, Chang HN, Rogers T (2021). Using behavioral insights to improve school administrative communications: the case of truancy notifications. Educational Researcher 50(7):442-450. doi · Heppen JB, Kurki A, Brown S (2020). Can texting parents improve attendance in elementary school? A test of an adaptive messaging strategy. NCEE 2020-006. Institute of Education Sciences, US Department of Education. link · Bergman P, Chan EW (2021). Leveraging parents through low-cost technology: the impact of high-frequency information on student achievement. Journal of Human Resources 56(1):125-158. doi · Kalil A, Mayer SE, Gallegos S (2021). Using behavioral insights to increase attendance at subsidized preschool programs: the Show Up to Grow Up intervention. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes 163:65-79. doi · Smythe-Leistico K, Page LC (2018). Connect-Text: leveraging text-message communication to mitigate chronic absenteeism and improve parental engagement in the earliest years of schooling. Journal of Education for Students Placed at Risk 23(1-2):139-152. doi · Bergman P, Lasky-Fink J, Rogers T (2020). Simplification and defaults affect adoption and impact of technology, but decision makers do not realize it. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes 158:66-79. doi · Kraft MA, Rogers T (2015). The underutilized potential of teacher-to-parent communication: evidence from a field experiment. Economics of Education Review 47:49-63. doi · Guryan J, Christenson S, Cureton A, Lai I, Ludwig J, Schwarz C, Shirey E, Turner MC (2021). The effect of mentoring on school attendance and academic outcomes: a randomized evaluation of the Check & Connect program. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 40(3):841-882. doi · Bird KA, Castleman BL, Denning JT, Goodman J, Lamberton C, Rosinger KO (2021). Nudging at scale: experimental evidence from FAFSA completion campaigns. Journal of Economic Behavior and Organization 183:105-128. doi · Eklund K, Burns MK, Oyen K, DeMarchena S, McCollom EM (2022). Addressing chronic absenteeism in schools: a meta-analysis of evidence-based interventions. School Psychology Review 51(1):95-111. doi
○ SilentTeacher home visitsno governing section
Tier C: consistent correlational evidencestakes 2/5
Research. Matched-comparison studies of relationship-building teacher home visits (the Parent Teacher Home Visits model and the DC Family Engagement Partnership) consistently find that visited students are less likely to be chronically absent (21 to 24 percent lower odds or fewer absences), somewhat more likely to score proficient in reading, and have fewer disciplinary incidents, with small positive effects on grades (d about 0.12) and math (about 0.11 SD). Schools that visit at least 10 percent of families show school-wide attendance gains that reach non-visited students. (Chronic absence odds -21% (visited students) and -22% (schools visiting 10%+ of families); ELA proficiency odds +35% at school level; attendance +0.35 points and disciplinary incidents 9.3% vs 12.2% in DC; math +0.11 SD; grades d = 0.12 to 0.13)
Mixed evidence. No randomized trial of teacher home visits in US K-12 has been published; every outcome study uses matched or regression-adjusted comparison groups, and families who accept a visit (or teachers who volunteer to make them) likely differ from those who do not, so the estimates are upper bounds. Effects on achievement are small and inconsistent: Sheldon and Jung (2018) found ELA gains at the school level only in some districts and math gains in two of four; the DC study found math but not ELA gains; Wright et al. (2018) found higher positive-behavior points and grades but no difference in discipline points. Most evaluations were commissioned by the program or its funders. Cost is real: visits take 30 to 60 minutes of paid teacher time outside the school day per family plus training, and the model's own fidelity rules (voluntary for both sides, no targeting of 'problem' students, no agenda beyond hopes and dreams) limit who gets visited. The well-known RCT evidence on home visiting (nurse and parent-educator visits to families of infants) is a different intervention and should not be cited for teacher visits.
Standard. Policy authorizes and funds voluntary, paid, relationship-building teacher home visits following a recognized model (visits in pairs, trained staff, family's language, no targeting of 'problem' students), sets a reach target of at least 10 percent of families per school with priority on transition grades and chronically absent students who volunteer, and requires annual reporting of reach and attendance outcomes.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain.
Recommended.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent designates a Director of Family Engagement as program lead and selects a recognized relationship-building home visit model (such as Parent Teacher Home Visits) for district-wide use.
- The Director of Family Engagement and the Chief Financial Officer calculate the cost of training, hourly pay or stipends, and interpreter services to reach at least 10 percent of enrolled families per school and present the line item to the Board.
- The Superintendent negotiates stipend or hourly-rate terms with the teachers' association and secures Board approval of the pay schedule for training and visits outside the contract day.
- The Director of Family Engagement contracts for model-provider training and schedules a first cohort of volunteer teachers and staff from every school, with bilingual staff recruited in each school's major home languages.
- The Chief Information Officer adds a home visit log to the student information system that records each visit's date, school, grade, language, staff pair, and whether the student was chronically absent in the prior year.
Year one
- Each principal offers a visit to every family of a student entering kindergarten, sixth grade, or ninth grade and to every family of a student chronically absent in the prior year, and tracks offers and completed visits in the program log.
- The Director of Family Engagement audits a sample of visit logs each semester to confirm that visits are made in pairs, in the family's preferred language, and are not targeted by discipline history or used to enforce attendance.
- The Director of Research compares chronic absence and course-passing rates of visited and non-visited students in the same schools, adjusted for prior-year attendance, and the Superintendent delivers the first report to the Board by September 30.
- The Director of Family Engagement schedules second-visit offers for visited families in the spring and reports the share accepted.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by September 30 each year, by school, on the share of families visited, visits by language, staff participation, and outcomes of visited versus non-visited students, and includes the program in the annual budget.
- Principals of schools below the 10 percent reach target submit a recruitment plan to the Director of Family Engagement within 60 days of the annual report.
- The Director of Family Engagement retrains staff annually and refreshes bilingual visitor and interpreter capacity to match enrollment.
| Measure | Percent of enrolled families receiving at least one relationship-building home visit per year, by school and grade band, and the chronic absence rate of visited versus non-visited students in the same schools, adjusted for prior-year attendance; also share of visits in the family's home language and teacher participation rate. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Prior-year chronic absence rate for each school and for the kindergarten, sixth grade, and ninth grade cohorts, plus the number of families visited in the year before adoption (likely zero in most schools), recorded from the student information system before the first visits. |
| Target | Every school reaches at least 10 percent of enrolled families with a visit within 1 to 3 years, with all transition-grade and prior-year chronically absent families offered a visit in year one; visited students show a lower chronic absence rate than comparable non-visited students in the same schools in each annual report, and no visits are logged as selected by discipline history. |
| Benchmark | Matched-comparison studies of the Parent Teacher Home Visits model and the DC Family Engagement Partnership found 21 percent lower odds of chronic absence for visited students, 22 percent lower odds at schools visiting 10 percent or more of families, 35 percent higher odds of ELA proficiency at the school level, disciplinary incidents of 9.3 percent versus 12.2 percent, math gains of about 0.11 SD, and grade effects of d = 0.12 to 0.13; evidence tier C, so the Board should treat these as the direction and rough scale of expected effects rather than guaranteed results. |
| Reported | The Superintendent reports to the Board by September 30 each year, by school: number and share of families visited, visits by language, staff participation, offer and completion rates for transition grades and prior-year chronically absent students, and chronic absence and course-passing rates of visited versus non-visited students adjusted for prior-year attendance. |
Sources. Sheldon SB, Jung SB (2018). Student outcomes and parent teacher home visits. Center on School, Family, and Community Partnerships, Johns Hopkins University, for Parent Teacher Home Visits. link · Sheldon SB, Jung SB (2015). The Family Engagement Partnership: student outcome evaluation. Center on School, Family, and Community Partnerships, Johns Hopkins University, for Flamboyan Foundation and District of Columbia Public Schools. link · McKie A, Terziev J, Gill B (2021). Impacts of home visits on students in District of Columbia Public Schools. REL 2022-128. Regional Educational Laboratory Mid-Atlantic, Institute of Education Sciences. link · Wright KB, Shields SM, Black K, Waxman HC (2018). The effects of teacher home visits on student behavior, student academic achievement, and parent involvement. School Community Journal 28(1):67-90. link · Meyer JA, Mann MB (2006). Teachers' perceptions of the benefits of home visits for early elementary children. Early Childhood Education Journal 34(1):93-97. doi · Cook PJ, Dodge KA, Gifford EJ, Schulting AB (2017). A new program to prevent primary school absenteeism: results of a pilot study in five schools. Children and Youth Services Review 82:262-270. doi · Kraft MA, Dougherty SM (2013). The effect of teacher-family communication on student engagement: evidence from a randomized field experiment. Journal of Research on Educational Effectiveness 6(3):199-222. doi · Smith TE, Sheridan SM, Kim EM, Park S, Beretvas SN (2020). The effects of family-school partnership interventions on academic and social-emotional functioning: a meta-analysis exploring what works for whom. Educational Psychology Review 32(2):511-544. doi · Attendance Works and Parent Teacher Home Visits (2019). Parent Teacher Home Visits: improving attendance through relationship-building home visits. link
Staffing and instruction
◐ Partial 0/6Class size in the early grades126 Class Size
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. The Tennessee STAR experiment shows that classes of 13 to 17 students in K-3 raise test scores by about 4 percentile points in the first year and roughly 1 point a year after, with larger gains for Black students and students on free lunch, and the same students were 2.7 percentage points more likely to attend college. Large-scale rollouts deliver less than the experiment because they dilute teacher quality and cost a great deal per student. (STAR: +0.2 SD in K-3, college attendance +2.7 pp (+7.3 pp in the poorest third of schools); Campbell review pooled effect on reading small, on math null; California CSR gains partly offset by inexperienced teachers)
Mixed evidence. Hoxby (2000) finds no effect of class size in Connecticut and rules out even modest effects. Leuven and Lokken (2020) find no average long-run effect of class size in Norway. The Campbell systematic review (Filges et al. 2018) finds at best a small effect on reading and a non-significant negative effect on math across ten studies. Jepsen and Rivkin (2009) show that California's statewide reduction to 20 students raised achievement but the rush to hire 25,000 new teachers brought in uncertified and inexperienced staff, which dampened the gains most in high-poverty, high-minority schools. Chetty et al. (2011) find small classes raised college attendance but the effect on earnings at 27 is not statistically significant. Class size reduction is among the most expensive interventions per unit of effect; most reviews conclude money is better spent on teacher quality once classes are below the mid-20s.
Standard. The policy shall set a numeric K-3 class-size cap (not above 20 students, or 22 with a full-time aide), shall apply the cap first in the highest-poverty schools, and shall pair any class-size reduction with a certification requirement for the teachers hired to meet it.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy sets a numeric K-3 class-size cap not above 20 students, or 22 students with a full-time aide. core
- ✕The policy applies the cap to each individual class section rather than as a district-wide average.
- ✕The policy applies the class-size cap first in the highest-poverty schools.
- ✕The policy requires that teachers hired to meet a class-size reduction hold full certification.
- ✕The policy requires Board notice before any waiver of the K-3 class-size cap.
- ✕The policy requires reporting of actual K-3 class sizes against the cap.
What the manual says. 126 Class Size, revised June 20, 1994:
Recommended. Amend 126 Class Size
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent pulls October enrollment from the student information system and publishes the average and maximum K-3 section size for every school, flagging each section above 20 students (or 22 with a full-time aide).
- The Director of Human Resources audits every current K-3 teacher of record and reports to the Superintendent the share without full state certification, by school.
- The Chief Financial Officer ranks schools by share of students eligible for free or reduced-price meals and costs out the teachers, aides and rooms needed to bring the highest-poverty schools under the cap first.
- The Superintendent brings the Board a written list of every section currently above the cap with the reason for each and a schedule for closing the gap, and requests written Board approval for any section that will stay above the cap this year.
Year one
- The Director of Human Resources posts and fills K-3 positions for the next school year only with fully certified candidates, and reports monthly to the Superintendent on the share of offers made to uncertified applicants (target zero).
- The Superintendent assigns new sections, aides and rooms for the next school year to the highest-poverty schools first, so every K-3 section in those schools opens under the cap.
- The Superintendent files the first full compliance report to the Board by October 31, by school and grade, covering average and maximum size, sections above the cap with reasons, and the share of K-3 teachers without full certification.
- The Director of Assessment adds K-3 reading and math benchmark growth by school to the same October report so the Board can read class size and learning results side by side.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 31 every year and brings any section still above the cap for written Board approval, with the Board minutes recording the reason.
- The Director of Human Resources reports each spring the share of K-3 teachers hired in the past year who hold full state certification, and the Superintendent explains any hire that does not.
| Measure | Share of K-3 general education sections above the cap (20 students, or 22 with a full-time aide) each October, by school; share of K-3 teachers without full state certification; K-3 reading and math benchmark growth by school. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First October count of K-3 section sizes and K-3 teacher certification status in the student information and human resources systems, taken within 90 days of adoption. |
| Target | Within 1 year, zero K-3 sections above the cap in the schools with the highest share of students eligible for free or reduced-price meals; within 3 years, zero sections above the cap district-wide without written Board approval, and the share of new K-3 teachers without full certification at zero. K-3 reading and math benchmark growth in the schools brought under the cap should rise relative to their own baseline over the same 3 years. |
| Benchmark | The Tennessee STAR experiment found classes of 13 to 17 students in K-3 raised test scores about 4 percentile points in the first year (about 0.2 SD) and about 1 point a year after, with college attendance up 2.7 percentage points overall and 7.3 points in the poorest third of schools. Florida's constitution caps K-3 core classes at 18; California's 1996 program funded classes of 20 or fewer, and its gains were partly offset by inexperienced teachers, which is why the certification requirement is paired with the cap. No district should expect the full STAR effect from a cap of 20 or 22. |
| Reported | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by October 31, by school and grade K-3, with average and maximum class size, the number of sections above the cap and the reason for each, the share of K-3 teachers without full certification, and K-3 reading and math benchmark growth; any over-cap section after October 31 recorded in Board minutes with written approval. |
Sources. Krueger AB (1999). Experimental estimates of education production functions. Quarterly Journal of Economics 114(2):497-532. doi · Chetty R, Friedman JN, Hilger N, Saez E, Schanzenbach DW, Yagan D (2011). How does your kindergarten classroom affect your earnings? Evidence from Project STAR. Quarterly Journal of Economics 126(4):1593-1660. doi · Dynarski S, Hyman J, Schanzenbach DW (2013). Experimental evidence on the effect of childhood investments on postsecondary attainment and degree completion. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 32(4):692-717. doi · Jepsen C, Rivkin S (2009). Class size reduction and student achievement: The potential tradeoff between teacher quality and class size. Journal of Human Resources 44(1):223-250. doi · Fredriksson P, Ockert B, Oosterbeek H (2013). Long-term effects of class size. Quarterly Journal of Economics 128(1):249-285. doi · Angrist JD, Lavy V (1999). Using Maimonides' rule to estimate the effect of class size on scholastic achievement. Quarterly Journal of Economics 114(2):533-575. doi · Filges T, Sonne-Schmidt CS, Nielsen BCV (2018). Small class sizes for improving student achievement in primary and secondary schools: A systematic review. Campbell Systematic Reviews 14(1):1-107. doi · Hoxby CM (2000). The effects of class size on student achievement: New evidence from population variation. Quarterly Journal of Economics 115(4):1239-1285. doi · Leuven E, Lokken SA (2020). Long-term impacts of class size in compulsory school. Journal of Human Resources 55(1):309-348. doi · Schanzenbach DW (2014). Does Class Size Matter? Policy brief. National Education Policy Center, Boulder CO. link
◐ Partial 0/5Instructional coaching and professional development333 Professional Development
Tier A: meta-analysis or several causal studies agreestakes 3/5
Research. A meta-analysis of 60 causal studies finds that one-on-one instructional coaching improves teaching practice by 0.49 SD and student achievement by 0.18 SD, far more than the one-off workshops that make up most district professional development, which show no achievement effect in large randomized trials. Effects shrink as programs scale (programs over 100 teachers: 0.34 SD practice, 0.10 SD achievement) and depend on coaches observing real lessons and giving specific feedback in cycles over a year. (Coaching: +0.49 SD on instructional practice, +0.18 SD on student achievement (meta-analysis of 60 causal studies); at scale +0.34 and +0.10 SD. Content-focused workshops without coaching: null on achievement in IES RCTs. STEM PD meta-analysis: +0.21 SD when PD is paired with curriculum materials.)
Mixed evidence. Not all coaching works: Kraft and Blazar (2017) found large practice gains but no achievement gain in one year; Blazar and Kraft (2015) found the same program succeeded in one cohort and failed in the next when coaching dosage and school conditions changed; Kraft and Hill (2020) found web-based coaching improved observed instruction and student perceptions without a detectable achievement effect. Campbell and Malkus (2011) found math coaches had no effect in their first year and positive effects only in years two and three. Two IES randomized trials of intensive content PD (Garet et al. 2016; Jacob, Hill and Corey 2017) raised teacher knowledge but did not raise student achievement. Coaching is expensive (one coach per 10 to 20 teachers) and scaling dilutes coach quality. Studies are mostly elementary literacy and math with short follow-up.
Standard. District professional development shall be organized around sustained, content-specific coaching cycles for teachers in their first three years and for any teacher rated below effective, with coach caseloads of no more than 20 teachers, and the district shall report coaching dosage and teacher growth annually.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy organizes district professional development around sustained, content-specific coaching cycles for teachers. core
- ✕The policy provides coaching cycles to teachers in their first three years.
- ✕The policy provides coaching cycles to any teacher rated below effective.
- ✕The policy caps coach caseloads at no more than 20 teachers.
- ✕The policy requires the district to report coaching dosage and teacher growth annually.
What the manual says. 333 Professional Development, revised March 9, 2026:
Recommended. Amend 333 Professional Development
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Assistant Superintendent for Teaching and Learning inventories every current full-time instructional coach and every teacher in the first three years of service or rated below effective on the most recent evaluation, and calculates the current coach-to-teacher ratio by school against the 1 to 20 standard.
- The Human Resources director and the Assistant Superintendent for Teaching and Learning draft a coach job description that bars any evaluative role and prohibits sharing observation notes with evaluators, and the Superintendent issues it to all principals and coaches.
- The professional development director tags every entry on the current year's PD calendar as a coaching cycle or a single-session workshop and reports to the Superintendent the share of hours in each category against the 25 percent workshop cap.
- The technology director adds a coaching cycle log to the district professional development system that records the observation date, the feedback conference date, and the follow-up observation date for each teacher.
- The Assistant Superintendent for Teaching and Learning assigns each eligible teacher to a named coach and sets a schedule that delivers eight cycles per teacher by the end of the school year, with each written feedback conference due within five school days of observation.
Year one
- The Superintendent fills any coach vacancies needed to bring every school to a caseload of no more than 20 teachers per full-time coach, and brings a staffing request to the Board if the budget does not cover it.
- Coaches complete and log at least eight cycles for every teacher in the first three years of service and every teacher rated below effective, and principals verify the logs each quarter.
- The professional development director restructures the following year's PD calendar so that no more than 25 percent of district-provided hours are single-session workshops without classroom follow-up, and documents how Title II-A spending meets the ESSA Section 8101(42) definition of professional development.
- The Assistant Superintendent for Teaching and Learning delivers the first annual report to the Board by September 30 covering cycles completed per teacher by school, coach caseloads, coaching share of PD hours, change in observed practice scores of coached teachers, and student growth of coached versus uncoached teachers.
Ongoing
- The Assistant Superintendent for Teaching and Learning reports to the Board by September 30 every year, and the Board reviews coaching staffing against that report before adopting the following year's budget.
- The research or assessment office matches coached teachers with comparable uncoached teachers each year and reports the student growth comparison, and surveys teachers on PD usefulness.
- Principals and the Human Resources director confirm annually that no coach holds an evaluative role and that observation notes have not been shared with evaluators.
| Measure | Share of eligible teachers (first three years of service or rated below effective) receiving at least eight logged coaching cycles per year, coach caseload per full-time coach, share of PD hours delivered as single-session workshops, change in observed instructional practice scores of coached teachers, and student growth of coached teachers versus comparable uncoached teachers. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Current coaching cycles per eligible teacher, current coach-to-teacher ratio, current workshop share of PD hours, and current observed practice scores, all drawn from the 90-day inventory and PD calendar audit. |
| Target | By the end of year one, every eligible teacher has eight logged cycles, no full-time coach serves more than 20 teachers, and single-session workshops are no more than 25 percent of district PD hours; by the end of year two, observed instructional practice scores of coached teachers rise over their pre-coaching scores and student growth of coached teachers is at or above that of comparable uncoached teachers, with both measures improving year over year. |
| Benchmark | Meta-analysis of 60 causal studies: coaching raises instructional practice by 0.49 SD and student achievement by 0.18 SD (0.34 SD and 0.10 SD in programs over 100 teachers); content-focused workshops without coaching show no achievement effect in IES randomized trials; STEM PD paired with curriculum materials shows 0.21 SD. The entry gives no numeric benchmark for the district-level indicators beyond the 1 to 20 caseload, eight cycles, five school days, and 25 percent workshop cap in the clause. |
| Reported | Annual report from the Assistant Superintendent for Teaching and Learning to the Board by September 30, disaggregated by school, reviewed by the Board before adoption of the following year's budget. |
Sources. Kraft, M. A., Blazar, D., & Hogan, D. (2018). The Effect of Teacher Coaching on Instruction and Achievement: A Meta-Analysis of the Causal Evidence. Review of Educational Research 88(4):547-588. doi · Allen, J. P., Pianta, R. C., Gregory, A., Mikami, A. Y., & Lun, J. (2011). An Interaction-Based Approach to Enhancing Secondary School Instruction and Student Achievement. Science 333(6045):1034-1037. doi · Kraft, M. A., & Blazar, D. (2017). Individualized Coaching to Improve Teacher Practice Across Grades and Subjects: New Experimental Evidence. Educational Policy 31(7):1033-1068. doi · Blazar, D., & Kraft, M. A. (2015). Exploring Mechanisms of Effective Teacher Coaching: A Tale of Two Cohorts From a Randomized Experiment. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 37(4):542-566. doi · Kraft, M. A., & Hill, H. C. (2020). Developing Ambitious Mathematics Instruction Through Web-Based Coaching: A Randomized Field Trial. American Educational Research Journal 57(6):2378-2414. doi · Campbell, P. F., & Malkus, N. N. (2011). The Impact of Elementary Mathematics Coaches on Student Achievement. The Elementary School Journal 111(3):430-454. doi · Lynch, K., Hill, H. C., Gonzalez, K. E., & Pollard, C. (2019). Strengthening the Research Base That Informs STEM Instructional Improvement Efforts: A Meta-Analysis. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 41(3):260-293. doi · Garet, M. S., Heppen, J. B., Walters, K., Parkinson, J., Smith, T. M., Song, M., Garrett, R., Yang, R., & Borman, G. D. (2016). Focusing on Mathematical Knowledge: The Impact of Content-Intensive Teacher Professional Development. NCEE 2016-4010. Washington, DC: Institute of Education Sciences. link · Jacob, R., Hill, H., & Corey, D. (2017). The Impact of a Professional Development Program on Teachers' Mathematical Knowledge for Teaching, Instructional Practice, and Student Achievement. Journal of Research on Educational Effectiveness 10(2):379-407. doi · Darling-Hammond, L., Hyler, M. E., & Gardner, M. (2017). Effective Teacher Professional Development. Palo Alto, CA: Learning Policy Institute. doi
○ SilentNew teacher induction and mentoringno governing section
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. The one large randomized trial (Glazerman et al. 2010, 1,009 teachers in 17 districts) found that two years of comprehensive induction raised student achievement in the teachers' third year (+4 percentile points reading, +8 math; about 0.11 and 0.20 SD) but one year did not, and neither version changed retention. Nationally representative surveys and a field experiment on structured peer pairing find that first-year mentoring, common planning time and collaboration predict lower attrition and that pairing low-performing teachers with high-performing colleagues raised their students' achievement by about 0.12 SD. (Two-year comprehensive induction: +0.11 SD reading, +0.20 SD math in year 3 (RCT); retention: null in RCT, lower turnover in survey studies (comprehensive package associated with roughly half the turnover of no support). Structured peer mentoring: +0.12 SD student achievement for low-performing teachers (field experiment).)
Mixed evidence. The IES randomized trial found no effect on retention after one, two or three years and no effect on observed classroom practice; its achievement effect appeared only for the two-year treatment and only in year three, and a reanalysis has questioned it. One-year induction produced nothing. Rockoff (2008) found that New York City's mentoring program had limited effects on retention except when the mentor had worked in the same school, though more mentoring hours were associated with higher achievement. The retention findings of Smith and Ingersoll (2004) and Ronfeldt and McQueen (2017) are correlational; teachers who receive more support may be in better-run schools. Induction that consists of an assigned mentor with no release time, no training and no common planning is the common form and has no evidence behind it.
Standard. Every teacher in the first two years of service shall receive a trained mentor in the same subject or grade band with scheduled release time, weekly contact in year one, common planning time, and structured observation with feedback; the district shall track retention and mentor contact and report both annually.
What the manual says. Nothing found on this domain. Silence here leaves the practice to chance.
Recommended. New policy (staffing and instruction)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Human Resources inventories every teacher new to the profession and every teacher new to the district and confirms each has an assigned mentor who holds certification in the same subject or grade band and has at least three years of effective ratings.
- The Superintendent designates a program coordinator who delivers the district mentor training of no fewer than 15 hours to every assigned mentor before or within the first 30 days of the student year.
- Each principal places weekly common planning time for every year-one inductee and mentor pair, and twice-monthly time for every year-two pair, on the master schedule.
- The Director of Human Resources opens the monthly mentor contact log in the district system and sets the mentor stipend and the two release periods per month in each mentor's assignment.
- The Director of Human Resources pulls baseline one-year, three-year and five-year retention of new hires by school from HR records so the first October 31 report has a comparison point.
Year one
- The program coordinator reviews the mentor contact log each month and notifies the principal and the Director of Human Resources of any inductee whose mentor has logged no contact in 30 days.
- The Director of Human Resources administers the annual inductee survey on induction quality in the spring and tabulates results by school.
- The Director of Human Resources reports to the Board by October 31 the retention of new hires by school and by induction participation, mean mentor contact hours per inductee, the share of inductees with a same-subject mentor, and the survey results.
- The Board reviews program funding against that report at its November meeting and the Superintendent identifies ESSA Title II-A funds available to sustain stipends and release time.
Ongoing
- The Director of Human Resources repeats the October 31 report each year with retention compared by school poverty and adds student growth of teachers in years 1 to 3 as data become available.
- The Superintendent confirms each August, before the first student day, that every inductee has an assigned trained mentor in the same subject or grade band.
| Measure | Share of first-year and second-year teachers assigned a trained same-subject or same-grade-band mentor before the first student day; mean mentor contact hours per inductee per month; one-year, three-year and five-year retention of new hires by school and by induction participation |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Retention of new hires and mentor assignment rates as recorded in HR records for the school year before the policy takes effect; the entry gives no district baseline, so the first October 31 report establishes it |
| Target | Within 1 year, every inductee has an assigned trained mentor before the first student day and every year-one mentor pair logs weekly contact; within 3 years, one-year and three-year retention of new hires who completed induction is higher than the pre-policy baseline and no lower than for new hires who did not participate |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric retention benchmark: the randomized trial (Glazerman et al. 2010) found no retention effect, while survey studies associate a comprehensive package with roughly half the turnover of no support; two-year comprehensive induction raised year-3 student achievement by about 0.11 SD reading and 0.20 SD math, and structured peer mentoring raised achievement by about 0.12 SD for low-performing teachers |
| Reported | Director of Human Resources to the Board by October 31 each year, with Board review of program funding at the November meeting |
Sources. Glazerman, S., Isenberg, E., Dolfin, S., Bleeker, M., Johnson, A., Grider, M., & Jacobus, M. (2010). Impacts of Comprehensive Teacher Induction: Final Results from a Randomized Controlled Study. NCEE 2010-4027. Washington, DC: National Center for Education Evaluation and Regional Assistance, Institute of Education Sciences. link · Ingersoll, R. M., & Strong, M. (2011). The Impact of Induction and Mentoring Programs for Beginning Teachers: A Critical Review of the Research. Review of Educational Research 81(2):201-233. doi · Ronfeldt, M., & McQueen, K. (2017). Does New Teacher Induction Really Improve Retention? Journal of Teacher Education 68(4):394-410. doi · Smith, T. M., & Ingersoll, R. M. (2004). What Are the Effects of Induction and Mentoring on Beginning Teacher Turnover? American Educational Research Journal 41(3):681-714. doi · Rockoff, J. E. (2008). Does Mentoring Reduce Turnover and Improve Skills of New Employees? Evidence from Teachers in New York City. NBER Working Paper 13868. doi · Papay, J. P., Taylor, E. S., Tyler, J. H., & Laski, M. E. (2020). Learning Job Skills from Colleagues at Work: Evidence from a Field Experiment Using Teacher Performance Data. American Economic Journal: Economic Policy 12(1):359-388. doi · Helms-Lorenz, M., van de Grift, W., & Maulana, R. (2016). Longitudinal effects of induction on teaching skills and attrition rates of beginning teachers. School Effectiveness and School Improvement 27(2):178-204. doi · Carver-Thomas, D., & Darling-Hammond, L. (2017). Teacher Turnover: Why It Matters and What We Can Do About It. Palo Alto, CA: Learning Policy Institute. doi
◐ Partial 0/5Teacher evaluation and feedback313 Evaluation of Employees
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 2/5
Research. Well-run evaluation with trained observers and substantive feedback can improve teaching: Cincinnati teachers' students gained about 0.1 SD in math in the years after a rigorous peer evaluation, and Washington DC's IMPACT raised the performance of low-rated teachers by 0.27 SD and pushed the lowest performers out, with their replacements raising achievement. But the 2010s wave of state evaluation reforms, taken as a whole, produced precisely estimated null effects on achievement and attainment, rated fewer than 1 percent of teachers below proficient, and reduced the supply of new teachers. (Cincinnati peer evaluation: +0.11 SD math in years after evaluation. DC IMPACT: +0.27 SD teacher performance for low-rated teachers facing dismissal threat; turnover of low performers raised student achievement by 0.08 to 0.14 SD. Statewide reforms 2009 to 2017: null, ruling out effects as small as 0.015 SD on achievement and 1 percentage point on graduation or college enrollment.)
Mixed evidence. Bleiberg et al. (2025) find the 44-state evaluation reform wave had no average effect on achievement, graduation or college enrollment regardless of design rigor. Kraft and Gilmour (2017) found that under the new systems fewer than 1 percent of teachers were rated below proficient in most states, little different from the systems they replaced. The 575 million dollar Gates Intensive Partnerships produced no gains in achievement, graduation or access to effective teachers (Stecher et al. 2018). Kraft et al. (2020) show the reforms reduced the number of new teacher candidates without improving their quality. The IES feedback trial (Garet et al. 2017) improved one observation measure but not reading, and math gains were not sustained in year two. Steinberg and Sartain (2015) found Chicago's Danielson pilot raised reading only in higher-achieving, lower-poverty schools. Phipps and Wiseman (2021) show teachers raise their practice during scheduled observation windows, so observation scores partly measure performance for the observer. Positive effects came from a few high-capacity districts with trained observers, real consequences and compensating pay, not from rubrics alone.
Standard. Evaluation shall rest on multiple trained and calibrated observers, at least two observations per year with at least one unannounced, written feedback within five school days, and a growth plan with coaching for any teacher rated below effective; the district shall publish rating distributions and evaluator calibration results annually and shall not use a single test-based measure as more than one third of a rating.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual, 1 partly.
- ✕The policy requires at least two observations per year by multiple trained and calibrated observers, with at least one unannounced. core
- ✕The policy requires written feedback to the teacher within five school days of an observation.
- ◐The policy requires a growth plan with coaching for any teacher rated below effective. partly, 313 Evaluation of Employees
- ✕The policy requires the district to publish rating distributions and evaluator calibration results annually.
- ✕The policy limits any single test-based measure to no more than one third of a teacher's rating.
What the manual says. 313 Evaluation of Employees, revised May 5, 2025:
Recommended. Amend 313 Evaluation of Employees
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Director of Human Resources inventories the current evaluation system against the clause, listing observer training status, observation counts, feedback timelines, rating weights, and any collective bargaining terms governing notice and feedback.
- The Superintendent names an evaluation lead and selects or builds a master-scored video library for the annual evaluator calibration exercise.
- The Director of Human Resources drafts the observer training curriculum and the calibration pass standard, and brings both to the Board for review within 90 days.
- The Superintendent confirms with counsel that the one third cap on any single measure and the observation minimums comply with state evaluation law and the current bargaining agreement.
- The Director of Human Resources builds the data fields needed for the August 31 report: ratings by school and evaluator, calibration results, observation counts, days to feedback, growth correlation, and retention by rating.
Year one
- The Director of Human Resources trains every evaluator before the first observation window and runs the first calibration exercise; any evaluator who fails is removed from observations until recertified.
- Principals complete at least two observations per teacher, at least one unannounced, with a written feedback conference within five school days of each.
- The Superintendent assigns a coach who is not the evaluator to every teacher rated below effective, with a written growth plan within 20 school days and at least eight coaching cycles scheduled for the following year.
- The Director of Human Resources delivers the first full report to the Board by August 31 and the Board reviews system reliability at a public meeting.
Ongoing
- The Director of Human Resources recalibrates every evaluator annually and reports rating distributions, calibration results, and observation compliance to the Board by August 31 each year.
- The Board reviews the reliability of the system against the annual report every year and commissions an external review every five years.
- The Director of Human Resources surveys teachers each year on the usefulness of feedback and reports results alongside retention by rating level.
| Measure | Share of teachers who received at least two observations with at least one unannounced, median days from observation to written feedback, share of evaluators passing calibration, share of below-effective teachers with a growth plan within 20 school days, distribution of summative ratings by school and evaluator, and correlation between ratings and student growth |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The district's current observation counts, feedback timelines, rating distribution, and evaluator calibration status as recorded in the first 90 day inventory; the entry notes that statewide reforms rated fewer than 1 percent of teachers below proficient, so a rating distribution with nearly all teachers at or above proficient signals a system that is not discriminating |
| Target | Within 1 year every teacher has at least two observations with at least one unannounced, median days to written feedback is five school days or fewer, every evaluator conducting observations has passed the annual calibration exercise, every teacher rated below effective has a written growth plan within 20 school days and eight coaching cycles the following year, and no single measure exceeds one third of any rating; within 3 years ratings show a positive correlation with student growth and the share rated below proficient exceeds the under 1 percent pattern of the statewide reforms |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric target for the district's own outcomes. Evidence benchmarks: Cincinnati peer evaluation was followed by +0.11 SD in math; DC IMPACT raised low-rated teacher performance by 0.27 SD and low-performer turnover raised achievement by 0.08 to 0.14 SD; statewide reforms produced null effects, ruling out effects as small as 0.015 SD on achievement and 1 percentage point on graduation or college enrollment, and rated fewer than 1 percent of teachers below proficient |
| Reported | Annual report from the Director of Human Resources to the Board by August 31, covering ratings by school and evaluator, calibration results, observations per teacher and share unannounced, median days to feedback, rating to growth correlation, and retention by rating level; Board reliability review each year and an external review every five years |
Sources. Taylor, E. S., & Tyler, J. H. (2012). The Effect of Evaluation on Teacher Performance. American Economic Review 102(7):3628-3651. doi · Dee, T. S., & Wyckoff, J. (2015). Incentives, Selection, and Teacher Performance: Evidence from IMPACT. Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 34(2):267-297. doi · Adnot, M., Dee, T., Katz, V., & Wyckoff, J. (2017). Teacher Turnover, Teacher Quality, and Student Achievement in DCPS. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 39(1):54-76. doi · Kraft, M. A., & Gilmour, A. F. (2017). Revisiting The Widget Effect: Teacher Evaluation Reforms and the Distribution of Teacher Effectiveness. Educational Researcher 46(5):234-249. doi · Bleiberg, J., Brunner, E., Harbatkin, E., Kraft, M. A., & Springer, M. G. (2025). Taking Teacher Evaluation to Scale: The Effect of State Reforms on Achievement and Attainment. Journal of Political Economy Microeconomics 3(3):568-610. doi · Steinberg, M. P., & Sartain, L. (2015). Does Teacher Evaluation Improve School Performance? Experimental Evidence from Chicago's Excellence in Teaching Project. Education Finance and Policy 10(4):535-572. doi · Garet, M. S., Wayne, A. J., Brown, S., Rickles, J., Song, M., & Manzeske, D. (2017). The Impact of Providing Performance Feedback to Teachers and Principals: Final Report. NCEE 2018-4001. Washington, DC: Institute of Education Sciences. link · Stecher, B. M., Holtzman, D. J., Garet, M. S., Hamilton, L. S., Engberg, J., Steiner, E. D., Robyn, A., Baird, M. D., Gutierrez, I. A., Peet, E. D., Brodziak de los Reyes, I., Fronberg, K., Weinberger, G., Hunter, G. P., & Chambers, J. (2018). Improving Teaching Effectiveness: Final Report. The Intensive Partnerships for Effective Teaching Through 2015-2016. Santa Monica, CA: RAND Corporation. doi · Kraft, M. A., Brunner, E. J., Dougherty, S. M., & Schwegman, D. J. (2020). Teacher accountability reforms and the supply and quality of new teachers. Journal of Public Economics 188:104212. doi · Cullen, J. B., Koedel, C., & Parsons, E. (2021). The Compositional Effect of Rigorous Teacher Evaluation on Workforce Quality. Education Finance and Policy 16(1):7-41. doi · Phipps, A. R., & Wiseman, E. A. (2021). Enacting the Rubric: Teacher Improvements in Windows of High-Stakes Observation. Education Finance and Policy 16(2):283-312. doi
Technology and data
◐ Partial 0/5One-to-one devices and educational software109 Resource/Supplementary Materials
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Giving every student a device does not by itself raise achievement: the large randomized One Laptop per Child trial and the Swedish 1:1 rollout found no effect on test scores, and the Swedish study found losses for children of less-educated parents. Gains appear only where the device carries targeted software (computer-assisted learning, especially in math) and teachers get sustained support; the one positive US district study (Mooresville) found no short-run effect and +0.13 SD in math after several years alongside changed teaching practice. (access alone: about 0; targeted computer-assisted learning in math: positive; well-supported district program: +0.13 SD math after 4 to 5 years)
Mixed evidence. The 2016 meta-analysis (Zheng et al.) reports positive average effects in English, writing, math and science, but it pools only 10 mostly non-randomized studies and the authors attribute gains to programs that supported teachers as well as students. Causal studies disagree on direction: Cristia et al. (Peru RCT, 318 schools) found nothing on math or language; Hall, Lundin and Sibbmark (Sweden) found no average effect and worse math outcomes and less college-preparatory enrollment for students with less-educated parents; Hull and Duch found gains, but neighboring districts without laptops improved at similar rates and the study cannot isolate which component mattered. Escueta et al. find that fully online courses underperform in-person ones. Device programs also carry recurring cost, screen-time and data-privacy trade-offs that the achievement literature does not price.
Standard. The district shall not purchase or renew a 1:1 device program or instructional software above a set dollar threshold without a written evidence review, a named instructional purpose, a teacher training plan and a usage-and-outcome report to the board each year, and shall retire products whose usage or results do not meet the stated purpose.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy prohibits purchasing or renewing a 1:1 device program or instructional software above a set dollar threshold without a written evidence review. core
- ✕The policy requires a named instructional purpose for each device program or instructional software purchase or renewal above the threshold.
- ✕The policy requires a teacher training plan for each device program or instructional software purchase or renewal above the threshold.
- ✕The policy requires a usage-and-outcome report to the board each year for each covered device program or instructional software.
- ✕The policy requires retiring products whose usage or results do not meet the stated instructional purpose.
What the manual says. 109 Resource/Supplementary Materials, revised April 28, 2008:
Recommended. Amend 109 Resource/Supplementary Materials
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Chief Academic Officer compiles an inventory of every current student device program and instructional software license with annual cost above $25,000, listing instructional purpose, grades and subjects served, renewal date and the training already provided.
- The Director of Technology configures each licensed product and device fleet to log per-student weekly activity and minutes of use so that instructional use, not device possession, can be reported.
- The Chief Academic Officer drafts the written evidence review template covering instructional purpose, best available evidence with citations, teacher training and support plan, and the usage and outcome measures that will decide renewal, and the Board adopts it.
- The Superintendent sets the pre-adoption state assessment baseline, disaggregated by subgroup, for each cohort already exposed to an existing product so later trend reports have a fixed reference point.
- The Director of Technology confirms with district counsel that each software contract meets state student-privacy law and CIPA filtering obligations tied to E-rate and state device grants.
Year one
- The Director of Technology delivers the first usage and cost report to the Board by February 1 and again by August 1, stating for every licensed product the share of licensed students active in the prior semester, median minutes per active student and total cost per active student.
- The Chief Academic Officer presents a completed written evidence review to the Board before any purchase or renewal above $25,000, citing ESSA Section 8101(21) evidence tiers where federal Title funds are used.
- The Chief Academic Officer delivers the first achievement report by October 1 comparing exposed cohorts against the pre-adoption baseline on state assessments, disaggregated by subgroup.
- The Chief Academic Officer flags to the Board any product below 50 percent of licensed students active in a semester and schedules the teacher training and support promised in its evidence review.
Ongoing
- The Director of Technology reports usage and cost per product to the Board each February 1 and August 1, and any product below 50 percent active in two consecutive semesters goes to a Board vote before renewal.
- The Chief Academic Officer reports subgroup achievement trends for exposed cohorts against baseline each October 1 and recommends retirement of products that do not meet their stated purpose.
- The Board reviews the $25,000 threshold and the evidence review template every 1 to 3 years and adjusts them as the product inventory changes.
| Measure | Share of licensed products above the $25,000 threshold that have a written evidence review on file before purchase or renewal, share of licensed students active weekly per product, and achievement of exposed cohorts versus the pre-adoption baseline by subgroup on state assessments. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Current inventory of device programs and software licenses, with per-product usage and pre-adoption state assessment results by subgroup, as compiled in the first 90 days. |
| Target | Within year one, 100 percent of purchases and renewals above $25,000 have an evidence review on file before the Board vote; every licensed product reaches at least 50 percent of licensed students active each semester or is brought to a Board vote; by the third October 1 report, no exposed subgroup trends below its pre-adoption baseline and math achievement for exposed cohorts is moving upward. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives no numeric benchmark for access alone, which showed about zero effect; the only positive district figure is +0.13 SD in math after 4 to 5 years in a well-supported program with changed teaching practice, so that is the outer reference, not a year-one target. |
| Reported | Director of Technology to the Board each February 1 and August 1 on usage and cost per product; Chief Academic Officer to the Board each October 1 on achievement by subgroup against baseline, with both reports posted publicly. |
Sources. Zheng B, Warschauer M, Lin CH, Chang C (2016). Learning in One-to-One Laptop Environments: A Meta-Analysis and Research Synthesis. Review of Educational Research 86(4):1052-1084. doi · Hull M, Duch K (2019). One-to-One Technology and Student Outcomes: Evidence From Mooresville's Digital Conversion Initiative. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis 41(1):79-97. doi · Escueta M, Nickow AJ, Oreopoulos P, Quan V (2020). Upgrading Education with Technology: Insights from Experimental Research. Journal of Economic Literature 58(4):897-996. doi · Cristia J, Ibarraran P, Cueto S, Santiago A, Severin E (2017). Technology and Child Development: Evidence from the One Laptop per Child Program. American Economic Journal: Applied Economics 9(3):295-320. doi · Hall C, Lundin M, Sibbmark K (2021). A laptop for every child? The impact of technology on human capital formation. Labour Economics 69:101957. doi
◐ Partial 0/6Student data privacy and vendor contracts216 Student Records
Tier D: professional standard or expert consensusstakes 2/5
Research. Audits find that most school-assigned apps send student data to third parties (Internet Safety Labs: 96% of apps used in a sample of 663 US schools; Human Rights Watch: 146 of 164 government-endorsed products worldwide, 89%, engaged in practices that risked children's rights), and breaches are frequent and large (99 K-12 breaches reported to the GAO sample 2016 to 2020; the December 2024 PowerSchool breach reached tens of millions of student records). There is no outcome research showing that any particular policy reduces harm; the standard rests on federal and state law and professional consensus. (not measurable as a student outcome; harm prevention standard (96% of school apps share data with third parties absent controls))
Mixed evidence. No study links district privacy policy strength to measured student harm or benefit, and the audit figures count data flows, not demonstrated injury. Strict contracting raises procurement cost and can delay useful tools; blanket bans on consumer tools push use to personal accounts that the district cannot govern. Over-collection often starts with the district itself (surveillance and monitoring software), not the vendor, and that trade-off between safety monitoring and privacy has no empirical resolution.
Standard. No product that collects student data shall be used until a signed agreement is on file that limits collection to the stated educational purpose, bars sale, advertising and model training, requires deletion on request or at contract end, and sets breach notice within 72 hours, and the district shall publish the product inventory and report compliance to the board annually.
Checklist. 0 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual.
- ✕The policy bars use of any product that collects student data until a signed data privacy agreement is on file. core
- ✕The policy requires the agreement to limit data collection to the stated educational purpose.
- ✕The policy requires the agreement to bar sale of student data, advertising, and model training.
- ✕The policy requires the agreement to require deletion of student data on request or at contract end.
- ✕The policy requires the agreement to set breach notice within 72 hours.
- ✕The policy requires the district to publish the product inventory and report compliance to the board annually.
What the manual says. 216 Student Records, revised December 18, 2006:
Recommended. New policy (technology and data)
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent designates a Privacy Officer in writing and the Board adopts the model clause within 30 days.
- The Director of Technology compiles a complete inventory of every application, website and service in use that collects personally identifiable student information, with the data elements each collects, within 60 days.
- The Privacy Officer checks every inventoried product against the five required agreement terms (purpose limit, no sale or advertising or model training, 60-day deletion, 72-hour breach notice, named subcontractors) and flags each as compliant, needs amendment, or no agreement.
- The Director of Technology publishes the first approved-software list on the district website within 90 days and tells staff that any product not on the list may not be assigned to students.
- The Director of Technology and Privacy Officer send amendment requests to every vendor whose agreement lacks one or more required terms, with a 90-day deadline to sign.
Year one
- The Director of Technology removes from the approved list and blocks any product whose vendor has not signed a compliant agreement by the 90-day deadline.
- The Privacy Officer delivers annual privacy training to all teachers and records completion for the annual report.
- The Privacy Officer builds a breach log recording each confirmed incident, the date the vendor notified the district, and the date families were notified.
- The Privacy Officer delivers the first annual report to the Board by September 30 covering products reviewed, approved and removed, every breach and family notice date, and the status of FERPA inspect-and-correct requests.
Ongoing
- The Director of Technology updates the public approved-software list within 30 days of any addition, removal or change in data elements collected.
- The Privacy Officer reports to the Board each September 30 and reviews every agreement at renewal against the five required terms and any new state contract requirements.
- The Privacy Officer confirms each year that all teachers completed privacy training and reports completion with the annual report.
| Measure | Share of software products in use that collect student PII with a signed data privacy agreement on file containing all five required terms, plus days from confirmed breach to family notification and share of FERPA parent requests fulfilled within the statutory window |
|---|---|
| Baseline | Taken from the inventory completed in the first 60 days: number of products in use, and the share with a fully compliant agreement on file; audits cited in the finding suggest that absent controls most products (96% in the Internet Safety Labs sample) share data with third parties |
| Target | 100% of products in use have a compliant signed agreement by the end of year one and at every September 30 report thereafter; every confirmed breach is reported by the vendor within 72 hours; the public list is updated within 30 days of each change; 100% of teachers complete annual training |
| Benchmark | No outcome research sets a numeric harm-reduction benchmark; the standard rests on FERPA, COPPA, PPRA and state statutes (42 states by 2023, for example New York Education Law 2-d, Illinois SOPPA, California SOPIPA), and the indicator itself sets the 100% compliance target |
| Reported | Privacy Officer presents to the Board by September 30 each year, with the public approved-software list and breach log posted on the district website |
Sources. Federal Trade Commission (2022). Policy Statement of the Federal Trade Commission on Education Technology and the Children's Online Privacy Protection Act. Adopted May 19, 2022. link · Human Rights Watch (2022). How Dare They Peep into My Private Life? Children's Rights Violations by Governments that Endorsed Online Learning during the Covid-19 Pandemic. link · Internet Safety Labs (2022). 2022 K-12 EdTech Safety Benchmark: National Findings, Part 1. December 13, 2022. link · U.S. Government Accountability Office (2020). Data Security: Recent K-12 Data Breaches Show That Students Are Vulnerable to Harm. GAO-20-644. link · Sallay D, Future of Privacy Forum (2023). Written testimony on Massachusetts H.532 (student data privacy). link
◐ Partial 0/5Generative AI use by students and staff207 Academic Integrity
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Design determines the effect. In a field RCT with nearly 1,000 high-school math students, unrestricted GPT-4 access raised practice scores (+48%) but cut unaided exam scores by 17% relative to no access; a version with guardrails that withheld answers removed the harm. A college physics RCT found a purpose-built AI tutor produced about double the learning gain of active-learning classes in less time, and an essay-writing RCT found gains persisted a week later only when students used the model as a tutor rather than to write for them. The K-12 evidence base is still one school, one subject and a few weeks. (unrestricted chatbot: -17% on unaided exam; guardrailed tutor: harm removed; purpose-built tutor (college): about 2x learning gain; effects persist only for tutor-style use)
Mixed evidence. Only one K-12 RCT exists (Bastani et al., one Turkish high school, four sessions covering 15% of the curriculum), and the positive tutor results come from Harvard undergraduates and Middlebury undergraduates, not children. The most-cited 2025 meta-analysis reporting large positive effects of ChatGPT on learning was retracted in April 2026, so there is no reliable pooled estimate. Lehmann, Cornelius and Sting (working paper) find harm concentrated in answer-generation use and no gain from explanation use, a pattern consistent with the RCTs but not peer reviewed. Detection tools are unreliable and produce false accusations; student-facing products carry data-privacy and age-limit (13+) constraints; teacher-facing uses (lesson planning, feedback) have essentially no outcome research. Policies that ban AI outright push use off campus where no guardrails exist, while policies that mandate adoption buy unproven products.
Standard. The district shall maintain a published list of approved AI tools, each with a stated instructional purpose, a guardrail configuration that withholds direct answers during practice, a data-privacy review and an age gate, shall require every course to state in writing when and how students may use AI, shall prohibit discipline based solely on detection software, and shall report usage and unaided-assessment results to the board annually.
Checklist. 0 of 5 elements of the standard are in the manual, 1 partly.
- ✕The policy requires a published list of approved AI tools, each configured to withhold direct answers during student practice. core
- ✕The policy requires each approved AI tool to have a stated instructional purpose, a data-privacy review and an age gate.
- ◐The policy requires every course to state in writing when and how students may use AI. partly, 207 Academic Integrity
- ✕The policy prohibits discipline based solely on AI detection software.
- ✕The policy requires annual reporting of AI usage and unaided-assessment results to the board.
What the manual says. 207 Academic Integrity, revised December 16, 2024:
Recommended. Amend 207 Academic Integrity
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Chief Academic Officer and the Director of Technology inventory every generative AI tool currently in use by students or staff and record for each whether answer-withholding is on or off, the vendor minimum age, and whether the contract bars training on student inputs.
- The Director of Technology drafts the written certification form covering the four conditions in the clause (named instructional purpose, answer-withholding configuration for practice and homework, data-privacy compliance including no training on student inputs, and age gate) and the Superintendent adopts it within 60 days.
- The Superintendent publishes the first approved-tool list, limited to tools that pass certification, and notifies staff that personally identifiable student information may not be entered into any tool not on the list.
- The Chief Academic Officer issues a syllabus template with an AI-use expectations section by assignment category and instructs principals that every course must include it by the tenth instructional day.
- The Chief Academic Officer issues written guidance to principals that no academic-integrity finding may rest on detection software alone and that each finding must cite draft review, process evidence or an oral check.
Year one
- Principals verify that every course syllabus in their building states when and how students may use AI tools and report the share of compliant courses to the Chief Academic Officer by the end of the first semester.
- The Director of Technology pulls usage logs by tool and the Chief Academic Officer pairs each course using an approved tool with a matched course not using it so that unaided assessment results can be compared.
- The Chief Academic Officer collects from each principal the count of AI-related academic-integrity cases, the evidence basis for each, and how many were overturned.
- The Chief Academic Officer delivers the first annual report to the Board by October 1 covering the approved-tool list, usage by tool, unaided assessment comparisons and integrity-case outcomes.
Ongoing
- The Chief Academic Officer and the Director of Technology re-certify every tool on the approved list each year and remove any whose guardrail configuration, privacy terms or age gate no longer meet the clause.
- The Board reviews the policy annually after the October 1 report in light of new evidence, given that the K-12 evidence base is still one school, one subject and a few weeks.
| Measure | Unaided assessment results in courses using each approved AI tool versus matched courses, together with the share of approved tools configured to withhold direct answers, the share of courses with a written AI-use expectation on the syllabus, and the number of AI-related integrity cases overturned. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | First-year inventory of tools in use and their guardrail configuration, first-semester syllabus compliance count, and the first October 1 report's unaided assessment comparison and integrity-case tally. |
| Target | Within 1 year, every tool on the approved list has answer-withholding on for student practice use, every course states an AI-use expectation by the tenth instructional day, and unaided assessment results in courses using approved tools are no lower than in matched courses, with no integrity finding resting on detection software alone; sustained in years 2 and 3. |
| Benchmark | The field RCT found unrestricted GPT-4 access cut unaided exam scores by 17 percent relative to no access while a guardrailed version that withheld answers removed the harm, so the district benchmark is no unaided-assessment deficit in courses using approved tools. The entry gives no numeric benchmark for syllabus compliance or integrity-case rates; those targets are directional. |
| Reported | Chief Academic Officer reports to the Board by October 1 each year; the Board records whether the no-deficit condition was met for each tool and whether any tool was removed from the list as a result. |
Sources. Bastani H, Bastani O, Sungu A, Ge H, Kabakci O, Mariman R (2025). Generative AI without guardrails can harm learning: Evidence from high school mathematics. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 122(26):e2422633122. doi · Kestin G, Miller K, Klales A, Milbourne T, Ponti G (2025). AI tutoring outperforms in-class active learning: an RCT introducing a novel research-based design in an authentic educational setting. Scientific Reports 15. doi · Contractor Z, Reyes G (2026). Experimental Evidence on the Learning Impact of Generative AI. arXiv:2607.08849 (also NBER / IZA DP 18792). link · Lehmann M, Cornelius PB, Sting FJ (2024). AI Meets the Classroom: When Does ChatGPT Harm Learning? SSRN working paper. doi · Wang J, Fan W (2026). Retraction Note: The effect of ChatGPT on students' learning performance, learning perception, and higher-order thinking: insights from a meta-analysis. Humanities and Social Sciences Communications 13. doi · U.S. Department of Education (2025). Dear Colleague Letter: Use of federal grant funds to support responsible AI integration in education, July 22, 2025. link
◐ Partial 2/6Personal phones during the school day237 Electronic Devices
Tier B: one strong causal study or consistent quasi-experimentsstakes 3/5
Research. Banning phone possession during the school day raises test scores modestly, with the gain concentrated among lower-achieving students (England: +0.07 SD overall, about +0.14 SD for the lowest quintile). Norway's middle-school bans cut bullying for both sexes and improved girls' grades, academic-track placement and mental-health care use, with no average effect on boys; the pooled effect across five European studies is small (d = 0.16) and larger for social wellbeing than for achievement. (+0.07 SD test scores (England), +0.14 SD for low achievers; Norway girls' GPA up and bullying down; pooled d = 0.16; mental-health effects unproven)
Mixed evidence. Sweden found no effect of use bans on achievement (Kessel et al. 2020), and the difference between banning possession and banning use may explain the split. The largest UK study (SMART Schools, 30 schools, 1,227 pupils) found restrictive school policies reduced in-school phone time but were not associated with better wellbeing, sleep, or attainment, because total daily phone use was unchanged; it is cross-sectional and cannot establish causation either way. Early US evidence (NSCH 2016 to 2024, three ban states, synthetic DiD) shows no clear change in screen time or wellbeing but is underpowered. The Dutch national evaluation is school-leader self-report, not outcome data. Bans impose real costs for students with medical or accessibility needs and for families who rely on reachability, so exceptions and a communication path matter.
Standard. Students shall keep personal phones and smartwatches powered off and stored away from their person from the first bell to the last bell, with written exceptions limited to documented medical, IEP or Section 504 needs and teacher-directed instructional use, and the district shall report compliance and referral data to the board annually.
Checklist. 2 of 6 elements of the standard are in the manual, 1 partly.
- ✓The policy requires students to keep personal phones powered off and stored away from their person from the first bell to the last bell. core 237 Electronic Devices
- ✓The policy applies the same powered-off and stored-away requirement to smartwatches. 237 Electronic Devices
- ◐The policy allows written exceptions for documented medical, IEP or Section 504 needs. partly, 237 Electronic Devices
- ✕The policy allows teacher-directed instructional use as an exception.
- ✕The policy limits exceptions to those documented needs and teacher-directed instructional use and no others.
- ✕The policy requires the district to report compliance and referral data to the board annually.
What the manual says. 237 Electronic Devices, revised April 20, 2026:
Recommended. Amend 237 Electronic Devices
Written for this manual from the model clause; numbers checked against the inputs.
First 90 days
- The Superintendent confirms with district counsel whether the state statute or state board rule requires bell-to-bell restriction and at which grades, and reports the result to the Board within 30 days.
- Each principal designates the storage location for phones, smartwatches and earbuds, installs or identifies the parent-access telephone in the main office, and posts the procedure in the student handbook within 60 days.
- The Director of Student Services, working with the special education director and school nurses, inventories every IEP, Section 504 plan and medical order that involves a device, such as a phone-paired glucose monitor, and places a written exemption on file for each within 60 days.
- The Superintendent sends a plain-language notice to every family and holds at least one staff training per building on the storage procedure and the progressive discipline matrix before the policy takes effect, no later than 90 days after adoption.
- The Director of Research or Assessment adds a device-violation code to the student information system so referrals can be counted by school and grade from the first day of enforcement.
Year one
- The Director of Student Services conducts the fall classroom walkthrough sample at every school and records the share of classrooms observed with phones stored.
- The Director of Research or Assessment adds an in-class distraction item to the annual student survey and reports the first result alongside device-violation referrals per 100 students.
- The Superintendent delivers the first annual report to the Board by October 1 covering violations by school and grade, exemptions on file, and walkthrough results, and flags any school where first or second offenses resulted in exclusion from instruction.
- The Director of Research or Assessment establishes the baseline state assessment trend for the lowest-achieving quartile versus the district average using the most recent pre-policy year.
Ongoing
- The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 1 each year on violations, exemptions, walkthrough results, the student distraction survey item, and the lowest-quartile achievement trend.
- District counsel reviews the state statute each legislative session and advises the Board within 30 days of any change that affects the grades or hours covered.
- The Director of Student Services conducts a walkthrough sample each semester and reviews exemption files with the special education director and school nurses at the start of each school year.
| Measure | Share of classrooms observed with phones stored in the semester walkthrough sample; device-violation referrals per 100 students by school and grade; student survey item on in-class distraction; and the state assessment trend for the lowest-achieving quartile compared with the district average. |
|---|---|
| Baseline | The first semester walkthrough sample, the first full semester of referral counts, the first administration of the distraction survey item, and the most recent pre-policy state assessment results for the lowest-achieving quartile and the district average. |
| Target | Within 1 year, the share of classrooms with phones stored rises and device-violation referrals per 100 students fall from the first semester to the second; within 1 to 3 years, the student distraction item improves and the lowest-achieving quartile's state assessment trend closes toward the district average rather than widening, with no first or second offense resulting in exclusion from instruction in any year. |
| Benchmark | The entry gives research effects, not operational targets: England's ban raised test scores about +0.07 SD overall and about +0.14 SD for the lowest quintile, Norway's bans cut bullying and raised girls' grades, and the pooled effect across five European studies is d = 0.16, larger for social wellbeing than achievement (evidence tier B). No numeric benchmark exists for walkthrough compliance, referral rates or the survey item, so the target is directional. Mental-health effects are unproven and should not be claimed. |
| Reported | The Superintendent presents the annual report to the Board by October 1 each year, disaggregated by school and grade, and the Board reviews the lowest-quartile achievement trend at the same meeting once state assessment results are available. |
Sources. Beland LP, Murphy R (2016). Ill Communication: Technology, distraction and student performance. Labour Economics 41:61-76. doi · Abrahamsson S (2026). Smartphone Bans, Student Outcomes and Mental Health. Journal of Human Resources, 0224-13403R2 (online first). doi · Kessel D, Hardardottir HL, Tyrefors B (2020). The impact of banning mobile phones in Swedish secondary schools. Economics of Education Review 77:102009. doi · Bottger T, Zierer K (2024). To Ban or Not to Ban? A Rapid Review on the Impact of Smartphone Bans in Schools on Social Well-Being and Academic Performance. Education Sciences 14(8):906. doi · Goodyear VA, Randhawa A, Adab P, et al. (2025). School phone policies and their association with mental wellbeing, phone use, and social media use (SMART Schools): a cross-sectional observational study. The Lancet Regional Health - Europe, 101211. doi · Carrion Braakman I, Krepel A, Stronkhorst E, Klein T, de Roode J, van de Vrie M, Dirix L (2025). Monitoring landelijke afspraak mobiele telefoons en andere devices in de klas: Eindrapport, eenmeting. Kohnstamm Instituut Rapport 1147 / Oberon, for the Dutch Ministry of Education. link · Pawlowski CS, Nielsen JV, Schmidt T (2021). A Ban on Smartphone Usage during Recess Increased Children's Physical Activity. International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health 18(4):1907. doi · Saffer H (2026). Youth Mental Health and School Smartphone Bans: Early Evidence. NBER Working Paper 35181. doi
What the Board would watch
If the district adopts the recommended clauses, these are the measures and targets that tell the Board whether each one worked.
| Domain | Measure | Target | Reported |
|---|---|---|---|
| Chronic absence response ✕ Conflicts | Percent of enrolled students missing 10 percent or more of enrolled days (the state chronic absence measure in the EDFacts or state report card file), by school, grade and subgroup; the share of identified students who received a documented two-way family contact within 10 school days; and the number of truancy referrals filed, each tracked monthly and reported quarterly. | Within 1 year every school reports the share of identified students contacted within 10 school days rising each quarter, with zero truancy referrals filed without a documented contact, plan and barrier assessment; within 1 to 3 years the chronic absence rate falls below the baseline in every school and subgroup, with a reduction in the range of 8 to 15 percent of the baseline rate consistent with the family-contact and caseworker studies. | The Superintendent reports to the Board each quarter and publishes the figures on the district website within 30 days of each report; the Board reviews the annual chronic absence rate against the baseline at the end of each school year. |
| Early literacy instruction and K-3 reading screening ○ Silent | Share of K-3 students screened within the first 30 school days; share of flagged students beginning a documented intervention within 15 school days; percent of K-3 reading teachers and principals with completed structured-literacy training; third-grade state ELA proficiency rate and subgroup gaps. | Within 1 year, every K-3 student is screened within the first 30 school days and every flagged student begins a documented intervention with written parent notice within 15 school days; within 2 years of hire, every K-3 reading teacher and elementary principal completes the structured-literacy training; third-grade state ELA proficiency rises and subgroup gaps narrow over 1 to 3 years. | Director of Curriculum reports to the Board each November and each June, by school and subgroup, with the third-grade state ELA results included in the June report. |
| Suspension and expulsion ✕ Conflicts | Out-of-school suspensions per 100 students and instructional days lost, by building and by race, disability, sex and English-learner status; share of suspensions for subjective or nonviolent categories (defiance, disrespect, dress code, tardiness, attendance); risk ratios for Black students and students with disabilities; attendance and achievement of non-suspended peers in buildings that reduce suspensions. | Within one year of adoption, zero out-of-school suspensions recorded for defiance, disrespect, dress code, tardiness, truancy or other attendance conduct, and no single suspension exceeding five school days outside the state and federal exceptions; within 1 to 3 years, every building's risk ratio for Black students and for students with disabilities at or below 2.0, with suspensions per 100 students and days lost declining each year while attendance and achievement of non-suspended students in those buildings hold steady or improve. | Monthly principal reports to the Superintendent; an annual Superintendent report to the Board by September 30 covering the prior school year, published publicly, with the corrective plan for any building above a 2.0 risk ratio; Board review of the policy at a public meeting each October. |
| Dual enrollment and early college ○ Silent | Share of graduates who earned at least one transferable college credit in high school and share who earned 12 or more, disaggregated by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, plus dual-credit pass rates, share of credits that transferred, early college enrollment and completion, and postsecondary enrollment of participants versus non-participants from the National Student Clearinghouse. | Within 1 year every high school offers no-cost dual-credit courses and all eligible students receive written notice by March 1; within 3 years the share of graduates earning at least one transferable credit and the share earning 12 or more rise each year in every student group, gaps for low-income, first-generation, English learner, and disability-status students narrow, and postsecondary enrollment of dual enrollment participants exceeds that of non-participants. | Director of College and Career Readiness to the Board by November 1 each year, posted publicly with the state report card and National Student Clearinghouse data, with the Board reviewing progress against the baseline at that meeting. |
| High-dosage tutoring ○ Silent | Share of students below benchmark on the interim assessment who received tutoring at least three sessions a week for at least ten weeks during the school day, by school and student group; sessions delivered versus scheduled; share of sessions with the student's assigned tutor; interim assessment growth of tutored students compared with matched non-tutored students. | Within one year, every student identified below benchmark is enrolled and the share receiving at least three sessions a week for at least ten weeks during the school day rises each reporting period, with no student group lagging the district rate; within 1 to 3 years, tutored students show growth on the interim assessment greater than matched non-tutored students in both reading and mathematics. | Superintendent reports to the Board by December 15 and June 15 each year, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, with any school below the dosage standard named and its corrective schedule attached. |
| Tiered positive behavior supports and restorative practices ○ Silent | Office discipline referrals and out-of-school suspensions per 100 students by building and student group; annual Tier 1 fidelity score on the Tiered Fidelity Inventory; share of buildings with functioning Tier 2 and Tier 3 teams; referral risk ratios for Black students and students with disabilities; student and teacher climate survey results. | Within 1 year, every building completes a fidelity assessment and has functioning Tier 2 and Tier 3 teams; within 3 years, every building scores 70 percent or higher at Tier 1, office referrals and out-of-school suspensions per 100 students decline from baseline in every building, and no building has a referral risk ratio above 2.0 for Black students or students with disabilities. | Superintendent reports to the Board and publishes on the district website by September 30 each year, for the prior school year, by building and by race, disability status and sex, including fidelity scores, restorative practice use and outcomes, and a corrective plan for any building over the 2.0 risk ratio threshold. |
| School-based mental health, counseling and suicide prevention ◐ Partial | Students per school counselor, school psychologist and school social worker by building; share of students screened and share of referred students who begin services within 30 days; time to first appointment; number and share of students served by an on-site licensed clinician; student survey items on depression, suicidal ideation and attempts; suspension rate; suicide prevention fidelity checks. | Every building at or below 250 students per counselor, 500 per school psychologist and 250 per school social worker within three years of the first March 1 plan; every school with a licensed clinician on site weekly by the end of year one; every referred student offered an initial appointment within 10 school days; share of referred students beginning services within 30 days rising each year; self-reported suicide attempts and suspension rates declining over 1 to 3 years with every program component passing fidelity checks. | Director of Student Services to the Board by November 1 each year, with the funded staffing plan from the Superintendent by March 1 each year; the ratio, clinician access, screening and referral figures are broken out by building and the survey and suspension items are compared with the baseline year. |
| High-quality instructional materials and adoption ◐ Partial | Share of core programs on the public inventory that have an independent quality rating and were adopted through the published process, share of classrooms using the adopted core program as primary, curriculum-specific professional development hours per teacher in adoption year, and achievement and growth in each subject for three years after each adoption. | Within 1 year, the full inventory is posted and every new adoption follows the published process with a semester pilot in at least two schools and at least 20 hours of professional development per teacher in the first year; within 3 years of each adoption, the share of classrooms using the core program as primary rises from baseline and achievement and growth in that subject improve relative to the pre-adoption year. | Assistant Superintendent for Curriculum reports to the Board by August 31 each year, with the inventory posted on the district website. |
| Multi-tiered systems of support (MTSS / RtI) ○ Silent | Share of at-risk students with Tier 2 or Tier 3 intervention logged within 15 school days of screening, share of Tier 2 students exiting to Tier 1 within a semester, screening participation each window, progress-monitoring frequency, and special education referral and identification rates by school and race. | By the June report of year one, every school screens all K-8 students within the first 30 school days of each window, every at-risk student has intervention logged within 15 school days, every Tier 2 and Tier 3 student is progress-monitored at least every two weeks, and the share of Tier 2 students exiting to Tier 1 within a semester rises each year over the first 3 years with no school showing referral or identification rates by race that diverge from its share of enrollment without a documented review. | Director of Student Services reports to the Board each December and June, by school and race, with the June report comparing spring outcomes of students placed in Tier 2 or Tier 3 against students just above the cutoff to check for the negative grade 1 pattern found in the national evaluation. |
| Class size in the early grades ◐ Partial | Share of K-3 general education sections above the cap (20 students, or 22 with a full-time aide) each October, by school; share of K-3 teachers without full state certification; K-3 reading and math benchmark growth by school. | Within 1 year, zero K-3 sections above the cap in the schools with the highest share of students eligible for free or reduced-price meals; within 3 years, zero sections above the cap district-wide without written Board approval, and the share of new K-3 teachers without full certification at zero. K-3 reading and math benchmark growth in the schools brought under the cap should rise relative to their own baseline over the same 3 years. | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by October 31, by school and grade K-3, with average and maximum class size, the number of sections above the cap and the reason for each, the share of K-3 teachers without full certification, and K-3 reading and math benchmark growth; any over-cap section after October 31 recorded in Board minutes with written approval. |
| Career and technical education pathways ◐ Partial | Share of graduates who completed a CTE program of study (two or more courses in one pathway) and earned an industry-recognized credential or 12 or more aligned college credits; share of concentrators with a paid work-based learning placement; concentrator graduation rate; and employment or postsecondary enrollment of the prior cohort, each by school and student group | Within 1 year every high school offers at least two qualifying programs of study and the structural elements (partner, dual-credit agreement, placement, credential preparation, fee payment) are in place; within 3 years the share of graduates who are concentrators with a credential or 12 aligned credits, the share of concentrators with a paid placement, and the concentrator graduation rate rise above baseline in each student group, and completers of every retained program show an employment or enrollment advantage over non-completers in the prior cohort | Annual report to the Board by December 1 from the Director of Career and Technical Education, using Perkins V accountability data and state wage and Clearinghouse matches, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, disability status, and sex, with a close-or-redesign recommendation for any program showing no completer advantage for two consecutive years |
| Family engagement and two-way communication ✕ Conflicts | Percent of enrolled students whose family received at least two logged, individualized two-way contacts in the school year (one by October 31, one by March 31), by school and subgroup; plus share of families enrolled in alerts and reachable by verified phone, conference participation rate, and family survey response rate and agreement with 'the school tells me how my child is doing' | Every school reaches a majority of students with two logged two-way contacts in year one and raises that share each year through year three, with the gap between the lowest and highest subgroup narrowing each year; all families enrolled in alerts by default with a verified phone on file by the end of each August; survey response rate and agreement with 'the school tells me how my child is doing' rising each year | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by November 30, by school and subgroup, published on the district website, with a mid-year check at the March 31 deadline |
| Classroom temperature, ventilation and indoor air ○ Silent | Share of classrooms with mechanical cooling, instructional hours above 78 F by building, share of occupied classroom hours with CO2 above 1,000 ppm, measured outdoor air rate per person at commissioning, illness absence by building, and number of heat-related early dismissals | Within 1 year every classroom has a continuous CO2 monitor and no building exceeds 1,000 ppm for more than 10 percent of occupied hours in any month; within 3 years the share of classrooms without mechanical cooling and the instructional hours above 78 F fall each year, no student is taught at or above 88 F, and illness absence by building declines | Annual report from the Director of Facilities to the Board by September 30, with monthly CO2 exceedance rates by building available to the Board on request |
| Instructional coaching and professional development ◐ Partial | Share of eligible teachers (first three years of service or rated below effective) receiving at least eight logged coaching cycles per year, coach caseload per full-time coach, share of PD hours delivered as single-session workshops, change in observed instructional practice scores of coached teachers, and student growth of coached teachers versus comparable uncoached teachers. | By the end of year one, every eligible teacher has eight logged cycles, no full-time coach serves more than 20 teachers, and single-session workshops are no more than 25 percent of district PD hours; by the end of year two, observed instructional practice scores of coached teachers rise over their pre-coaching scores and student growth of coached teachers is at or above that of comparable uncoached teachers, with both measures improving year over year. | Annual report from the Assistant Superintendent for Teaching and Learning to the Board by September 30, disaggregated by school, reviewed by the Board before adoption of the following year's budget. |
| Secondary school start time ◐ Partial | Percentage of secondary students (grades 6 through 12) whose instructional day begins at or after 8:30 a.m., plus median school-night sleep hours reported by secondary students on the district climate survey and chronic absence and first-period tardy rates by building | 100 percent of secondary students begin instruction at or after 8:30 a.m. by the start of the school year following the first March 1 report, with any named noncompliant building in compliance within one school year; median school-night sleep hours rise and chronic absence and first-period tardy rates fall in every converted building by the second annual wellness report | The Superintendent reports to the Board by March 1 each year in the schedule report and annually in the student wellness report, with figures broken out by building |
| Summer learning and extended learning time ✕ Conflicts | Share of enrolled students attending 20 or more days, by building and subgroup, and the spring-to-fall interim assessment change in reading and mathematics for students attending 20 or more days compared with eligible students who did not enroll. | Within 1 to 3 years, the share of enrolled students attending 20 or more days rises each year in every building and subgroup, and students attending 20 or more days show a higher spring-to-fall assessment change in reading and mathematics than eligible non-enrollees in each annual October 15 report. | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by October 15, covering enrollment, the percentage attending 20 or more days by building and subgroup, the spring-to-fall growth comparison for attenders versus eligible non-enrollees, and for any extended-day or extended-year program its added minutes, content, staff and fall-to-spring growth comparison. |
| Community schools and integrated student supports ◐ Partial | For each designated school: full-time coordinator in place, signed lead partner agreement, share of identified student needs matched to a service within 30 school days, and chronic absence, suspension and course-passing rates compared with the three most similar district schools. | By the first December 31 report, every designated school has a full-time coordinator and a signed lead partner agreement and has matched 90 percent of identified needs to a service within 30 school days; within 1 to 3 years, chronic absence and suspension rates at designated schools fall relative to their comparison schools, with a direction of improvement in course-passing rates. | Superintendent's written report to the Board by December 31 each year, one page per designated school showing staffing, agreement status, the 30-school-day match rate, and the three-school comparison on attendance, suspension, course-passing and state assessment results, with the per-pupil cost shown in the annual budget. |
| Access to extracurricular activities, athletics and the arts ◐ Partial | Share of students in each school participating in at least one school-sponsored activity, disaggregated by free-and-reduced-lunch status, race and grade, drawn from student information system activity rosters; share of waiver-eligible students who actually received a waiver; share of elementary students receiving weekly arts instruction. | Within 1 year, 100% of free-and-reduced-lunch, foster and homeless students carry an active waiver flag and 100% of elementary schools provide 60 minutes per week each of visual art and music; within 3 years, the gap in participation rates between free-and-reduced-lunch and non-free-and-reduced-lunch students narrows each year from the baseline, with no subgroup's rate falling. | Superintendent reports to the board by November 1 each year, in public session, with the data posted on the district website; the board's annual fee schedule review follows the report. |
| Gifted and advanced learner identification ◐ Partial | Percentage of each grade 2 and grade 6 cohort screened, and the representation index (share of identified students in a group divided by that group's share of enrollment) for students by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status | 100 percent of each grade 2 and grade 6 cohort screened in year one, and the representation index for every student group reaches at least 0.8 within 3 years, with the identification rate for low-income, Black, Hispanic, and English learner students rising each year until that threshold is met | Annual report by the Director of Advanced Academics to the Board by November 1, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, with the same counts filed to the state gifted data collection and the federal Civil Rights Data Collection |
| Grade retention and promotion ◐ Partial | Share of retained K-3 students whose retention record shows a completed intervention plan, written parent notice at least 90 school days before year end, a good-cause exemption review where required and an individual reading plan dated before the first day of the repeated year; number of students retained in grades 6 through 8 on the basis of test scores; reading proficiency and attendance of retained students one and three years after retention compared with barely promoted peers; discipline incidents of retained students. | By the end of year one, every retained K-3 student has a complete intervention record, parent notice, exemption review and individual reading plan, zero students in grades 6 through 8 are retained on test scores alone, and no student is retained more than once in K-3; within 1 to 3 years, retained students' reading proficiency rises relative to barely promoted peers and their attendance and discipline do not worsen relative to those peers. | The Superintendent presents the retention report to the Board each September, with the compliance measures for the prior year's retentions and the reading proficiency and attendance of students retained two years earlier, disaggregated by grade, school, race, disability and EL status, and the Board reviews any school with incomplete records or a subgroup retention share above its enrollment share at that meeting. |
| Lockdown and active shooter drills ○ Silent | Share of drills that are announced and procedure-only; share of observed classrooms executing the lockdown procedure correctly; drill-related preparedness and anxiety items on the annual climate survey; counseling contacts in the week after each drill; parent notification compliance. | Within one year, 100 percent of drills in which students participate are announced, procedure-only and preceded by parent notification, with zero simulation-style drills; from year one to year three, the share of classrooms executing the procedure correctly rises each year while drill-related anxiety items on the climate survey do not rise and post-drill counseling contacts do not increase. | Annual report from the Director of Safety to the Board by June 30, with drill counts and types by school, procedural checklist results, post-drill counseling contacts, climate survey drill items and parent notification compliance. |
| Math acceleration, eighth grade algebra, and tracking ○ Silent | Share of students meeting the published placement criterion who are placed in the accelerated course, and share of eighth graders completing Algebra I with a passing end-of-course score, each disaggregated by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, plus the Algebra I repeat rate. | Within 1 year, every student who meets the published criterion is placed unless a parent opts out in writing, and Algebra I is offered in grade 8 at every middle school; within 3 years, the share of eighth graders completing Algebra I with a passing end-of-course score rises for every student group with no increase in the Algebra I repeat rate for any group, and the gap in criterion-meeting placement rates between student groups closes to zero. | The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 15 each year, with every measure disaggregated by race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, and with placement appeals and overrides listed by school. |
| One-to-one devices and educational software ◐ Partial | Share of licensed products above the $25,000 threshold that have a written evidence review on file before purchase or renewal, share of licensed students active weekly per product, and achievement of exposed cohorts versus the pre-adoption baseline by subgroup on state assessments. | Within year one, 100 percent of purchases and renewals above $25,000 have an evidence review on file before the Board vote; every licensed product reaches at least 50 percent of licensed students active each semester or is brought to a Board vote; by the third October 1 report, no exposed subgroup trends below its pre-adoption baseline and math achievement for exposed cohorts is moving upward. | Director of Technology to the Board each February 1 and August 1 on usage and cost per product; Chief Academic Officer to the Board each October 1 on achievement by subgroup against baseline, with both reports posted publicly. |
| Recess ○ Silent | Share of K-5 students scheduled for at least 20 minutes of daily recess per the certified master schedules, and the count of recess removals logged in the student information system by building and reason | Within 1 year, 100 percent of K-5 students in every elementary building have at least 20 minutes of scheduled daily recess, and all logged recess removals cite an immediate safety risk, with the count of removals declining year over year in years 1 to 3 | Superintendent reports to the Board by November 1 each year with recess minutes by building, recess removals by building and reason, and correction plans for any building below 20 minutes |
| Access to rigorous coursework (automatic enrollment, AP, IB, dual credit) ○ Silent | Share of students meeting the readiness threshold who are enrolled in the corresponding advanced course the next term, disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, plus AP, IB, and dual-credit participation and pass rates by group and opt-out counts by school. | By the first October 15 report, every eligible student not covered by a written opt-out is enrolled in the corresponding advanced course, and by the third annual report the enrollment rate among eligible students no longer differs by race, ethnicity, or income, with advanced course completion and exam pass rates by group holding steady or rising rather than falling. | The Superintendent's annual report to the Board by October 15, published on the district website, with the eligible, enrolled, and opted-out counts and completion and exam pass rates disaggregated by school, race, ethnicity, income, English learner status, and disability status, cross-checked against the state report card and College Board and IB data. |
| Special education placement and inclusion ◐ Partial | Share of students with IEPs in general education 80 percent or more of the day, 40 to 79 percent, and under 40 percent, disaggregated by school, disability category, race and English learner status; achievement and growth of students with disabilities on state tests versus peers; graduation, dropout and suspension rates of students with disabilities; share of IEPs documenting consideration of supplementary aids and services before a more restrictive placement; share of co-taught sections staffed by a certified special educator for the full period. | Within 1 year, every reviewed IEP recommending a setting below 80 percent general education documents the supplementary aids and services considered and the supporting data, every co-taught section is staffed by a certified special educator for the full period, and every assigned teacher completes 12 hours of training; within 3 years, the share of students with IEPs in general education 80 percent or more of the day rises and the achievement gap, dropout rate and suspension rate for students with disabilities fall from baseline, with no decline in peer achievement. | Director of Special Education reports to the Board by November 1 each year, by school, disability category, race and English learner status, with the Board comparing each year's figures to baseline and to the state's Indicator 5 targets. |
| New teacher induction and mentoring ○ Silent | Share of first-year and second-year teachers assigned a trained same-subject or same-grade-band mentor before the first student day; mean mentor contact hours per inductee per month; one-year, three-year and five-year retention of new hires by school and by induction participation | Within 1 year, every inductee has an assigned trained mentor before the first student day and every year-one mentor pair logs weekly contact; within 3 years, one-year and three-year retention of new hires who completed induction is higher than the pre-policy baseline and no lower than for new hires who did not participate | Director of Human Resources to the Board by October 31 each year, with Board review of program funding at the November meeting |
| School nurses and health services ◐ Partial | Share of school buildings with a registered nurse on site every full school day, and number of days any building lacked an RN, from the district staffing roster; illness-related absence rate for students with asthma, diabetes, seizure disorders and food allergies, from the student information system; count of emergency 911 calls from schools. | 100 percent of buildings have a full-time RN on site every day students are present, with zero uncovered days, within 1 year of adoption; illness-related absence for students with chronic health conditions declines from the baseline within 2 years and does not rise thereafter. | Coordinator of Health Services reports to the Board by October 15 each year: nursing staff by building, workload and acuity results, days each building lacked an RN on site, illness-related and chronic absence for students with chronic health conditions, 911 calls from schools, and Medicaid reimbursement received. |
| Physical education minutes and activity policy ◐ Partial | Share of grade levels in each building scheduled for at least 150 minutes per week of PE (K-5) or 225 minutes per week (6-12); share of PE sections taught by a certified physical educator; observed share of PE lesson time in moderate-to-vigorous activity; count of waivers, substitutions and disciplinary withholdings. | By the September 30 certification in year two, every grade in every building is scheduled for at least 150 minutes (K-5) or 225 minutes (6-12) of PE per week, every PE section is taught by a certified physical educator, waivers, substitutions and disciplinary withholdings are zero, and the observed share of lesson time in moderate-to-vigorous activity is at least half in each building and rising from baseline in each later year. | Superintendent's annual PE report to the Board by December 1, built on the Director of Curriculum's September 30 certification, with minutes by grade and building, certification share, observation results, waiver and withholding counts, and a dated correction plan for any shortfall. |
| Physical restraint and seclusion ○ Silent | Incidents of physical restraint, mechanical restraint and seclusion per 100 students, by building and by disability status, race and sex, from the district incident log reconciled to the Civil Rights Data Collection submission; injuries to students and staff; share of incidents with same-day parent notification; share of incidents involving a student with no behavior intervention plan. | Zero seclusions, mechanical restraints, chemical restraints and prone or supine restraints from the first quarterly report onward; physical restraints per 100 students declining each year for 3 years against the baseline year; 100 percent of incidents with same-day parent notification and a written report within two school days by the end of year one; the share of restraints involving students with disabilities moving toward their share of enrollment over 3 years. | The Superintendent reports to the Board each quarter and publishes on the district website by September 30 for the prior school year the number of restraints by building, disability status, race and sex, the number of injuries, the share with same-day parent notification, and the district's Civil Rights Data Collection submission, with a note explaining any difference between the log and the submission; a zero submission from a district with special education programs is flagged for Board inquiry. |
| Lead in school drinking water ○ Silent | Share of drinking and cooking outlets tested within the last 3 years, share of tested outlets at or above 5 ppb, days between a result at or above 5 ppb and outlet shutoff, number of NSF/ANSI 53 filtered bottle-filling stations per building floor, and share of families notified within 30 days, all drawn from the district's published results and the annual Board report. | 100 percent of drinking and cooking outlets tested by June 30, 2027 and retested within every 3 year cycle thereafter; every outlet at or above 5 ppb out of service within 24 hours of the result; 100 percent of results posted and families notified within 30 days; at least one filtered station on every floor of every building by the end of year one; and the share of outlets at or above 5 ppb falling each cycle toward zero. | The Director of Facilities reports to the Board by September 30 each year, with results posted by outlet on the district website within 30 days of receipt and the filter replacement log attached. |
| Language access for families ○ Silent | Share of families with a recorded home language other than English who received each required notice category (enrollment, discipline, special education, attendance, health, emergency) in their preferred language, share of interpreter requests fulfilled within five school days, and conference and IEP meeting participation rates of limited-English families compared with all families. | Within 1 to 3 years, the share of required notices delivered in the family's preferred language rises each year, every interpreter request is fulfilled within five school days or sooner where a legal deadline applies, and the gap in conference and IEP participation between limited-English families and all families narrows year over year. | The language access coordinator reports to the Board by October 31 each year in a public written report, broken out by language, with interpreter fulfillment times, participation rate comparisons and complaints received. |
| Student searches and due process in discipline ✕ Conflicts | Share of suspensions with a documented pre-removal conference (charge, evidence and student response) and same-day parent notice; share of expulsion hearings with timely written notice, an independent hearing officer and a written decision within five school days; number of searches logged with a written basis, by building, race and disability; number of strip searches; manifestation determinations completed within ten school days; complaints and appeals and their outcomes. | Zero strip searches in every year; every exclusion over ten days has written notice at least five school days before the hearing and a written decision within five school days after it; every manifestation determination completed within ten school days; the share of suspensions with a documented pre-removal conference and same-day parent notice rises each year, with the gap between buildings and between student groups narrowing, as shown in the September 30 report within 1 to 3 years. | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by September 30, disaggregated by building, race and disability status, with the discipline record audit results attached. |
| Grading practices (zeros, late work, minimum grades, standards-based grading) ◐ Partial | Correlation between final course grades and end-of-course or state test scores by school and course; spread of failure rates across teachers of the same course; share of students with a D or F who passed the end-of-course exam and vice versa; count of grading appeals; share of courses with a published grading plan within ten school days. | Within 1 year, 100 percent of courses have a published grading plan within the first ten school days and all same-course sections in a school use a common scale and weights; within 1 to 3 years, the grade-to-test correlation rises and the spread of failure rates across teachers of the same course narrows in every school and course relative to the baseline, and the share of students with a D or F who passed the exam, and with an A or B who failed it, falls each year. | The Director of Assessment reports to the Board each August, by school and course, with the first report due in the August following adoption and the baseline comparison carried forward in every later report. |
| Homework ◐ Partial | Share of students in each grade band whose reported nightly homework time exceeds the policy limit (ten minutes per grade level in grades 3 through 8, two hours in grades 9 through 12), from the annual March student and family survey; share of courses with homework weighted above ten percent of the grade; homework completion rate gap by free-lunch status. | By the second May 31 report, no school reports average nightly time above the grade-band limit, no course weights homework above ten percent of the grade, and the share of high school students reporting more than two hours per night falls each year compared with the prior survey; the completion gap by free-lunch status narrows year over year within 1 to 3 years. | Superintendent reports to the Board by May 31 each year with survey results by grade band and free-lunch status, homework grade weight by course, the list of schools exceeding the limit, and the correction directed at each. |
| Student data privacy and vendor contracts ◐ Partial | Share of software products in use that collect student PII with a signed data privacy agreement on file containing all five required terms, plus days from confirmed breach to family notification and share of FERPA parent requests fulfilled within the statutory window | 100% of products in use have a compliant signed agreement by the end of year one and at every September 30 report thereafter; every confirmed breach is reported by the vendor within 72 hours; the public list is updated within 30 days of each change; 100% of teachers complete annual training | Privacy Officer presents to the Board by September 30 each year, with the public approved-software list and breach log posted on the district website |
| Bullying prevention ◐ Partial | Annual student-reported bullying victimization prevalence on the fixed Olweus Bullying Questionnaire item, by school, grade and demographic group, plus number of reports received, number investigated within the two-school-day and ten-school-day deadlines, number substantiated, and share of students who say they would report. | Within 3 years of the baseline administration, district-wide student-reported victimization prevalence falls by at least 15 percent from baseline, consistent with the 15 to 16 percent victimization reduction in program meta-analyses, and in every year 100 percent of logged reports show an investigation begun within two school days and an outcome documented within ten school days, with the share of students who say they would report rising each year. | The Superintendent's annual written report to the Board by October 1, presenting prevalence by school, grade and demographic group, reports received, reports investigated within deadline, reports substantiated, and the three-year trend, with the Board recording whether the target was met in its minutes. |
| Behavioral threat assessment ◐ Partial | Share of assessed students who received out-of-school suspension, expulsion, alternative placement or law-enforcement referral versus the share who received counseling and a support plan, and the referral rate per 1,000 students by race, disability status and gender compared with enrollment. | Within 1 to 3 years, the share of assessed students receiving counseling and a support plan rises each year while the share receiving out-of-school suspension, expulsion, alternative placement or law-enforcement referral falls each year; every substantive case has a written plan; team training completion is 100 percent; the referral rate by race, disability status and gender matches enrollment with no group gap; and assessed threats later carried out stay near the published level of about 1 in 100 or below. | Superintendent to the Board by September 30 each year, as the clause requires, with a one-page comparison to the prior year and to the published CSTAG figures. |
| Generative AI use by students and staff ◐ Partial | Unaided assessment results in courses using each approved AI tool versus matched courses, together with the share of approved tools configured to withhold direct answers, the share of courses with a written AI-use expectation on the syllabus, and the number of AI-related integrity cases overturned. | Within 1 year, every tool on the approved list has answer-withholding on for student practice use, every course states an AI-use expectation by the tenth instructional day, and unaided assessment results in courses using approved tools are no lower than in matched courses, with no integrity finding resting on detection software alone; sustained in years 2 and 3. | Chief Academic Officer reports to the Board by October 1 each year; the Board records whether the no-deficit condition was met for each tool and whether any tool was removed from the list as a result. |
| Teacher evaluation and feedback ◐ Partial | Share of teachers who received at least two observations with at least one unannounced, median days from observation to written feedback, share of evaluators passing calibration, share of below-effective teachers with a growth plan within 20 school days, distribution of summative ratings by school and evaluator, and correlation between ratings and student growth | Within 1 year every teacher has at least two observations with at least one unannounced, median days to written feedback is five school days or fewer, every evaluator conducting observations has passed the annual calibration exercise, every teacher rated below effective has a written growth plan within 20 school days and eight coaching cycles the following year, and no single measure exceeds one third of any rating; within 3 years ratings show a positive correlation with student growth and the share rated below proficient exceeds the under 1 percent pattern of the statewide reforms | Annual report from the Director of Human Resources to the Board by August 31, covering ratings by school and evaluator, calibration results, observations per teacher and share unannounced, median days to feedback, rating to growth correlation, and retention by rating level; Board reliability review each year and an external review every five years |
| Dress codes and uniforms ◐ Partial | Dress code interventions, class removals and suspensions per 100 students by building, race and sex, drawn from the student information system log that includes informal removals; instructional minutes lost to dress code enforcement; share of code rules that are gender-specific or require measuring a student's body; parent and student complaints about dress enforcement. | Zero class removals, send-homes, suspensions or activity exclusions for dress code violations in every year after adoption; zero gender-specific rules and zero body-measuring rules in the district and building codes within 90 days; and no student group's dress code intervention rate exceeding twice the rate for white or male students in any building by the end of year one, holding in years two and three. | Annual report to the Board by September 30 covering the prior school year, presented by the Superintendent, with the count of rules revised or repealed and the number of complaints received, and posted publicly with the Board minutes. |
| School resource officers and school policing ◐ Partial | Annual counts and rates per 1,000 students of school-based arrests, citations, law-enforcement referrals and uses of force, by school and by race, disability status and gender; share of referrals arising from non-criminal code-of-conduct matters; out-of-school suspension rate by school; perceived-safety items on the climate survey; complaints against officers. | Within 1 year of adoption, the share of law-enforcement referrals arising from non-criminal code-of-conduct matters falls from baseline and continues to fall each year; within 3 years, arrest and referral rates per 1,000 students decline from baseline overall and for Black students, male students and students with disabilities, with the gap between those groups and the district rate narrowing each year, while perceived-safety items do not decline. | The Superintendent reports to the Board by October 15 each year and publishes the report on the district website; the Board reviews it in a public meeting before voting on renewal of any officer assignment or memorandum of understanding. |
| English learner programs and reclassification ◐ Partial | Annual reclassification rate by years in program and program model; number and share of long-term English learners (6 or more years); ELA and math achievement of former English learners tracked for four years after reclassification; share of English learners enrolled in grade-level core courses and advanced courses; dual-language seats offered versus applicants. | Within 180 days, zero English learners placed in a course below grade level solely on the basis of English learner status and zero reclassifications resting on a single test score; within 1 to 3 years, the share of long-term English learners (6 or more years) declines each year from baseline, the reclassification rate rises from baseline, former English learners show no decline in ELA and math achievement across the four monitored years, and every grade level with 20 or more English learners sharing a home language has a dual-language or bilingual program or a Board-reviewed reason it does not. | The Director of Multilingual Programs reports to the Board by October 15 each year, disaggregated by school, program model, home language and years in program, and posts the report with program models and exit criteria on the district website; the Board compares each measure against the baseline year and the prior year. |
| Hazing and athletics safety ◐ Partial | Share of coaches, sponsors and student participants with current hazing training; hazing reports and substantiated cases per season by team or group; climate-survey item on initiation experiences; concussions per 1,000 athlete-exposures and share with documented written clearance before return; exertional heat illness and cardiac events per season; share of venues with a rehearsed emergency action plan and an AED within three minutes. | Within 1 year, 100 percent of coaches and sponsors trained before the season, 100 percent of venues with a rehearsed emergency action plan and an AED within three minutes, and 100 percent of concussion returns with documented written clearance. Reported concussions and hazing reports are expected to rise in the first 1 to 2 years as identification improves; within 3 years, the recurrent-concussion rate and exertional heat illness count per season should decline from the year-one baseline, consistent with the 2.6-year post-law decline and the roughly 0.45 incidence rate ratio seen for heat rules. | Athletic Director to the Board by July 31 each year, with the Superintendent presenting the climate-survey initiation item and any substantiated hazing cases in the same report. |
| Corporal punishment ◐ Partial | Number of instances of corporal punishment in the district, counted as substantiated allegations in the Superintendent's annual report and as the figure submitted to the Civil Rights Data Collection, reconciled to building discipline logs; plus presence of the written prohibition in both handbooks. | Zero instances of corporal punishment reported in the first full school year after adoption and every year after, with the reconciled count and the CRDC submission both at zero, and the prohibition published in both handbooks each August. | The Superintendent's written report to the Board by September 30 each year, stating substantiated allegations, action taken on each, the CRDC figure and the reconciliation to building logs, with the handbook publication dates attached. |
| District pre-kindergarten ○ Silent | Kindergarten entry assessment results for former district pre-K attendees versus non-attendees by subgroup, and third-grade reading proficiency, grade retention and special education referral rates for each tracked pre-K cohort compared with the district average. | Within 1 year, every pre-K classroom meets all five program conditions in the clause (adopted curriculum, certified lead teacher, 20 or fewer children with two adults, full day, monthly coaching). Within 1 to 3 years, former pre-K attendees score higher on the fall kindergarten entry assessment than non-attendees in every reported subgroup, and the tracked cohort shows grade retention and special education referral rates below the district average with third-grade reading proficiency at or above it, with no cohort trending worse than the district average on any of the three measures. | Superintendent reports to the Board each November 1 (enrollment, wait lists, class size, certification, kindergarten entry results by subgroup) and each August 1 (third-grade reading, retention and special education referral for the cohort that attended four years earlier versus the district average), with results published on the district website. |
| Attendance messaging to families ○ Silent | Share of students reaching 5 percent absence whose family received a personalized absence message in the family's preferred language within 10 school days, from the student information system messaging log; chronic absence rate by school and subgroup; and percent of students with a verified phone number or address on file. | Messaging timeliness at the 5 percent trigger rises each year from the first-year rate; verified contact information coverage rises each year from the 30-day audit; and the district chronic absence rate falls from the prior-year baseline within 1 to 3 years, with a reduction of about 10 percent (K-12) to 15 percent (K-5) as the reference range from the evidence. | Superintendent's annual report to the Board by October 31, covering the prior year, with the four measures broken out by school, subgroup, and language. |
| Full-day kindergarten ○ Silent | Share of kindergarten students enrolled in a tuition-free full-day program, by building and subgroup, from the enrollment file; kindergarten daily instructional minutes compared with grade 1; end-of-year literacy and numeracy screening results by subgroup; kindergarten chronic absence rate. | Within 1 year of adoption, every elementary attendance area offers tuition-free full-day kindergarten with daily instructional minutes equal to grade 1, every age-eligible child whose family requests it is enrolled with no waiting list, and the only half-day enrollments are those with a written family request; within 1 to 3 years, end-of-year literacy and numeracy screening results rise for every reported subgroup, with the largest gains expected among Hispanic children and children with low entering skills, and kindergarten chronic absence does not rise. | Superintendent to the Board by October 15 each year (full-day enrollment by building and subgroup, waiting list, fall entry assessment) and by July 15 each year (end-of-year literacy and numeracy screening by subgroup, kindergarten chronic absence rate), each with the prior year's figures alongside for comparison. |
| Universal free school meals and breakfast after the bell ○ Silent | Average daily breakfast and lunch participation as a share of enrollment by school, breakfast participation as a share of lunch participation by school, and share of eligible schools operating under CEP, all from monthly USDA reimbursement claims; chronic absence and out-of-school suspension rates from the state report card. | Within 1 year, 100 percent of schools at or above the 25 percent identified student percentage threshold operate under CEP or a state universal-meals program, and every school serves breakfast after the bell; within 2 years, every school's breakfast participation reaches at least 70 percent of its lunch participation, and district lunch participation rises by at least 5 percentage points over baseline, with suspension and chronic absence rates trending down across years of adoption. | Annual report by the Director of Nutrition Services to the Board by October 15, with CEP status by school, prior-year breakfast and lunch participation by school, the list of schools below the 70 percent breakfast-to-lunch ratio with corrective plans, and state report card chronic absence and suspension rates compared across years of adoption. |
| Social-emotional learning ○ Silent | Share of grades K-12 using a program with a CASEL SELect or What Works Clearinghouse moderate or strong rating; share of classrooms meeting the program's fidelity threshold on observations; climate survey scores on belonging and trusted adults by school; office discipline referrals and suspensions by school. | Every grade K-12 using a rated program within 1 year; the share of classrooms meeting the fidelity threshold rising each year from the year-one baseline; climate survey scores on belonging and trusted adults rising and discipline referrals and suspensions falling at each school within 1 to 3 years. | The Director of Curriculum reports to the Board by November 1 each year the program in use at each grade, the share of classrooms meeting the fidelity threshold, climate survey results on belonging and trusted adults by school, and discipline referrals and suspensions by school, and posts the report on the district website alongside the published scope and sequence. |
| Personal phones during the school day ◐ Partial | Share of classrooms observed with phones stored in the semester walkthrough sample; device-violation referrals per 100 students by school and grade; student survey item on in-class distraction; and the state assessment trend for the lowest-achieving quartile compared with the district average. | Within 1 year, the share of classrooms with phones stored rises and device-violation referrals per 100 students fall from the first semester to the second; within 1 to 3 years, the student distraction item improves and the lowest-achieving quartile's state assessment trend closes toward the district average rather than widening, with no first or second offense resulting in exclusion from instruction in any year. | The Superintendent presents the annual report to the Board by October 1 each year, disaggregated by school and grade, and the Board reviews the lowest-quartile achievement trend at the same meeting once state assessment results are available. |
| Remote instruction days (virtual snow days and planned remote learning) ○ Silent | Student attendance on remote instruction days (share logging into synchronous instruction) by school and by free-and-reduced-lunch status, compared with the prior month's in-person attendance rate; number of remote days used per year and reason for each; share of households confirmed to have a device and connectivity; minutes of live instruction per remote day. | Within 1 year: no remote days used for planned purposes, no more than five remote days counted toward instructional time, every remote day delivering at least two hours of live instruction for secondary and one hour for elementary students, and the gap between remote-day attendance and the prior month's in-person rate narrowing each year, with the free-and-reduced-lunch gap no wider than the overall gap. | Superintendent report to the Board within 30 days of each remote instruction day, Director of Technology certification by October 1, and an annual summary by June 30. |
| Vision screening and eyeglasses ○ Silent | From the school nurse's referral log and the district benchmark assessment: share of students screened each year by grade; share of referred students examined within 60 days and fitted with glasses within 90 days; share still wearing glasses at the semester classroom check; reading growth of students who received glasses versus their prior-year growth. | By the end of year one, every student in the designated grades is screened, every student who fails screening is examined within 60 days and fitted with glasses within 90 days, and the share wearing glasses at each semester check rises from the first check onward; by the end of year two, reading growth of students who received glasses exceeds their own prior-year growth, with the largest gains among students in the lowest baseline reading quartile and students in special education. | Coordinator of Health Services to the Board by December 15 each year, by school and by grade, with the semester wear-check results and the 60-day and 90-day delivery shares shown separately so the Board can see whether the follow-up that sustains the effect is happening. |
| School climate measurement ○ Silent | Share of schools that reach a 70 percent response rate among students and staff, results published by school and demographic group by August 31, and the number of school improvement plans that name the lowest-scoring climate domain with assigned actions and budget | In year one, every school reaches at least 70 percent of enrolled students and staff, results are published by August 31, and every school improvement plan submitted by October 1 cites its lowest-scoring climate domain; by year three, domain scores in safety, relationships, engagement and environment show a rising three-year trend at each school, with no demographic group falling | The Director of Research and Accountability publishes results by August 31 each year and the Superintendent presents the district summary to the Board at a public meeting by October 31, with the response rate by school and the count of improvement plans citing a climate finding |
| Seated lunch time ◐ Partial | Seated lunch minutes per lunch period by building, measured from the time the last student in line is served to the end of the period, from the master schedule plus a cafeteria line-time observation each semester; the share of buildings meeting 20 seated minutes; fruit and vegetable plate-waste or production-record data from food service. | Every building and every lunch period provides at least 20 seated minutes for lunch and 10 for breakfast by the start of the next school year, with the count of buildings below 20 minutes at zero in each annual report thereafter and fruit and vegetable plate waste moving down from baseline over 1 to 3 years. | Annual wellness report presented to the Board no later than its first regular meeting in October, showing seated lunch minutes by building and lunch period, the number of buildings not meeting 20 minutes, a dated correction plan for each, and fruit and vegetable plate-waste or production-record data. |
| Teacher home visits ○ Silent | Percent of enrolled families receiving at least one relationship-building home visit per year, by school and grade band, and the chronic absence rate of visited versus non-visited students in the same schools, adjusted for prior-year attendance; also share of visits in the family's home language and teacher participation rate. | Every school reaches at least 10 percent of enrolled families with a visit within 1 to 3 years, with all transition-grade and prior-year chronically absent families offered a visit in year one; visited students show a lower chronic absence rate than comparable non-visited students in the same schools in each annual report, and no visits are logged as selected by discipline history. | The Superintendent reports to the Board by September 30 each year, by school: number and share of families visited, visits by language, staff participation, offer and completion rates for transition grades and prior-year chronically absent students, and chronic absence and course-passing rates of visited versus non-visited students adjusted for prior-year attendance. |
| Four-day school week ○ Silent | Achievement growth in reading and mathematics on state and interim assessments compared with the district's prior three-year average and with comparable five-day districts; total annual instructional hours per grade span; chronic absence rate; actual savings as a share of operating expenditure; fifth-day meal and supervision access for low-income students | Total instructional hours in every grade span equal to or greater than the most recent five-day calendar in the adopted calendar; achievement growth in reading and mathematics at or above the prior three-year average in each of the three years after adoption, with no two consecutive years below it; chronic absence rate no higher than the prior three-year average | Superintendent's written report to the Board by October 1 in each of the three school years after adoption, presented at a public meeting and posted with the original pre-adoption analysis |
How the score is built
| Dimension | Weight | Value | How |
|---|---|---|---|
| Evidence alignment | 40% | 14 | Per domain: the share of the standard's elements present in the manual (the core element counts double); 0 for a conflict; silence scored by whether silence is harmful. Weighted by stakes (1-5) and evidence tier (A 1, B 0.8, C 0.6, D 0.4). |
| Specificity | 15% | 60 | Share of governing sections that commit to a number, a report, a deadline or a trigger. |
| Currency | 10% | 38 | Share of governing sections not judged stale against law and practice since 2020. |
| Coverage | 15% | 61 | Share of domains where silence is harmful that the manual addresses at all. |
Judgments on each section (does it govern the domain, does it meet the standard, is the commitment measurable, is it stale) come from a calibrated decision model (Jev) reading the section text against the standard; 3 fresh judgments for this report, the rest cached. Verdicts and the quoted sentences are shown so a reader can disagree with any one of them.
If we got something wrong
Every verdict above shows the sentence it rests on. If a section was misread, a citation is wrong, or there is research we have not weighed, tell us; a person reads every submission and accepted corrections are listed on the corrections page. Superintendents and board members can also join the invite-only mastermind calls.
Alignment Audit by EarthPilot. Every citation is checked against Crossref and OpenAlex before it is shown; evidence tiers and counter-evidence are printed, not hidden. Scores are a judgment with a published formula, not a measurement.